2 Otjikoto Final EIA Report 5MB - Asecnam.com

Otjikoto Gold Mine 

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Otjikoto Gold 

Mine Project 

SLR Project No.: 733.01023.0002 

Final Report VOLUME 1 

July 2012 

Auryx Gold Namibia

Otjikoto Gold Mine 

Environmental Impact Assessment for the Proposed Otjikoto Gold 

Mine Project 

SLR Project No.: 733.01023.0002 

Report No.: 1 

July 2012

DOCUMENT INFORMATION 

Title Otjikoto Gold Mine EIA Report 

Project Manager Werner Petrick and assisted by Alex Speiser 

Project Manager e-mail werner@biwac.com 

Author Chris Herbert 

Reviewer Alex Pheiffer 

Client Auryx Gold Namibia 

Date last printed 2012/07/17 06:08:00 PM 

Date last saved 2012/07/17 06:08:00 PM 

Comments 

Keywords EIA, EMP, Otjikoto Gold mine 

Project Number SLR Ref 

Report Number 1 

Status Final 

Issue Date July 2012

SLR Namibia (Pty) Ltd 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 

Report No.1 

Page i 

ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT FOR THE PROPOSED OTJIKOTO 

GOLD MINE PROJECT 

CONTENTS 

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................... I 

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 1-1 

1.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE PROPOSED PROJECT.................................................................................... 1-1 

1.2 PROJECT MOTIVATION (NEED AND DESIRABILITY) ............................................................................. 1-2 

1.3 INTRODUCTION TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT ......................................................... 1-4 

1.3.1 EIA APPROACH AND PROCESS .................................................................................................................... 1-7 

1.3.2 EIA TEAM ................................................................................................................................................ 1-8 

1.3.3 CONTACT DETAILS FOR RESPONSIBLE AURYX GOLD PARTIES......................................................................... 1-9 

2 ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND POLICIES ...................................................................................... 2-1 

2.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 2-1 

2.2 SUMMARY OF APPLICABLE ACTS ..................................................................................................... 2-1 

2.2.1 THE CONSTITUTION OF THE REPUBLIC OF NAMIBIA (1990) ............................................................................ 2-1 

2.2.2 MINERALS (PROSPECTING AND MINING) ACT NO. 33 OF 1992 ...................................................................... 2-2 

2.2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ACT, NO. 7 OF 2007 .................................................................................. 2-3 

2.2.4 WATER AMENDMENT ACT, NO. 54 OF 1956 ................................................................................................ 2-3 

2.2.5 NATURE CONSERVATION ORDINANCE, NO. 4 OF 1975 ................................................................................. 2-4 

2.2.6 NATIONAL HERITAGE ACT, NO. 27 OF 2004 ................................................................................................ 2-4 

2.2.7 PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND ENERGY ACT, NO. 13 OF 1990 ........................................................................ 2-4 

2.2.8 NAMIBIAN WATER CORPORATION ACT, NO. 12 OF 1997 ............................................................................... 2-5 

2.2.9 FOREST ACT, NO. 12 OF 2001 .................................................................................................................. 2-5 

2.2.10 ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION PREVENTION ORDINANCE, NO. 11 OF 1976 .......................................................... 2-5 

2.2.11 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE ORDINANCE, NO. 14 OF 1974 ............................................................................... 2-5 

2.2.12 EXPLOSIVE ACT, NO. 26 OF 1956 .............................................................................................................. 2-5 

2.2.13 THE REGIONAL COUNCILS ACT (NO. 22 OF 1992) ....................................................................................... 2-5 

2.2.14 LABOUR ACT, NO. 11 OF 2007 .................................................................................................................. 2-6 

2.3 OVERALL PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT (SAIEA) ................................................. 2-6 

2.4 NAMIBIAN POLICIES ........................................................................................................................ 2-7 

2.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT POLICY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONSERVATION 

(1994) .................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 

2.4.2 MINERALS POLICY OF NAMIBIA (2004) ........................................................................................................ 2-7 

2.4.3 POLICY FOR THE CONSERVATION OF BIOTIC DIVERSITY AND HABITAT PROTECTION (1994) .............................. 2-7 

2.5 INTERNATIONAL TREATIES AND PROTOCOLS ..................................................................................... 2-7 

2.6 WORLD BANK STANDARDS ............................................................................................................. 2-8 

2.6.1 IFC PERFORMANCE STANDARDS ................................................................................................................ 2-8 

2.7 EQUATOR PRINCIPLES .................................................................................................................... 2-9 

2.8 NAMIBIA’S DEVELOPMENT CONTEXT ............................................................................................. 2-11 

2.8.1 VISION 2030 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-11 

2.8.2 NAMIBIA’S MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS (MDGS) ............................................................................. 2-12 

2.8.3 THE FOURTH NATIONAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN 2012- 2017 ......................................................................... 2-12 

3 PUBLIC CONSULTATION ................................................................................................................. 3-1 

3.1 INTERESTED AND AFFECTED PARTIES (IAPS) .................................................................................. 3-1 

3.2 THE SCOPING PHASE ..................................................................................................................... 3-2 

3.2.1 SCOPING REPORT .................................................................................................................................... 3-2 

3.2.2 ADVERTISEMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 3-3 

3.2.3 PUBLIC MEETINGS .................................................................................................................................... 3-3 

3.2.4 ISSUES RAISED DURING THE SCOPING PHASE PUBLIC MEETINGS ..................................................................... 3-3 

3.3 PUBLIC CONSULTATION AND REVIEW OF DRAFT EIA REPORT ............................................................ 3-5 

3.3.1 PUBLIC OPEN DAYS .................................................................................................................................. 3-6 

3.3.2 MEETING WITH THE DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS AND FORESTRY AND NAMWATER ................................. 3-6 

Otjikoto Gold Mine EIA Report July 2012


SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page ii 

4 DESCRIPTION OF CURRENT ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 4-1 

4.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.2 CLIMATE ........................................................................................................................................ 4-1 

4.2.1 SYNOPTIC CLIMATOLOGY........................................................................................................................... 4-1 

4.2.2 REGIONAL METEOROLOGY......................................................................................................................... 4-2 

4.2.3 OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE SITE ....................................................................................................................... 4-4 

4.3 GEOLOGY AND SURFACE WATER FLOW AND TOPOGRAPHY ............................................................ 4-14 

4.3.1 GEOLOGY .............................................................................................................................................. 4-14 

4.3.2 SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE AND TOPOGRAPHY ........................................................................................ 4-15 

4.4 GROUNDWATER ........................................................................................................................... 4-17 

4.4.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-17 

4.4.2 HYDROCENSUS ...................................................................................................................................... 4-17 

4.4.3 AQUIFER CLASSIFICATION ........................................................................................................................ 4-19 

4.4.4 HYDROGEOLOGY AND CONCEPTUAL MODEL .............................................................................................. 4-19 

4.4.5 WATER QUALITY SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 4-19 

4.5 AIR QUALITY ................................................................................................................................ 4-20 

4.5.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-20 

4.5.2 ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY AND MIXING DEPTH ............................................................................................ 4-20 

4.5.3 EXISTING SOURCES OF ATMOSPHERIC EMISSION IN THE PROJECT AREA ...................................................... 4-22 

4.5.4 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS QUO ......................................................................................................... 4-23 

4.5.5 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................. 4-28 

4.6 BIODIVERSITY .............................................................................................................................. 4-29 

4.6.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-29 

4.6.2 REGIONAL CONTEXT ................................................................................................................................ 4-30 

4.6.3 VEGETATION .......................................................................................................................................... 4-30 

4.6.4 AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES AND MAMMALS ..................................................................................................... 4-35 

4.6.5 ENTOMOLOGY ........................................................................................................................................ 4-38 

4.6.6 ARACHNIDA ............................................................................................................................................ 4-43 

4.6.7 PAN INVERTEBRATE SPECIALIST STUDY .................................................................................................... 4-46 

4.6.8 AVIFAUNA .............................................................................................................................................. 4-48 

4.7 ECONOMY ................................................................................................................................... 4-51 

4.7.1 NATIONAL ECONOMIC SETTING ................................................................................................................. 4-51 

4.7.2 CURRENT LAND USES .............................................................................................................................. 4-54 

4.8 SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................. 4-56 

4.8.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-56 

4.8.2 POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................... 4-56 

4.8.3 THE AFFECTED COMMUNITY .................................................................................................................... 4-57 

4.8.4 LABOUR AND INCOME .............................................................................................................................. 4-63 

4.8.5 BASIC INFRASTRUCTURE AND HOUSING ..................................................................................................... 4-65 

4.8.6 HEALTH ................................................................................................................................................. 4-66 

4.8.7 HIV/AIDS ............................................................................................................................................. 4-67 

4.8.8 EDUCATION ............................................................................................................................................ 4-68 

4.9 ARCHAEOLOGY ............................................................................................................................ 4-70 

4.9.1 THE PROJECT AREA ............................................................................................................................... 4-71 

4.9.2 FINDINGS ............................................................................................................................................... 4-71 

4.9.3 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................. 4-74 

4.10 VISUAL BACKGROUND .................................................................................................................. 4-74 

4.10.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-74 

4.10.2 VISUAL DESCRIPTION OF SITE .................................................................................................................. 4-74 

4.10.3 VIEWSHED ............................................................................................................................................. 4-77 

4.10.4 PHYSIOGRAPHIC RATING UNITS ............................................................................................................... 4-78 

4.10.5 SCENIC QUALITY .................................................................................................................................... 4-79 

4.10.6 KEY OBSERVATION POINTS ..................................................................................................................... 4-83 

4.10.7 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................. 4-83 

4.11 NOISE ......................................................................................................................................... 4-83 

4.11.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 4-83 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page iii 

4.11.2 NOISE SENSITIVE DEVELOPMENTS ........................................................................................................... 4-84 

4.11.3 CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL SOUND CHARACTER ....................................................................................... 4-84 

4.11.4 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................. 4-86 

5 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................. 5-1 

5.1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 5-1 

5.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE .................................................................................................................. 5-1 

5.2.1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ........................................................................................................................ 5-1 

5.2.2 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ....................................................................................................................... 5-4 

5.2.3 TOPSOIL MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................................................. 5-4 

5.2.4 CONSTRUCTION TRANSPORT ..................................................................................................................... 5-4 

5.2.5 EMPLOYMENT AND HOUSING ...................................................................................................................... 5-9 

5.2.6 WATER SUPPLY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ......................................................................................... 5-9 

5.2.7 POWER SUPPLY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ......................................................................................... 5-9 

5.2.8 SANITATION FOR CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 5-9 

5.2.9 MEDICAL SERVICE .................................................................................................................................... 5-9 

5.2.10 FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................. 5-10 

5.2.11 NON-MINERALIZED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION ................................................................... 5-10 

5.2.12 CONCURRENT MINING OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5-11 

5.3 OPERATIONAL PHASE ................................................................................................................... 5-11 

5.3.1 SITE FACILITIES FOR OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................ 5-11 

5.3.2 OPERATION PHASE ACTIVITIES – MINING .................................................................................................. 5-13 

5.3.3 OPERATION PHASE ACTIVITIES – MINERAL PROCESSING ............................................................................ 5-14 

5.3.4 MINERALIZED WASTE FACILITIES .............................................................................................................. 5-21 

5.3.5 WATER MANAGEMENT FACILITIES ............................................................................................................ 5-30 

5.3.6 POWER SUPPLY FOR OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES ......................................................................................... 5-34 

5.3.7 AIR REQUIREMENTS – PROCESS PLANT .................................................................................................... 5-34 

5.3.8 FUEL SUPPLY ......................................................................................................................................... 5-34 

5.3.9 EMPLOYMENT AND HOUSING .................................................................................................................... 5-35 

5.3.10 SEWERAGE COLLECTION AND TREATMENT ................................................................................................ 5-35 

5.3.11 NON-MINERALISED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR THE OPERATION PHASE .......................................................... 5-35 

5.3.12 ADDITIONAL SITE FACILITIES ..................................................................................................................... 5-37 

5.3.13 TIME TABLE ............................................................................................................................................ 5-42 

5.4 DECOMMISSIONING AND CLOSURE PHASE ...................................................................................... 5-42 

5.4.1 CLOSURE OBJECTIVES ............................................................................................................................. 5-42 

5.4.2 DECOMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES ................................................................................................................. 5-43 

5.4.3 CLOSURE ACTIVITIES ............................................................................................................................... 5-44 

6 ALTERNATIVES ................................................................................................................................ 6-1 

6.1 CURRENT AND FUTURE LAND USED ALTERNATIVES ........................................................................... 6-1 

6.2 THE “NO PROJECT OPTION LINKED TO NEED AND DESIRABILITY ....................................................... 6-1 

6.3 TECHNICAL ALTERNATIVES FOR MILLING ......................................................................................... 6-1 

6.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................. 6-2 

7 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT .................................................................................... 7-1 

7.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 7-1 

7.2 TOPOGRAPHY ................................................................................................................................ 7-4 

7.2.1 ISSUE: SURFACE EXCAVATIONS AND INFRASTRUCTURE ................................................................................. 7-4 

7.3 SURFACE WATER ........................................................................................................................... 7-6 

7.3.1 ISSUE: ALTERING DRAINAGE PATTERNS ........................................................................................................ 7-6 

7.3.2 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON SURFACE WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................. 7-6 

7.4 GROUNDWATER ............................................................................................................................. 7-9 

7.4.1 ISSUE: DEWATERING OF MINE PIT AND WATER SUPPLY ................................................................................... 7-9 

7.4.2 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON GROUNDWATER QUALITY ............................................................................................. 7-12 

7.5 AIR .............................................................................................................................................. 7-15 

7.5.1 ISSUE: AIR POLLUTION ............................................................................................................................. 7-15 

7.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................................................................................. 7-19 

7.6.1 ISSUE: NOISE POLLUTION ......................................................................................................................... 7-19 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page iv 

7.6.2 ISSUE: BLASTING HAZARDS ...................................................................................................................... 7-22 

7.7 BIODIVERSITY .............................................................................................................................. 7-24 

7.7.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 7-24 

7.7.2 ISSUE: PHYSICAL IMPACTS ON BIODIVERSITY .............................................................................................. 7-24 

7.7.3 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON WATER RESOURCES AS AN ECOLOGICAL DRIVER ............................................................. 7-27 

7.7.4 ISSUE: GENERAL DISTURBANCE OF BIODIVERSITY ........................................................................................ 7-30 

7.8 VISUAL ........................................................................................................................................ 7-34 

7.8.1 ISSUE: VISUAL IMPACT ............................................................................................................................. 7-34 

7.9 ARCHAEOLOGY ............................................................................................................................ 7-37 

7.9.1 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES AND LANDSCAPES .......................................................... 7-37 

7.10 TRAFFIC ...................................................................................................................................... 7-39 

7.10.1 ISSUE: TRAFFIC IMPACT ........................................................................................................................... 7-39 

7.11 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC ................................................................................................................ 7-41 

7.11.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 7-41 

7.11.2 ISSUE: ECONOMIC IMPACT ....................................................................................................................... 7-42 

7.11.3 ISSUE: CHANGE OF LAND USE AND NEIGHBOURING COMMUNITY.................................................................... 7-44 

7.11.4 ISSUE: IN MIGRATION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH/SAFETY AND SECURITY ......................................................... 7-46 

8 KEY ASSUMPTIONS, UNCERTAINTIES AND LIMITATIONS ......................................................... 8-1 

8.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT LIMIT .............................................................................................. 8-1 

8.2 PREDICTIVE MODELS IN GENERAL................................................................................................... 8-1 

8.3 TOPOGRAPHY AND SURFACE WATER .............................................................................................. 8-1 

8.4 GROUNDWATER ............................................................................................................................. 8-1 

8.5 AIR QUALITY .................................................................................................................................. 8-1 

8.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................................................................................... 8-3 

8.7 BIODIVERSITY ................................................................................................................................ 8-3 

8.8 VISUAL .......................................................................................................................................... 8-3 

8.9 ARCHAEOLOGY .............................................................................................................................. 8-3 

8.10 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC .................................................................................................................. 8-3 

8.11 TRAFFIC ........................................................................................................................................ 8-3 

9 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT AND CONCLUSIONS .................................................. 9-1 

10 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 10-1 

LIST OF FIGURES 

FIGURE 1-1: REGIONAL SETTING .......................................................................................................................... 1-3 

FIGURE 1-2: LOCAL SETTING OF THE PROPOSED OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE PROJECT .................................... 1-4 

FIGURE 1-3: THE EIA PROCESS ............................................................................................................................. 1-8 

FIGURE 4-1: WEATHER STATION ........................................................................................................................... 4-4 

FIGURE 4-2: COMPARISON OF MEASURED WEATHER DATA AT OTJIKOTO AND THE MM5 DATA FOR THE 

PERIOD 2008 AND 2009. .................................................................................................................................. 4-7 

FIGURE 4-3: PERIOD, DAY-TIME, NIGHT-TIME AND YEARLY WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD 

PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. ............................................................... 4-9 

FIGURE 4-4: PERIOD WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO 

NOVEMBER 2011. ........................................................................................................................................... 4-10 

FIGURE 4-5: MONTHLY WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 

TO NOVEMBER 2011. ..................................................................................................................................... 4-11 

FIGURE 4-6: AVERAGE WIND FREQUENCY AND VELOCITY OVER THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 

2011. ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-12 

FIGURE 4-7: MONTHLY AVERAGE TEMPERATURES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 

8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. .............................................................................................................. 4-13 

FIGURE 4-8: TOTAL MONTHLY RAINFALL AS RECORDED AT OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 

JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. ................................................................................................................. 4-14 

FIGURE 4-9: OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE: OVERVIEW ON THE LOCATION OF THE MINE SITE WITHIN THE 

REGIONAL CATCHMENTS (DATA SOURCE: ATLAS OF NAMIBIA) AND DETAIL VIEW ON THE MINE SITE 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page v 

AND THE SURFACE WATER FLOW DIRECTION AS WELL AS THE LOCAL WATER DIVIDE (BASED ON 

LIDAR DATA) ................................................................................................................................................... 4-16 

FIGURE 4-10: OTJIKOTO DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS HYDROCENSUS (1996) .................................. 4-18 

FIGURE 4-11: LOCATION OF THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT MONITORING NETWORK AND NEAREST 

POTENTIAL SENSITIVE RECEPTORS. ......................................................................................................... 4-25 

FIGURE 4-12: PM10 AMBIENT CONCENTRATIONS FOR THE PERIOD 20 APRIL TO 12 OCTOBER 2011. ..... 4-27 

FIGURE 4-13: SUMMARY OF FINDINGS OF SPECIALIST STUDIES, JULY 2007 ............................................... 4-31 

FIGURE 4-14: MONECHMA DIVARICATUM IS COMMONLY FOUND UNDER TREES AND SHRUBS IN SANDY 

THICKET AREAS. ............................................................................................................................................ 4-33 

FIGURE 4-15: BLEPHARIS OBMITRATA, CHARACTERISTIC OF THE CALCRETE ROCKY AREAS. ................ 4-34 

FIGURE 4-16: THE PAN SOUTH OF THE GAME PROOF FENCE BETWEEN FARM OTJIKOTO AND FARM 

GERHARDSHAUSEN. ..................................................................................................................................... 4-34 

FIGURE 4-17: LEONOTIS OCYMIFOLIA, CHARACTERISTIC OF THE PAN HABITAT. ....................................... 4-35 

FIGURE 4-18: SPOTTED RUBBER FROG (PHRYNOMATIS AFFINIS). ................................................................ 4-36 

FIGURE 4-19: VELD LEGUAAN AND SOUTHERN AFRICAN PYTHON. ............................................................... 4-37 

FIGURE 4-20: AARDWOLF (PROTELES CRISTATUS), HONEY BADGER (MELLIVORA CAPENSIS), CAPE FOX 

(VULPES CHAMA) AND CHEETAH (ACINONYX JUBATUS). ........................................................................ 4-38 

FIGURE 4-21: FINDINGS OF ARACHNIDA RECORDS FROM LITERATURE RESEARCH .................................. 4-45 

FIGURE 4-22: VIEW FROM A RIDGE OVER THE PROJECT AREA FROM NORTH-WEST TO NORTH-EAST, 

THICKETS OF ACACIA MELIFERA – SUCH BUSH THICKETS DOMINATE IN THE AREA, WITH A FEW 

COPSES OF TALLER TREES – MAINLY ACACIA REFICIENS AND TERMINALIA PRUNOIDES THE LAST 

BEING FAVOURED NESTING TREES OF VULTURES. ................................................................................ 4-49 

FIGURE 4-23: RECORDED AND PREDICTED NATIONAL INCOME CONTRIBUTIONS (AS MEASURED 

THROUGH GDP) FOR MINING, LIVESTOCK, AND TOURISM IN NAMIBIA BETWEEN 2005 AND 2012 .... 4-53 

FIGURE 4-24: LOCATION OF EPL AND MINE FARMS ......................................................................................... 4-57 

FIGURE 4-25: ESTIMATES OF MEDIAN ANNUAL EXPENDITURE PER PERSON IN THE WIDER PROJECT 

AREA. .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-65 

FIGURE 4-26: CAIRNS IN THE OTJIKOTO AREA. ................................................................................................. 4-72 

FIGURE 4-27: GRAVES FOUND NEAR FARM OTJIKOTO. ................................................................................... 4-73 

FIGURE 4-28: SITE TOPOGRAPHIC AND RIDGE MAP ........................................................................................ 4-75 

FIGURE 4-29: GPS 3 SHOWING LANDSCAPE CHARACTER OF EXISTING CATTLE FARM ............................. 4-76 

FIGURE 4-30: GPS1 VIEW NORTH-WEST TOWARDS PROPOSED SITE ........................................................... 4-76 

FIGURE 4-31: VIEWSHED MAP. ............................................................................................................................. 4-78 

FIGURE 4-32: PHYSIOGRAPHIC RATING UNITS (PRU). ..................................................................................... 4-79 

FIGURE 4-33: MONITORING POINTS SELECTED NEAR THE PROPOSED SITE (MARKED AS BLUES 

SQUARES) ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-85 

FIGURE 5-1: PROPOSED MINE LAYOUT ................................................................................................................ 5-3 

FIGURE 5-2: BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM OF THE METALLURGICAL PROCESSING ROUTE ............................... 5-16 

FIGURE 5-3: MONTHLY AVERAGE DEMAND AND MAKE-UP ............................................................................. 5-28 

FIGURE 5-4: NON-EXCEEDANCE PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION OF MAKE-UP DEMAND ............................... 5-29 

LIST OF TABLES 

TABLE 2-1: EQUATOR PRINCIPLES ........................................................................................................................ 2-9 

TABLE 3-1: SUMMARY OF INTERESTED AND AFFECTED PARTIES ................................................................... 3-1 

TABLE 3-2: FIRST PUBLIC MEETINGS .................................................................................................................... 3-3 

TABLE 3-3: SUMMARY OF CONSULTATION PROCESS FOR THE DRAFT EIA AND EMP .................................. 3-5 

TABLE 3-4: NUMBERS ATTENDING PUBLIC OPEN DAYS JUNE 2012 ................................................................. 3-6 

TABLE 4-1: DATA AVAILABILITY OF METEOROLOGICAL PARAMETERS RECORDED AT THE OTJIKOTO GOLD 

PROJECT SITE. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-7 

TABLE 4-2: MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND AVERAGE TEMPERATURES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR 

THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. ........................................................................................ 4-13 

TABLE 4-3: TOTAL MONTHLY RAINFALL FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 

2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. ............................................................................................................................ 4-14 

TABLE 4-4: ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY CLASSES. .............................................................................................. 4-21 

TABLE 4-5: KEY POLLUTION SOURCES IN THE VICINITY OF THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT AND 

ASSOCIATED CRITERIA POLLUTANTS. ....................................................................................................... 4-22 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page vi 

TABLE 4-6: DUST FALLOUT RATES FROM THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT MONITORING NETWORK 

(NOVEMBER 2010 TO JANUARY 2012). ........................................................................................................ 4-26 

TABLE 4-7: DAILY PM10 CONCENTRATIONS AS MEASURED AT THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT. ............. 4-28 

TABLE 4-8: PROTECTED, ENDEMIC AND NEAR-ENDEMIC SPECIES THAT OCCUR ON THE OTJIKOTO 

PROJECT AREA. ............................................................................................................................................. 4-32 

TABLE 4-9: SPIDER, SCORPION AND SOLIFUGID DIVERSITY OF THE THORNBUSH SAVANNA IN RELATION 

TO THEIR NAMIBIAN DIVERSITY. ................................................................................................................. 4-44 

TABLE 4-10: GDP AND SELECTED COMPONENT ACTIVITIES - N$ MILLION, 2012 CONSTANT PRICES ....... 4-53 

TABLE 4-11: FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC VALUES ASSOCIATED WITH THE LAND USES OTJIKOTO MINING 

AREA (N$, 2012) ............................................................................................................................................. 4-55 

TABLE 4-12: ANALYSIS OF THE REGION’S KEY CHALLENGES AND THEIR ROOT CAUSES ......................... 4-60 

TABLE 4-13: HIV PREVALENCE RATES FOR YOUTH AND ADULTS IN SELECTED SITES, 2004 - 2010 ......... 4-67 

TABLE 4-14: RESULTS OF AMBIENT SOUND LEVEL MONITORING (DATUM TYPE: UTM, ZONE 33 SOUTH) 4-85 

TABLE 5-1: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES .............................................................................................................. 5-5 

TABLE 5-2: WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE ................................................................... 5-10 

TABLE 5-3: TDF AND WASTE ROCK DUMP - GENERAL DIMENSIONS .............................................................. 5-22 

TABLE 5-4: CAPACITY ANALYSIS RESULTS....................................................................................................... 5-27 

TABLE 5-5: NON MINERALISED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR OPERATIONS .................................................. 5-36 

TABLE 7-1: CRITERIA FOR ASSESSING IMPACTS ................................................................................................ 7-3 

TABLE 7-2: SURFACE EXCAVATIONS & INFRASTRUCTURE - LINK TO PROJECT PHASES & ACTIVITIES ..... 7-4 

TABLE 7-3: SURFACE WATER POLLUTION SOURCES–LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ........... 7-6 

TABLE 7-4: LOWERING OF GROUNDWATER LEVELS – LINK PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ................ 7-9 

TABLE 7-5: IMPACTS ON GROUNDWATER QUALITY –PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ......................... 7-12 

TABLE 7-6: AIR POLLUTION – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES .................................................. 7-16 

TABLE 7-7: NOISE POLLUTION – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ............................................. 7-20 

TABLE 7-8: BLASTING HAZARDS– LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ........................................... 7-22 

TABLE 7-9: PHYSICAL IMPACTS ON BIODIVERSITY - LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ........... 7-25 

TABLE 7-10: IMPACT ON WATER RESOURCES AS AN ECOLOGICAL DRIVER – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES 

AND ACTIVITIES ............................................................................................................................................. 7-28 

TABLE 7-11: GENERAL DISTURBANCE OF BIODIVERSITY – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 7-30 

TABLE 7-12: VISUAL IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES .............................................. 7-34 

TABLE 7-13: ARCHAEOLOGY IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ............................... 7-37 

TABLE 7-14: TRAFFIC IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ............................................ 7-39 

TABLE 7-15: SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES ................ 7-41 

TABLE 9-1: SUMMARY OF POTENTIAL IMPACTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PROPOSED MINING PROJECT... 9-1 

LIST OF APPENDICES 

APPENDIX A: PROJECT TEAM CVS ........................................................................................................................... A 

APPENDIX B: INFORMATION SHARING RECORD .................................................................................................... B 

APPENDIX C: IAP DATABASE.....................................................................................................................................C 

APPENDIX D: ISSUES TABLE .....................................................................................................................................D 

APPENDIX E: GROUNDWATER STUDIES ................................................................................................................. E 

APPENDIX F: AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT ............................................................................................................... F 

APPENDIX G: NOISE ASSESSMENT ......................................................................................................................... G 

APPENDIX H: BIODIVERSITY ASSESSMENT ............................................................................................................H 

APPENDIX I: CULTURAL HERITAGE ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................. I 

APPENDIX J: VISUAL ASSESSMENT ......................................................................................................................... J 

APPENDIX K: SOCIAL ASSESSMENT ........................................................................................................................ K 

APPENDIX L: ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT .................................................................................................................. L 

APPENDIX M: OTJIKOTO EMP .................................................................................................................................. M 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

Below a list of acronyms and abbreviations used in this report. 

Page vii 

Acronyms / 

Abbreviations 

Definition 

ART Anti-retroviral treatment 

ASEC Alex Speiser Environmental Consultant 

CH4 Methane 

CITES Convention on International Trade and Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and 

Flora 

CO Carbon monoxide 

CO2 Carbon dioxide 

DEA Directorate of Environmental Affairs 

DLEU Drug Law Enforcement Unit 

DPW Directorate of Parks and Wildlife 

EAP Environmental Assessment Practitioner 

EAPSA Certification Board for Environmental Assessment Practitioners of South Africa 

EHS Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines 

EIA Environmental impact assessment 

EMIS Education and Management Information System 

EPL Exclusive prospecting license 

GDP Gross Domestic Product 

GLC Ground level concentration 

HCs Hydrocarbons 

HP high pressure 

IAPs Interested and Affected Parties 

IEMA Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment 

IFC International Finance Corporation 

ITCZ Inter-tropical Convergence Zone 

LA Local Authority 

LFPR Labour force participation rate 

LoM Life of Mine 

MAWF Ministry of Agriculture, Water and Forestry 

MDGs Millennium Development Goals 

MET Ministry of Environment and Tourism 

MGECW Ministry of Gender and Child Welfare 

mg/m²/day Milligram per square metre per day 

MHSS Ministry of Health and Social Services 

MLSW Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare 

MME Ministry of Mines and Energy 

MoE Ministry of Education 

MRLGHRD Ministry of Regional Local Government Housing and Rural Development(add 

Ministry to first mention) 

m/s Metres per second 

MWT Ministry of Works and Transport 

NDP3 Third National Development Plan 

NDP4 Fourth National Development Plan 

NEEEF New Equitable Economic Empowerment Framework 

NGOs Non-government organisations 

NHE Namibia Housing Enterprise 



Acronyms / 

Abbreviations 

Definition 

NPC National Planning Commission 

NOx Nitrogen oxides 

O3 Ozone 

OMA Otjiwarongo Marble Aquifer 

PDN Previously disadvantaged Namibians 

PPPs Public Private partnerships 

RA Roads Authority 

RoM Run of Mine 

sA southern African 

SAIEA South African Institute for Environmental Assessment 

SANS South African national Standard 

SDFN Shack Dwellers Federation of Namibia 

SEIA Social and Environmental Impact Assessment 

SMEs Small and medium enterprises 

SO2 Sulphur dioxide 

TB Tuberculosis 

TESEF Transformational Economic and Social Empowerment Framework 

TDF Tailings Disposal Facility 

µg/m³ Micrograms per cubic metre 

WRD Waste rock dump 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page viii 



EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 

1. Introduction 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page i 

Avdale (currently owned by Auryx Gold Namibia (Auryx Gold)), an exploration and mining company, 

holds four Exclusive Prospecting Licences (EPL) within the Otavi Exploration Area. This exploration area 

is located in the northern central part of Namibia, approximately 50 km south of Otavi, 70 km north of 

Otjiwarongo and 2 – 3 km east of the National Road B1 (see Figure 1). It is proposed to develop an open 

pit gold mine within this exploration area, referred to as the Otjikoto Gold Mine Project. The proposed 

mining licence area lies exclusively on commercial land owned by the company and extends over a 

number of farms. In 2010 Auryx Gold Inc Canada took over the Otjikoto Gold Mine project and later 

(December 2011) combined operations with B2Gold (a Vancouver based mining company). 

Figure 1 – Site Location 

The gold was discovered in 1997 when airborne magnetic surveys were followed up by exploration and 

subsequent drilling. By February 2008, Teal Exploration & Mining Inc, then owning the Otjikoto Gold 

Mine project had drilled 430 boreholes and had identified eight mineralised zones. These have been 

geologically modelled based on vein intensity and vein mineralogy, using a 0.4g/t gold cut-off grade. 

Inferred gold resources are approximately 1.92 million ounces with the resource grade of 1.26g/t. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page ii 

The proposed mine will consist of a single open pit (approximately 2060m long by 635m wide and 245m 

deep), RoM pad and stockpiles, processing plant and smelter, waste rock dumps (WRD), low grade ore 

dump, tailings disposal facility (TDF) and other ancillary development including access roads, support 

facilities, and soil stockpiles. 

2. Project Motivation 

The motivation for the proposed project is economic in nature. Auryx Gold has conducted an extensive 

drilling programme over portions of EPL2410 and found there is an economic mineral resource that can 

be mined and processed. The proposed project has the potential to benefit the country, society and the 

surrounding communities both directly and indirectly. Direct economic benefits will be derived from 

wages, taxes, technology transfer, capacity development, and profits. Indirect economic benefits will be 

derived from the procurement of goods and services and the increased spending power of employees 

through the creation of new jobs at the mine. 

3. Environmental impact assessment process 

The commencement of the Environmental Management Act, List of Activities that may not be undertaken 

without Environmental Clearance Certificate and Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations: 

Environmental Management Act, 2007 (Government Gazette No. 4878) were promulgated on 6 February 

2012. In accordance with this legal framework the EIA approach included the following: 

� The scoping process was conducted to identify the environmental issues associated with the 

proposed projects and to define the terms of reference for the required specialist studies and the EIA; 

� Specialist studies were commissioned in accordance with the relevant terms of reference; 

� The specialists were selected on the basis of their expertise and knowledge of the project area; 

� The EIA report was compiled on the basis of the findings of the specialist studies; 

� The Otjikoto EMP was prepared to elaborate on the mitigation objectives and include additional 

actions that were described in the EIA report; and 

� A project specific public participation process was conducted. As part of this process the regulatory 

authorities and interested and affected parties (IAPs) were given the opportunity to attend information 

sharing meetings, submit questions and comments to the project team, and review the background 

information document and scoping report. All questions and comments that were raised by the 

authorities and IAPs have been included and addressed in the EIA report. Similarly, IAPs have had 

the opportunity to review the EIA Report and provide additional comments before it was finalised. 

Public open days were arranged to present the findings of the EIA to IAPs. 

� All the people on the Auryx Gold IAP database were notified about the review period. A total of more 

than 700 people attended the Open Days that were held in Windhoek, Otavi and Otjiwarongo. The 

major issues discussed at the various open days related to the potential impact on groundwater on 

neighbouring farms and towns. There were many job seekers and discussions regarding job 

opportunities, recruitment policies and how recruitment should be conducted. The potential negative 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page iii 

social issues resulting from a construction camp on site was also a major concern to neighbouring 

farmers as was the devaluation of their land as a result of the mine. 

� As part of the EIA review process, the department of Water Affairs and NamWater requested a 

meeting with SLR and Auryx Gold to discuss relevant matters on the groundwater model of the 

proposed mine. The issues discussed during the meeting related, amongst others, to the relevant 

permitting and associated groundwater monitoring requirements. 

� All comments and issues raised during the EIA review period are included in the Issues and 

Reponses Report (Appendix D). 

The initial baseline specialist studies for the ESIA were conducted between April 2007 and February 

2008. In August 2008 the EIA scoping report was finalised and submitted to the Ministry of Environment 

and Tourism. After Teal Mining was taken over by Auryx Gold (Namibia) Pty Ltd. work resumed in July 

2010. After the completion of the Preliminary Environmental and Social Impact Assessment of the 

proposed Otjikoto Gold Mine Project’ (ASEC, September 2010) a number of outstanding specialist 

studies identified during the preliminary ESIA report were conducted between December 2010 and 

December 2011. 

4. Project Description 

The purpose of the construction phase is primarily to establish the infrastructure and activities required 

for the operational phase. The construction phase will commence in Q1 2013 and last for approximately 

two years. 

The fence around the construction site will be the final fencing required for the plant. It will be 2.4 m high, 

with barbed wire at the top. Site access will be controlled via a boomed entrance, which will also be 

locked outside of normal working hours. These areas will be fenced and will incorporate some or all of 

the facilities described below: 

� Workshop and maintenance areas; 

� Contractors lay-down areas; 

� Mobile site offices; 

� Temporary first aid station; 

� Explosive magazines; 

� Temporary accommodation camp; 

� Waste collection and storage areas; 

� Wash bay for washing equipment and vehicles; 

� Parking area for cars and equipment; 

� Change houses; 

� Clean water reservoir; 

� Canteen; 

� Ablution facilities; 



� Temporary power and water supply infrastructure; 

� Storage yard for Capital and First Fill items; and, 

� Fire fighting station. 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page iv 

The operational phase will consist of the following on-site facilities (some of these facilities are indicated 

on Figure 2): 

� Single open pit; 

� RoM stockpiles; 

� RoM pad 

� Processing plant; 

� Mine dewatering settling ponds 

� Access roads and haul roads; 

� Mineralised waste disposal facilities (Waste rock dump, Low grade dump, and a high sulphide 

tailings facility) 

� Offices and ablution facilities; 

� Explosives magazine; 

� Soil stockpiles; 

� Conveyors (in the plant, between plant and RoM complex); 

� Workshops; 


� Tyre bay for changing tyres on vehicles; 

� Refuelling areas; 

� Hazardous substances storages areas; 

� Salvage yard and temporary non mineralised waste handling facilities; 

� Stores (Plant and mine complexes); 

� On site water supply infrastructure; 

� Compressed air supply station; 

� Storm water management facilities; 

� Water treatment facility; 

� Clean and dirty water holding facilities; 

� On site power supply infrastructure; 



� Medical First Aid station facilities; 

� Sewage treatment plant; 

� Weighbridge; 

� Loading and off-loading areas; 

� Administration offices; 



Figure 2 – Proposed Mine Layout 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page v 



� Parking areas; 

� Security infrastructure; 

� Laboratory; 

� Communication infrastructure; and, 

� Lighting infrastructure. 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page vi 

The mine methodology of conventional open pit mining (that is, drill and blast followed by load and haul) 

will be employed at the Otjikoto Project. Mine production has been scheduled at 2.4 million tonnes per 

annum (mtpa). Actual mining will take place up to year 10 after which the low grade material will be 

reclaimed from the low grade dump and will be processed in years 11 and 12. The stripping ratio 

increases gradually from 7.19 to 9.37 over the LoM with the average stripping ratio over the LoM being 

7.32. Maximum tonnes moved over the LoM will be 28 mtpa. 

Drilling and blasting would be performed on 5 m high benches in the mineralised zones and a 110 tonne 

hydraulic excavator will be employed to load the 5 m high flitches. The waste benches will be mined in a 

bulk mining approach where drilling and blasting will be performed on 10 m high benches and a 190 

tonne hydraulic face shovel be utilised to load the full 10 m bench. In both cases 100 tonne capacity off- 

highway dump trucks will be used and standard open-cut drilling and auxiliary equipment be required. 

The ultimate pit will have two ramp systems in the north which will be used for ore and waste hauling. 

The dimensions of the pit are as follows: 

Length 2 060 m; 

Width 635 m; 

Depth 245 m; 

Area 931 057 m 2 (93.10 ha). 

At a conceptual level, decommissioning can be considered a reverse of the construction phase with the 

demolition and removal of the majority of infrastructure and activities very similar to those described with 

respect to the construction phase. The closure phase occurs as soon as possible on the waste stockpile 

and the TDF and then after the cessation of all decommissioning activities. Relevant closure activities 

are those related to the after care and maintenance of remaining structures. 

The planning stage for decommissioning and closure has commenced and in broad terms the main 

objective will be to remove as much infrastructure as possible and rehabilitate what remains to resemble 

the pre project land state as closely as possible. At this stage, the proposed post closure land use will be 

a combination of conservation and wilderness. The following objectives have been set: 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page vii 

� Disturbed areas other than those comprising the open pit and mineralised waste facilities will be 

returned to as close to their original state as practicable. 

� Permanent visible features such as the mineralised waste facilities and related environmental 

bunds as well as safety bunds around the open pit will be left in a form that blends with the 

surrounds. 

� Contamination beyond the mine site by wind, surface runoff or groundwater movement will be 

prevented through appropriate erosion resistant covers, containment bunds and drainage to the 

open pit. 

� Linear infrastructure comprising roads, pipelines, power lines, conveyors and related components 

will be removed and the disturbed land rehabilitated to blend with the surrounding natural 

environment. 

� Socio-economic impacts (including the loss of employment) will be minimised through careful 

planning and preparation for closure beginning three to five years before closure takes place. 

The above principles and concepts will be refined as part of ongoing detailed closure planning and 

costing during the life of mine. 

5. Environmental Impact Assessment Findings 

Topography – The project area is approximately 2-3km east of the B1 National Road and it is not 

impossible that third parties may access the site by mistake or out of curiosity. In the unmitigated 

scenario, it is possible that the surface excavations and infrastructure present a risk to unaccompanied 

third parties during all phases. 

The proposed mitigation measures will focus on infrastructure safety and on limiting access to third 

parties and animals which reduces the probability of the impact occurring. 

Surface Water - In the unmitigated scenario, surface water may collect contaminants (hydrocarbons, 

salts, chemicals, metals, etc.) from numerous sources. At elevated pollution concentrations these 

contaminants can be harmful to humans if ingested directly or indirectly through contaminated vegetation, 

vertebrates and invertebrates. Therefore the precautionary approach has been applied with the result that 

contaminated surface water from the mine will be contained, re-used and/or treated. 

Despite this precaution one can assume that due to the site specific climatic and hydrological conditions, 

if a surface run-off occurs, a large fraction of the surface water seeps into the ground water alluvium. 

Therefore mitigation measures are based on the principle of containing dirty water and diverting clean 

water as far as possible, so the drainage scheme will ensure that clean surface water flow is directed 

around structures such as the waste rock dumps and tailings disposal facility. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page viii 

In the mitigated scenario, most surface water run-off should be relatively clean and the potential impact 

reduces to low because: 

� by implementing a system where the dirty areas will be isolated from clean run-off and dirty water is 

contained and reused wherever possible rather than discharged into the environment, and 

� by implementing dust control measures the fallout of dust that can be collected and pollute surface 

water should also have been managed to acceptable levels. 

Groundwater – Dewatering of the pit and borehole abstraction has the potential to reduce local 

groundwater levels and there are a range of sources/activities that have the potential to contaminate 

groundwater in all phases of the project, as follows: 

� Damage to water supply pipeline from vandalism or flood/storm water. 

� Potential for pipeline to impact on water quality through corrosion/algae growth. 

� Potential for communities to cause pollution in the vicinity of abstraction boreholes. 

� Water losses through leaks, transmission and evaporation. 

� Depletion in water levels in boreholes due to over pumping. 

� Lower of water levels due to seepage into the open pit. 

� Depletion of community supply boreholes. 

� Permanent radius of influence due to mine dewatering. 

� Recovery of water levels in Karibib Marbles 

� Seepage from mineralised waste facilities (TDF and WRD); 

� Formation of acid drainage from the TDF; 

� Sulphate, metal, arsenic and nitrate leaching from the TDF 

� Seepage of dirty water into the aquifer; 

� Seepage into/flooding of mine pit; 

� Pollution from spillages of chemicals/fuel and sanitation facilities. 

The proposed mitigation therefore focuses on containing pollution at source and/or preventing the off-site 

migration of pollution and preventing unacceptable groundwater pollution related to seepage and 

groundwater flow disruption impacts. In addition it is proposed to manage the local water supply and to 

monitor and mitigate if required. 

According to the groundwater model and hydrogeological investigations, no major impact is expected. 

Auryx Gold will ensure that if community supply boreholes are dewatered, they will be provided with an 

alternative water source (Section 7.4). Groundwater levels should be monitored at all pumping wells and 

monitoring boreholes as well as the nearest community supply boreholes, as per the monitoring 

programme included in the EMP. The groundwater flow model should be updated within one year after 

approval of the project (if approved) and every two years subsequently. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page ix 

Air - The air quality assessment focused on airborne particulates (PM10 emissions and total suspended 

particles). Gaseous pollutants (such as sulphur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, carbon monoxide etc.) 

deriving from mine vehicles and equipment and from the gold smelting operations could not be assessed 

but were regarded by the specialist as potentially negligible in comparison to particulate emissions. 

The main contributing sources to both the unmitigated and mitigated PM10 predicted impacts are firstly 

the unpaved roads specifically between the open-pit and the waste rock dump, and secondly the 

materials handling operations and over the short term windblown dust from the TDF. In the unmitigated 

scenarios the PM10 ground level concentrations exceed the WHO-IT3 limit at all sensitive receptors. 

With mitigation these exceedances can be reduced and the impact area becomes much smaller. Some 

exceedances are still predicted, regarding the WHO-IT3 daily limit. The annualWHO-IT3 limits for PM10 

ground level concentration are not exceeded at any potential receptor areas in the mitigated scenario. 

A number of uncertainties are associated with the calculation and simulation of fugitive dust from 

unpaved roads and windblown dust resulting in expected conservative ground level concentrations 

(GLCs). This is in addition to the inherent model uncertainty of -50% to 200%. Therefore, with effective 

mitigation the impacts reduce significantly and can be limited to on-site only as indicated by the annual 

average GLCs. 

The proposed mitigation measures therefore focus on the use of water sprays, vegetation cover at 

relevant areas and suppressants to achieve certain control efficiencies and monitoring the effectiveness 

of these measures. 

Noise - Excluding one noise sensitive development (NSD01), the severity of the noise impact is 

considered to be low for all potentially noise-sensitive developments. Considering a worse-case scenario 

the severity of the potential noise impact could be a medium on NSD01. It should be noted that the 

unmitigated medium severity is based on the fact that there is the potential that the operation of the mine 

will increase the ambient sound levels at night by more than 7 dBA at this one property. As such, it is 

possible that the receptor (NSD01) will detect the change in ambient sound level, yet is it is unlikely that 

the receptor may complain, as the total cumulative night-time noise level is still predicted to be less than 

35 dBA (a level determined to be the level where rural communities may start to complain about the 

increased noise levels). NSD01 (farm house), however, belongs to the developer, hence the 

implementation of mitigation measures can include no permanent occupation of the farm house during 

operations. 

Blasting - In the unmitigated scenario, the probability of blasting hazards resulting in either damage 

and/or creating a nuisance is low due to the location of the project site and limited third party 

infrastructure in the vicinity of the open pit. In addition, as the pit deepens, the blast will be contained 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page x 

within the pit. With mitigation the low probability is reduced even more because access to the fly rock 

zone will be controlled and proper blast design will be adhered to thereby minimising vibrations. 

Biodiversity – In the unmitigated scenario, biodiversity will be disturbed in the following ways: 

� Firewood collection can lead to loss of woody plants and their key role as a nutrient source; 

� Illegal poaching of game, game birds, reptiles and other animals; 

� Illegal collection and loss of seeds and plants; 

� Deposition of dust on plant communities and impact on plant vitality; 

� Introduction of invasive plant species; 

� Interference with movement of large game; 

� Habitat fragmentation isolates organisms from wider populations; 

� The presence of vehicles in the area can cause road kills especially if drivers speed; 

� White light attracts large numbers of invertebrates which become easy prey for predators - this can 

upset the invertebrate population balances; 

� Noise and vibration pollution may scare off vertebrates and invertebrates and influence migration 

paths; 

� The presence of open pits and water dams may lead to the death/injury of animals; and 

� Pollution emissions, residues from the mining activities and general litter may impact on the survival 

of individual plants, vertebrates and invertebrates. 

In addition periodic surface water run-off and the existence of near-surface water resources are 

understood to be key ecological drivers for vegetation, vertebrates and invertebrates within and 

downstream of the proposed project site because it recharges the moisture content of the aquifer. This in 

turn supports a range of vegetation, in particular larger trees which in turn support a range of 

invertebrates and vertebrates. In addition, water points on farms, on which wild mammals and birds also 

depend, may become more difficult to replenish. 

However the project is located in an area of low biodiversity sensitivity and there are extensive areas of 

similar habitat in the surrounding area. Therefore, the potential significance is considered to be medium 

which would reduce to between medium and low with the successful implementation of the mitigation 

measures. 

Visual – The severity of visual impacts is determined by assessing the change to the visual landscape as 

a result of mine related infrastructure and activities. The most visible aspect of the proposed mining 

project will be the proposed waste rock dump which, at 40m high, is considered to have a high visual 

impact without mitigation. Other elements of the mine including the processing plant, open pit and TDF 

are all lower in height and benefit from the screening provided by surrounding vegetation. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page xi 

Overall because of the impacts of the waste rock dump, in particular views from the B1, the potential 

impact is considered to be high in the unmitigated scenario but reduces to medium with mitigation. 

Key mitigation measures therefore include: 

� Special attention needs to be given to the entrance to the B1, as well as to the eastern section where 

the new road diverges from the old. At these locations, a 2.5 meter natural looking berm needs to be 

raised to act as a screening wall. The berms need to be planted with local endemic plants to ensure 

that the views down the old road are screened; 

� All painted surfaces should blend into the natural surroundings. 

� Rehabilitation of all the faces of the WRD to grass / scrub bushes and some trees; 

� Reduce the angle of the WRD slope if not suitable for rehabilitation; 

� An agreement needs to be reached with the local municipality to ensure that the trees between the 

railway line and the road are not removed; and 

� For the closure phase: 

o Auryx Gold will establish a mechanism to ensure that the rehabilitation of the mine is properly 

funded to ensure that sufficient funds are available to implement the rehabilitation and mitigations 

required for closure. 

o All components of the infrastructure used during operation, apart from the WRD and TDF, must 

be removed. The site must be visually ‘cleaned up’ so as to portray an uncluttered landscape. 

o The ground where processing plants were located must be decontaminated and then covered by 

the earth used for the berm and landscaped into a natural form in alignment with the natural 

hydrological patterns. 

Archaeology – The nature of the likely impacts on the archaeological sites include the direct impacts of 

earthmoving activities and the indirect impacts of accelerated soil erosion caused by the clearance of 

vegetation, and potential damage from blasting activities. Given the sensitive nature of the 

archaeological sites and when taking into account existing impacts from on-site exploration activities, the 

significance of these impacts without mitigation is high, but this could be reduced to low/medium with 

mitigation, as follows: 

� The sites identified by the specialist will be marked and protected, and the area within cleared of all 

encroaching bush. In the case of QRS 83/ 1 & 2, if the cutline running past the site will be used in the 

future, it should be re-routed to provide a 20m buffer around the site. 

� A formal “No-Go Area” policy, as set out in the Otjikoto EMP, will be developed and implemented. 

� All workers (temporary and permanent) will be educated about the archaeological sites that may be 

encountered and appropriate training will be provided. 

� In the event that mining activities will unavoidably encroach on the sites, the company is legally 

obliged to take all necessary steps either to protect the sites, or to re-locate the burials according to 

official directives. In the case of QRS 83/1 & 2, it may be appropriate to approach the National 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page xii 

Heritage Council for a permit to be issued under Part V (Sections 48 and 52) of the National Heritage 

Act. In the case of QRS 83/3, the site would also fall under the protection of the Burial Places 

Ordinance (27 of 1966). 

If there are any chance finds of archaeological sites that have not been identified and described in the 

specialist report, Auryx Gold will follow its chance find procedure. The key component of which is to 

ensure that the site remains undisturbed until a specialist has assessed the site, assessed the potential 

damage, advised on the necessary management steps and advised on the requirements for stakeholder 

consultation and permitting. 

Traffic – The mine will have access off the main B1 road which is designed to carry traffic of this nature. 

Mine related traffic will travel from both the Otavi and Otjwarongo directions on a daily basis with all traffic 

using the B1 from which the re-routed D2808 will provide the site access. Traffic on the B1would be a 

combination of Auryx Gold, other mining and businesses together with private and tourism related traffic. 

The highest levels of traffic would be likely to be experienced during the construction phase which is 

relatively short term. Levels over the operational life of the mine would be lower and traffic in the 

decommissioning phase will reduce to the extent that production related traffic ceases. In the closure 

phase traffic will be limited to just occasional trips for monitoring and aftercare activities. 

The proposed re-routing of the D2808 does not form part of the scope of this EIA and will be addressed 

in a separate EIA process. It is anticipated that this separate EIA will consider issues associated with 

road capacity and road design as they relate to an increase in traffic from the mine’s operation. In this 

regard, the assessment below therefore focuses on the safety of road users in general based on 

experience with similar type mining projects and assuming that the current level of service is retained 

and/or upgraded (if required). 

Economic – The life of mine (LoM) is characterised by an 18 month intensive construction phase 

involving the capital investment of some US$136 million, followed by operations lasting some ten years, 

merging into a decommissioning phase, followed by mine closure after 14 years. Clearly investment 

costs, operational costs and income will vary over the 14 year LoM, but the average direct contribution to 

Gross Namibian Income (GNI) of the mine during LoM will be between US$ 58 million and US$ 60 million 

which is very significant in local terms and would amount to around 0.6% of the total national GNI of 

Namibia. Further, due to the value added or income multiplier effect, this direct impact will induce some 

US$ 103 million in additional GNI within the broader economy. 

The whole mining and processing operation will create an average of 454 jobs which will peak to 491 jobs 

in 2020. Studies have calculated that for every job created by a mine, a further additional 1.5 job 

opportunities are created by suppliers and contractors, which would result in a further 680 jobs created by 

suppliers, contractors and service providers. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page xiii 

Through employment and skills development, the proposed mine will contribute to the three national 

development goals of – reducing income inequality, increasing job creation and economic growth. It will 

also contribute to the Otjozondjupa Regional Council’s strategic objective “to improve regional economic 

development and employment”. 

The economic spin-offs from the mine’s construction and operations will create empowerment opportunities 

in a range of skills and activities. Employment provides incomes to the employees, their immediate 

household members and to others living elsewhere in Namibia who depend on cash remittances. Thus the 

assessment of this impact can be summarised as having a high beneficial effect. The work experience 

and skills gained through the opportunities that the mine brings will have lasting benefits for all employees, 

nationally. 

The negative land and natural resource use costs which are estimated to happen over the LoM have 

been measured at being just over 3% of the positive contribution of the mine. So the economic benefits 

clearly outweigh the negative economic impacts that may occur and the impact has a positive high 

severity both with and without mitigation. 

The other potential negative economic impact is concerned with mine closure. This is something which is 

common to all mines and must be planned for and mitigation provided because the major economic 

benefits that the increase in mining will bring to the country cannot be realised without the eventual 

impact of closure. 

Social - In the local context, Otavi has suffered out-migration and now has half the population it recorded 

ten years ago. By contrast, Otjiwarongo has grown by 10,000 people. Otjiwarongo’s capacity to meet the 

needs of the project, in terms of available goods and services, is good. Therefore it would be sensible for 

the two towns to anticipate and plan for substantial in-migration of around 7 000 people, shared between 

the two towns. 

In-ward migration can have positive and negative impacts such as: 

� Stimulating the local economy and community organization. Mineworkers will require housing 

and this will stimulate the construction of housing in both Otavi and Otjiwarongo. Wages and 

salaries will be injected into the local economy where they live. 

� Developing informal settlements which increase demand/ need for basic infrastructure –housing, 

clean water supplies, sanitation, electricity and waste management systems. 

� Increasing pressure on government services such as health and education facilities, their staffing 

and running cost requirements. 

� Increasing incidence of social ills including alcoholism, drug abuse, prostitution, gambling & 

criminality. Alcohol abuse is part of the accepted social norm in Namibia and is often stimulated 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page xiv 

by cash earnings which increase the likelihood of domestic violence (usually against women and 

children), unprotected sex and the spread of HIV. The influx of job seekers may increase over- 

crowding, which increase the spread of TB. 

In addition neighbouring farms are concerned about their security and safety, particularly during 

construction when up to 800 people will be housed on site for over a year. During public consultations, 

neighbours recommended that the construction camp should be in Otavi or Otjiwarongo. Although this 

would bring economic benefits to the towns, it could cause a huge increase in social ills and health risks 

such as sexually transmitted diseases and unwanted pregnancies. Experienced mine managers believe 

that it will be easier to restrict construction workers in a camp on the site and enforce tighter security than 

if it were in town. Auryx Gold will ensure strict control to prevent off-duty workers and friends entering 

and leaving the site at any time. 

Unmitigated, these social ills can have severe consequences which last beyond the life of mine but a 

number of policies and actions can be taken which can mitigate the impact and reduce its severity. 

However these efforts must be carefully co-ordinated with those of local government and the community, 

through planned engagement and public-private partnerships. 

In the unmitigated scenario, the inward migration and community health/safety and security issue is 

therefore predicted to have a high potential impact and in the mitigated scenario this could be reduced 

but the challenge is significant because it will involve a focussed and combined effort from the 

commercial and Government sectors. 

6. Conclusion 

The potential negative impacts associated with the proposed project are expected to be of mainly low to 

medium significance apart from air quality and some social impacts and therefore provided that the 

relevant mitigation measures are successfully implemented there is no environmental reason why the 

proposed project should not be approved. A tabulated summary of the potential impacts is presented in 

the table below. 

In addition the project will have significant positive economic impacts of benefit to the local, regional and 

national economy of Namibia. 



SUMMARY OF POTENTIAL IMPACTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PROPOSED OTJIKOTO MINING 

PROJECT 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page xv 

Section Potential impact Significance of the impact 

(the ratings are negative unless 

otherwise specified) 

Topography Injury to people from hazardous excavations and 

infrastructure. 

Biodiversity Physical destruction of biodiversity from clearing land 

and placing infrastructure. 

Loss of biodiversity from the reduction of water 

resources as an ecological driver. 

General disturbance of biodiversity through a range of 

aspects including dust, noise, vibration, pollution, 

lighting, firewood collection, poaching, and vehicle 

movement. 

Unmitigated Mitigated 

High Medium 

Medium Medium 

Medium Low 

Medium Medium 

Surface water Pollution of surface water Medium Low 

Groundwater Dewatering and mine supply. Medium Medium to Low 

Groundwater contamination. High Medium to Low 

Air quality Air pollution High Medium to 

High 

Noise Noise pollution in the context of noise sensitive 

developments. 

Medium to Low Low 

Vibration Blast injury to third parties or damage to structures. Medium Medium to Low 

Archaeology Damage to archaeological sites. High Low 

Visual impacts Visual impact from key viewpoints. High Medium 

Socioeconomic 

impacts 

Economic impact including the positive impacts on 

regional and national economies 

High+ High+ 

Impacts on land use and neighbouring communities, Medium Medium 

In migration and community health and safety High Medium to 

High 

Traffic impacts Traffic impacts on users of the B1. Medium Low 



1 INTRODUCTION 

1.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE PROPOSED PROJECT 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE EIA REPORT 

Page 1-1 

Avdale, an exploration and mining company, holds four Exclusive Prospecting Licences (EPL) within the 

Otavi Exploration Area. This exploration area is located in the northern central part of Namibia, 

approximately 50 km south of Otavi, 70 km north of Otjiwarongo and 2 – 3 km east of the National Road 

B1 (Figure 1-1). It is proposed to develop an open pit gold mine within this exploration area, referred to as 

the Otjikoto Gold Mine Project. The proposed mining licence area lies exclusively on commercial land 

owned by the company and extends over a number of farms. In 2010 Auryx Gold Inc Canada took over 

the Otjikoto Gold Mine project and later (December 2011) combined operations with B2Gold (a 

Vancouver based mining company). 

The gold was discovered in 1997 when airborne magnetic surveys were followed up by exploration and 

subsequent drilling. By February 2008, Teal Exploration & Mining Inc, then owning the Otjikoto Gold 

Mine project had drilled 430 boreholes and had identified eight mineralised zones. These have been 

geologically modelled based on vein intensity and vein mineralogy, using a 0.4g/t gold cut-off grade. 

Inferred gold resources are approximately 1.92 million ounces with the resource grade of 1.26g/t. 

The proposed mine will consist of a single open pit (approximately 2060m long by 635m wide and 245m 

deep), RoM pad and stockpiles, processing plant and smelter, waste rock dumps (WRD), low grade ore 

dump, tailings disposal facility (TDF) and other ancillary development including access roads, support 

facilities, and soil stockpiles. A comprehensive description of the proposed development is provided in 

Chapter 5. 

Mining will be by conventional drill and blast methods followed by load and haul. Actual mining will take 

place up to year ten of the project after which the stockpiled low grade ore will be reclaimed and 

processed through the plant in years 11 and 12. 

The regional and local settings of the mine project area are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 

respectively. 

The following operations and facilities are excluded from the scope of this EIA report: 

� Exploration drilling on the EPL (exploration activities have been covered by separate 

Environmental Management Plans since 2005). 

� NamPower power line and substation. 

� The proposed re-routing of the D2808. 

� Possible rail-spur line and siding if applicable. 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page 1-2 

The EIAs for these supporting services have not yet been conducted as negotiations are ongoing with 

relevant service providers. The EIA reports will however be submitted to the relevant ministries once 

they are complete. 

1.2 PROJECT MOTIVATION (NEED AND DESIRABILITY) 

The motivation for the proposed project is economic in nature. Auryx Gold has conducted an extensive 

drilling programme over portions of EPL2410 and found there is an economic mineral resource that can 

be mined and processed. The proposed project has the potential to benefit the country, society and the 

surrounding communities both directly and indirectly. Direct economic benefits will be derived from 

wages, taxes, technology transfer, capacity development, and profits. Indirect economic benefits will be 

derived from the procurement of goods and services and the increased spending power of employees 

through the creation of new jobs at the mine. 



FIGURE 1-1: REGIONAL SETTING 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page 1-3 



FIGURE 1-2: LOCAL SETTING OF THE PROPOSED OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE PROJECT 

1.3 INTRODUCTION TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page 1-4 

Prior to implementing the proposed project, environmental clearance is required on the basis of an 

approved EIA report and Environmental Management Plan (EMP). 

The overall task of the EIA process is to ensure that the criteria of sustainable development are met and 

TDF & waste 

that all identified and potential environmental and social impacts have been addressed and mitigated 

rock dumps 

where necessary. The term EIA, as interpreted in the Namibian Environmental Management Act 7 of 

2007, includes the “complex of natural and anthropogenic factors and elements that are mutually 

interrelated and affect the ecological equilibrium and the quality of life, and includes: 

(a) the natural environment that is the land, water and air, all organic and inorganic material and 

all living organisms; and 

(b) the human environment that is the landscape and natural, cultural, historical, aesthetic, 

economic and social heritage and values.” 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page 1-5 

The commencement of the Environmental Management Act, List of Activities that may not be undertaken 

without Environmental Clearance Certificate and Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations: 

Environmental Management Act, 2007 (Government Gazette No. 4878) were promulgated on 6 February 

2012. 

The required components of the EIA report are included in Table 1-1 below: 

TABLE 1-1: REQUIREMENTS FOR EIA REPORTS 

EIA Regulation requirement Policy requirements Reference in the EIA report 

Details of the environmental assessment 

practitioner (EAP) that compiled the 

report and the expertise of the EAP to 

carry out the EIA, including CVs. 

Detailed description of the proposed 

activity. 

Description of the environment that may 

be affected by the activity. 

Details of public participation process: 

List of persons, organisations and 

organs of state that were registered as 

interested and affected parties (IAPs). 

A summary of comments received from 

and a summary of issues raised by 

IAPs, the date of receipt of these 

comments and the response of the EAP 

to the comments. 

Copies of any representations, 

objections and comments received from 

IAPs. 

Description of need and desirability of 

proposed activity and identified potential 

alternatives to the proposed activity, 

including advantages and 

disadvantages that the proposed activity 

or alternatives may have on the 

environment and the community that 

may be affected by the activity. 

Indication of methodology used in 

determining the significance of potential 

impacts. 

A description and comparative 

assessment of all alternatives identified 

during the environmental impact 

assessment process. 

A description of all environmental issues 

that were identified during the 

environmental impact assessment 

process, an assessment of the 

significance of each issue and an 

indication of the extent to which the 

issue could be addressed by the 

adoption of mitigation measures. 

List of compilers. Section 1.3.2 and Appendix 

A 

Project proposal. Section 5 

The affected environment. Section 4 

Section 3 and Appendix B, 

Appendix C and Appendix D 

Section 1.2 and 6 

Section 7 

Section 6 

Section 7 



SLR Ref.733.01023.0002 


Page 1-6 

EIA Regulation requirement Policy requirements Reference in the EIA report 

An assessment of each identified The assessment and Section 7 

potentially significant impact, including - 

� cumulative impacts; 

� the nature of the impact; 

� the extent and duration of the 

impact; 

evaluation. 

� the probability of the impact 

occurring; 

� the degree to which the impact can 

be reversed; 

� the degree to which the impact may 

cause irreplaceable loss of 

resources; and 

� the degree to which the impact can 

be mitigated; 

A description of any assumptions, Assumptions and 

Section 8 

uncertainties and gaps in knowledge; limitations. 

Incomplete or unavailable 

information. 

An opinion as to whether the activity Conclusions and 

Section 9 

should or should not be authorised, and 

if the opinion is that it should be 

authorised, any conditions that should 

be made in respect of that authorisation. 

recommendations. 

An environmental impact statement 

Section 9 

which contains: 

Executive Summary 

� a summary of the key findings of the 

environmental impact assessment; 

and 

� a comparative assessment of the 

positive and negative implications of 

the proposed activity and identified 

alternatives; and 

� any specific information that may be 

required in terms of the Act. 

Management plan 

Monitoring programme 

Audit proposal. 

Appendix M 

Executive summary 

Contents page 

Introduction. 

See above 

Terms of reference. Appendix B 

Approach to study. Section 1.3.1 

Administrative, legal and 

Policy requirements. 

Section 2 

Environmental contract. To be issued by MET. 

Definitions of technical 

terms. 

See above. 

Acknowledgements. 

Appendices. See end of report. 



1.3.1 EIA APPROACH AND PROCESS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 1-7 

A summary of the approach and key steps in the EIA process to be completed for this project and 

corresponding activities are outlined in Table 1-2. 

TABLE 1-2: EIA PROCESS 

Objectives Corresponding activities 

� Provide a detailed description of 

the potentially affected 

environment. 

� Assessment of potential 

environmental impacts. 

� Design requirements and 

management and mitigation 

measures. 

� Receive feedback on EIA and 

EMP. 

EIA/EMP phase (April 2012 – July 2012) 

� Completion of investigations by technical project team and 

appointed specialists, in line with the terms of reference in 

the scoping report. 

� Compilation of EIA and EMP reports. 

� Distribute EIA and EMP reports to authorities and IAPs for 

review (June 2012). 

� Forward EIA and EMP reports and IAPs comments to 

MET for review (July 2012). 

� Receive and circulate MET decision 

The EIA will meet the requirements of Namibian legislation including Acts and Bills and as well as Auryx 

Gold corporate standards and guidelines, which have been influenced by the Equator Principles 1 and by 

the International Finance Corporation (IFC). 

The EIA process as set out in the Environmental Management Act (No. 7 of 2007) is explained 

diagrammatically in Figure 1-3. 

1 http://www.equator-principles.com/principles.shtml 

Otjikoto Gold Mine EIA Report June 2012


FIGURE 1-3: THE EIA PROCESS 

1.3.2 EIA TEAM 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Scoping Phase & report 

Public 

Participation 

(Introducing scope 

of EIA, key issues 

of concern & 

inviting comments 

Submission of final Scoping report to MET 

Draft EIA & EMP 

Public 

Participation 

(Introducing 

baseline, 

assessment and 

mitigation 

Submission of final EIA & EMP to MET 

Review by MET 

Implementation of EIA 

mitigation through EMP 

Page 1-8 

SLR Namibia (Pty) Ltd (SLR) is the independent firm of consultants that has been appointed by Auryx 

Gold to undertake the environmental impact assessment and related processes. Werner Petrick (project 

manager) has sixteen years of relevant experience in Environmental Management and Impact 

Assessments. He was assisted in the management of the project by Alex Speiser and Chris Herbert. 

Alex Speiser has 12 years of experience of EIA preparation in Namibia and is an Associated Member 

(AIEMA) of the Institute of Environmental Management & Assessment, UK. She is also a member of the 

Southern African Institute of Ecologists and Environmental Scientists and a member of the Chamber of 

Mines (Namibia). Chris Herbert has approximately 20 years of experience and is a member of the British 

Royal Town Planning Institute. Alex Pheiffer, also from SLR, was the reviewer for the project. The 

relevant curriculum vitae documentation is attached in Appendix A. 



The environmental project team is outlined in Table 1-3. 

TABLE 1-3: ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT TEAM 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 1-9 

Team Name Designation Tasks and roles Company 

EIA project Werner Petrick Project manager Responsible for the SLR 

leader 

interface between Auryx 

Gold and the 

environmental team, and 

for ensuring 

implementation of the EIA 

outcomes 

EIA Project Alex Speiser Project 

Management of the EIA SLR 

management 

assistant/review process, team members 

Chris Herbert Project assistant and other stakeholders. 

Report compilation 

Alex Pheiffer Project review Report and process review. 

Specialist Hanlie 

Air quality Air quality impact 

Airshed Planning 

investigations Liebenberg-Enslin 

assessment 

Professionals 

Morne de Jager Noise Noise impact assessment M2ENCO 

Stephen Stead Visual specialist Visual impact assessment Visual Resource 

Management 

John Kinahan Archaeologist Heritage resource 

assessment 

Quaternary 

Research Services 

Auriol Ashby Social specialist Social impact assessment Ashby Associates 

Jon Barnes Economic specialist Economic impact 

assessment 

Independent 

consultant 

Joh Henschel Biodiversity Project leader/ecologist GobabebDesert 

Research 

Foundation 

Coleen 

Mannheimer 

Vegetation assessment Independent 

consultant 

Michael Griffin Fauna assessment Independent 

Eugene Marais, 

Entomology and arachnid 

consultants 

Peter Hawkes & 

Tharina Bird 

assessment 

Dr Chris Brown Avifauna assessment Independent 

consultant 

WJ Meyer 

&Arnold Bittner 

Water scientist Groundwater assessment AGES &SLR 

1.3.3 CONTACT DETAILS FOR RESPONSIBLE AURYX GOLD PARTIES 

The Auryx Gold contact details for the project are included in Table 1-4. 

TABLE 1-4: AURYX GOLD CONTACT DETAILS 

Title Managing Director 

Name Bill Lytle 

Postal address PO Box 80363, Olympia, Windhoek 

Telephone number 061 416450 

Facsimile number 061 416499 



2 ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS AND POLICIES 

2.1 INTRODUCTION 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-1 

The management and regulation of mining activities falls within the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Mines and 

Energy (MME), with environmental regulations guided and implemented by the Directorate of Environmental 

Affairs (DEA) within the Ministry of Environment and Tourism (MET). 

2.2 SUMMARY OF APPLICABLE ACTS 

Please note that the order of discussing the Acts does not necessarily imply their significance. 

2.2.1 THE CONSTITUTION OF THE REPUBLIC OF NAMIBIA (1990) 

Article 91 defines the function of the Ombudsman and 91 (c) describes the duty to investigate 

complaints concerning the over-utilisation of living natural resources, the irrational exploitation of non- 

renewable resources, the degradation and destruction of the ecosystem and failure to protect the beauty 

and character of Namibia. 

Article 95 (l) states that ‘the State shall actively promote and maintain the welfare of the people by 

adopting, inter alia, policies aimed at … maintenance of ecosystems, essential ecological processes and 

biological diversity of Namibia and utilization of natural resources on a sustainable basis for the benefit of 

all Namibians both present and future; in particular the Government shall provide measures against the 

dumping or recycling of foreign nuclear and toxic waste on Namibian Territory.’ 

Article 100 states that ‘the land, water and natural resources below and above the surface of the land … 

shall belong to the State if they are not otherwise lawfully owned.’ 

Article 101 further states that the principles embodied within the Constitution ‘shall not of and by 

themselves be legally enforceable by any court, but shall nevertheless guide the Government in making 

and applying laws. … The courts are entitled to have regard to the said principles in interpreting any laws 

based on them.’ 

Article 144 states that the general rules of international law and international agreements are binding to 

Namibia under the Constitution and shall form part of the law of Namibia. A list of the ratified international 

treaties and protocols is given in Chapter 5.6. 

The management and regulation of mining activities falls within the jurisdiction of the Ministry of Mines and 

Energy (MME), with environmental regulations guided and implemented by the Directorate of Environmental 

Affairs (DEA) within the Ministry of Environment and Tourism (MET). 



2.2.2 MINERALS (PROSPECTING AND MINING) ACT NO. 33 OF 1992 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Mines and Energy 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-2 

The Minerals (Prospecting and Mining) Act, No. 33 of 1992 regulates the rights in relation to minerals, 

reconnaissance, prospecting and mining of minerals. Various license types and their implications are 

stipulated. The Act details reporting requirements for monitoring of activities and compliance with 

environmental performance, such as disposal methods and rehabilitation. The Mining Commissioner, 

appointed by the Minister, is responsible for implementing these regulations and co-operates with other 

ministries. 

Subject to any right conferred under any provision of this Act, any right in relation to the reconnaissance 

or prospecting for, and the mining and sale or disposal of, and the exercise of control over, any mineral or 

group of minerals rests, notwithstanding any right of ownership of any person in relation to any land in, on 

or under which any such mineral or group of minerals is found, in the State. 

Section 50 (f) stipulates how to apply for a license and reads: ‘In addition to any term and condition 

contained in a mineral agreement and any term and condition contained in any mineral license, it shall be 

a term and condition of any mineral license that the holder of such mineral license shall: 

(f) prepare in such form as may be determined in writing by the Commissioner for the approval of the 

Commissioner; 

(i) an environmental impact assessment indicating the extent of any pollution of the environment before 

any prospecting operations or mining operations are being carried out and an estimate of any pollution, if 

any, likely to be caused by such prospecting operations or mining operations; 

(ii) if any pollution is likely to be so caused, an environmental management plan indicating the proposed 

steps to be taken in order to minimize or prevent to the satisfaction of the Commissioner any pollution of 

the environment in consequence of any prospecting operations or mining operations carried on by virtue 

of such mineral license.’ 

Section 91 (f) sets out the particulars to be provided to the Ministry regarding any potential 

environmental aspects: 

‘(i) the condition of, and any existing damage to, the environment in the area to which the application 

relates; 

(ii) an estimate of the effect which the proposed prospecting operations and mining operations may have 

on the environment and the proposed steps to be taken in order to minimize or prevent any such effect; 

and 

(iii) the manner in which it is intended to prevent pollution, to deal with any waste, to safeguard the 

mineral resources, to reclaim and rehabilitate land disturbed by way of the prospecting operations and 

mining operations and to minimize the effect of such operations on land adjoining the mining area.’ 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-3 

Section 128 sets out the removal of property and the remedying of damage caused to the surface of the 

land situated in those areas and the environment. 

Any person who fails to comply with the direction issued by the Minister under this section shall be guilty 

of an offence and liable on conviction to a fine not exceeding N$100 000, to imprisonment for a period not 

exceeding five years, or to both such fine and imprisonment. 

2.2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ACT, NO. 7 OF 2007 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Environment and Tourism 

The Act was gazetted on 27 December 2007 (Government Gazette No. 3966) and the Commencement 

of the Environmental Management Act, List of Activities that may not be undertaken without 

Environmental Clearance Certificate and Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations: Environmental 

Management Act, 2007 (Government Gazette No. 4878) were promulgated on 6 February 2012. 

Section 10 (1) (General Obligations) states that: ‘An Environmental Assessment Report shall contain, as 

a minimum: 

(I) where appropriate, an outline for monitoring and management programmes and any plans for post- 

project analysis; 

(j) a description of measures to be employed for decommissioning and restoration.’ 

Further, Section 20 deals with the transitional provisions of existing environmental contracts granted 

under the current existing policy. 

2.2.4 WATER AMENDMENT ACT, NO. 54 OF 1956 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Agriculture, Water and Forestry 

(Note: the Water Resource Management Act (2004) has been promulgated but not yet implemented as 

the regulations are still being drafted. However, the Act describes procedures and stipulations which are 

much more stringent than those contained in the current Water Act.) 

Notwithstanding what is stated in the Constitution, the ownership of water is subject to some controversy. 

It would appear that as a general rule the question of water would depend on the form which the 

underground water resource takes. In terms of the current legislation, permission is needed from the 

Minister to extract water from a declared subterranean area. However, the water is then only subject to 

the control of the State, but is not, as a consequence of such control, the property of the State. The Act 

stipulates, inter alia, the most important procedures and requirements – to obtain the purification of waste 

water and discharge (Section 21 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)), the use of public water for industrial purposes 

(Section 11 (1)-(7)), the requirements to obtain a permit to use public water for industrial purposes 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-4 

(Section 12 (1)- (9)) and the steps required to obtain a water abstraction permit (Section 13 (2)). 

Section 23 of the Act requires environmental rehabilitation after closure of the mine, focusing on the 

potential of groundwater pollution and potential pollution caused by runoff. 

2.2.5 NATURE CONSERVATION ORDINANCE, NO. 4 OF 1975 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Environment and Tourism 

Nature Conservation Ordinance, 1975 (the Ordinance) establishes a guiding framework for habitat and 

species conservation, including wildlife management and utilisation. Important habitats are offered 

protection under national and private parks, or reserves. The rationale is to establish areas for the 

protection, preservation, propagation and study of wildlife, plants, landforms and cultural resources. The 

Government Gazette No. 240 provides the regulation relating to section 84 of the Nature Conservation 

Ordinance. These regulations clearly set out what is allowed and what is not allowed in the different 

existing National Parks. 

Relevant to the mining activities is that care should be taken to ensure that protected plant species and 

eggs of protected and game bird species are not disturbed or destroyed. If disturbance or destruction is 

inevitable, a permit must be obtained from MET. 

The regulations published under GN 240 (GG 2256 of 125, August 1976) state that a permit is needed 

from MET should a nursery be operated to propagate indigenous plant species for rehabilitation 

purposes. 

2.2.6 NATIONAL HERITAGE ACT, NO. 27 OF 2004 

Line Body: National Heritage Council 

The Act provides for the protection and conservation of places and objects of heritage significance and 

the registration of such places and objects. It also makes provision for archaeological ‘impact 

assessments’ (Part V: Permits, paragraphs 51 and 52). 

If applicable, the relevant permits must be obtained before disturbing or destroying a heritage site as set 

out in the Act. 

2.2.7 PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND ENERGY ACT, NO. 13 OF 1990 


The Act stipulates how to conduct the business in respect of petroleum products, including the application 

of health, hygiene, safety and environmental standards and requirements, including: ‘The duties of a 

person in respect of the protection of the health of others and in the avoidance of environmental harm, 

the precautions in respect of the keeping, handling, conveying, using and disposing of petroleum 

products and in respect of underground leaks or other spillages of petroleum products.’ 



2.2.8 NAMIBIAN WATER CORPORATION ACT, NO. 12 OF 1997 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-5 

This Act contains several explicit references to the environment and its protection. It provides for 

environmental impact assessments, for rehabilitation of prospecting and mining areas, and for minimising 

or preventing pollution. The Act describes the procedures for water providers. However, as an end user, 

the client should ensure that all stipulations are followed. 

2.2.9 FOREST ACT, NO. 12 OF 2001 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Agriculture, Water and Forestry 

Section 22(1) states that ‘it is unlawful for any person to cut, destroy or remove 

any living tree, bush or shrub growing within 100 m of a river, stream or water course.’ 

Should this be unavoidable, a permit needs to be obtained. 

2.2.10 ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION PREVENTION ORDINANCE, NO. 11 OF 1976 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Health and Social Services 

A number of sections (5 (1), 7, 8 (1), 11 (1) (2) (3), 12 (1), 13 (1) (2) (4) (5) (6), 24 (1), 25 (1) (2) and 25 

(1) (2)) relate to ‘Air pollution control certification’, dust control, closure certificate, etc. At present, the 

Ministry does not grant any certificates as no procedures or guidelines exist. The best practice would be 

to notify the Ministry of the anticipated emissions. 

2.2.11 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE ORDINANCE, NO. 14 OF 1974 

Line Ministry: Drug Law Enforcement Unit (DLEU) of the Namibian Police, within the Ministry of Safety 

and Security 

The Act regulates the validity of licences or registration referred to in Section 5. It deals with hazardous 

substances of Groups I to IV. However, while environmental aspects are not really explicitly stated, 

guidelines for the importing, storage, handling, etc. of hazardous substances are set out. 

2.2.12 EXPLOSIVE ACT, NO. 26 OF 1956 


All explosives magazines are to be registered with MME as accessory works. Section 22 stipulates that a 

licence is required prior to erection of an explosive magazine. 

2.2.13 THE REGIONAL COUNCILS ACT (NO. 22 OF 1992) 

Line Ministry: Regional Local Government Housing and Rural Development (MRLGHRD) 

The Regional Councils are responsible for the planning and coordination of regional policies and 

priorities. Under Article 28, the powers, duties, functions, rights and obligations of regional councils 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-6 

include overseeing the general implementation of regional development activities. They have the power 

“to undertake, with due regard to the powers, duties and functions of the National Planning 

Commission…the planning of the development of the region for which it has been established”, bearing 

in mind: 

the natural and other resources and the economic potential of such regions, 

the general land utilisation pattern, and 

the sensitivity of the natural environment. 

2.2.14 LABOUR ACT, NO. 11 OF 2007 

Line Ministry: Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare 

The Act aims to “promote and maintain the welfare of the people and ..to further a policy of labour relations 

conducive to economic growth, stability and productivity”. It details basic conditions of employment, and 

health, safety and welfare requirements of employers. 

2.3 OVERALL PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT (SAIEA) 

In addition, any proposed and existing mining project also has to adhere to the following 13 Principles of 

Environmental Management (SAIEA, 2003): 

� renewable resources shall be utilised on a sustainable basis for the benefit of current and future 

generations of Namibians; 

� community involvement in natural resource management and sharing in the benefits arising there 

from shall be promoted and facilitated; 

� public participation in decision-making affecting the environment shall be promoted; 

� fair and equitable access to natural resources shall be promoted; 

� equitable access to sufficient water of acceptable quality and adequate sanitation shall be 

promoted and the water needs of ecological systems shall be fulfilled to ensure the sustainability 

of such systems; 

� the precautionary principle and the principle of preventative action shall be applied; 

� there shall be prior environmental assessment of projects and proposals which may significantly 

affect the environment or use of natural resources; 

� sustainable development shall be promoted in land-use planning; 

� Namibia’s movable and immovable cultural and natural heritage including its biodiversity shall be 

protected and respected for the benefit of current and future generations; 

� generators of waste and polluting substances shall adopt the best practicable environmental 

option to reduce such generation at source; 

� the polluter pays principle shall be applied; 

� reduction, re-use and recycling shall be promoted; and 

� there shall be no importation of waste into Namibia. 



2.4 NAMIBIAN POLICIES 

2.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT POLICY FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AND ENVIRONMENTAL 

CONSERVATION (1994) 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-7 

Namibia’s Environmental Assessment Policy is legislated through the Environmental Management Act. 

The regulations have been promulgated on 6 February 2012 and are currently implemented. 

2.4.2 MINERALS POLICY OF NAMIBIA (2004) 

The main chapters deal with Mine Closure/Integrated Mine Use, Social Responsibility of Mining 

Companies, Environmental Rehabilitation and Waste Management. Of special significance to the mine 

are the following statements in the policy: 

� In order to reconcile the objectives of mineral exploitation and environmental protection, it is 

essential that the negative impacts of prospecting or mining activities on the environment be 

avoided, minimised and mitigated in accordance with national policy and legislation, and 

international best practice. 

� While mining forms a very important part of the Namibian economy, it also has contributed to major 

environmental degradation. With respect to current and future operations, there is a need for 

appropriate legislation to regulate the environment in mining. 

2.4.3 POLICY FOR THE CONSERVATION OF BIOTIC DIVERSITY AND HABITAT PROTECTION (1994) 

The Policy of the Conservation of Biotic Diversity and Habitat Protection was drafted by MET to ensure 

adequate protection of all species and subspecies, of ecosystems, and of natural life-support processes. 

This should be achieved by: 

� creating inventories, monitoring and appropriate research; 

� education and extension; 

� managing, assisting and advising the management of land and natural resources in Namibia; 

� legislation; and 

� co-operation with local, national, regional and international organisations working for biotic 

diversity and habitat protection. 

2.5 INTERNATIONAL TREATIES AND PROTOCOLS 

The following International treaties and protocols have been ratified by the Namibian Government: 

� Convention on International Trade and Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES) 

(1973) 

� Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer (1985) 



� Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer (1987) 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-8 

� Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Waste and their 

Disposal (1989) 

� Convention on Biological Diversity (1992) 

� United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (1992) 

� Kyoto Protocol on the Framework Convention on Climate Change (1998) 

� World Heritage Convention (1972) 

� Convention to Combat Desertification (1994) 

� Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (2001) 

2.6 WORLD BANK STANDARDS 

2.6.1 IFC PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 

The International Finance Corporation (IFC) is a member of the World Bank Group and is the largest 

global development institution focussing on the private sector in developing countries. Its standards have 

become a global benchmark for environmental and social performance. They form the basis for the 

Equator Principles, a voluntary environmental and social risk-management framework used by 71 

financial institutions worldwide. 

The updated 2012 edition of IFC’s Sustainability Framework applies to all investment and advisory clients 

whose projects go through IFC’s initial credit review process after January 1, 2012. With this update, IFC 

expects to increase and better communicate its development impact; help client companies compete in a 

fast-changing, global economy; improve transparency and accountability; and better engage with 

communities who are affected by their projects. The IFC’s Performance Standards define clients’ 

responsibilities for managing their environmental and social risks as follows: 

� Performance Standard 1 – Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and 

Impacts; 

� Performance Standard 2 – Labour and Working Conditions; 

� Performance Standard 3 – Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention; 

� Performance Standard 4 – Community Health, Safety and Security; 

� Performance Standard 5 – Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement; and 

� Performance Standard 6 – Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living 

Natural resources. 

The Performance Standards require clients to engage with affected communities through disclosure of 

information, consultation, and informed participation, in a manner commensurate with the risks to and 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-9 

impacts on the affected communities. Community engagement should ensure the “free, prior, and informed 

consultation of affected communities, leading to broad community support 2 for the project” 3 . 

2.7 EQUATOR PRINCIPLES 

The Equator Principles are further international benchmarks and are based on the IFC’s Performance 

Standards and on the World Bank Group Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines (EHS 

Guidelines). The Equator Principles 4 are a framework and set of guidelines for evaluating social and 

environmental risks in project finance activities (table 2-1). They apply to all new projects with a total 

capital cost of US$10 million or more, no matter what industry sectors, without geographic requirement, and 

not specific to mining. 

TABLE 2-1: EQUATOR PRINCIPLES 

High level description of Principles Comments in relation to the proposed 

project. 

Equator Principle 1: Review and Categorisation 

All projects are categorised based on the magnitude of 

their potential environmental and social risks and impacts. 

Category A projects have potential significant adverse 

social or environmental impacts that are diverse, 

irreversible, or unprecedented. Category B projects have 

limited adverse social or environmental impacts, which are 

site-specific and largely reversible, while Category C 

The proposed project is considered to be 

a category A project. 

projects have minimal social or environmental impacts. 

Equator Principle 2: Social and Environmental Assessment 

A social and environmental impact assessment (SEIA) The EIA and EMP reports address most 

process, relevant to the nature and scale of the project, of the related issues as set out in Exhibit ii 

must be undertaken to address the potential social of Principle 2. Some aspects not covered 

environmental risks and impacts of the project, in the EIA and EMP report will be covered 

incorporating specialist studies where necessary. The as part of ongoing environmental, health, 

assessment is also required to propose relevant mitigation 

and management measures. 

safety and social management. 

Equator Principle 3: Applicable Social and Environmental Standards 

For projects located in non-OECD* countries, the While the EIA and EMP cover many of the 

assessment will refer to the IFC** Performance Standards applicable aspects of these performance 

(1-8) and the applicable industry-specific Environment, standards, some will be covered through 

Health and Safety Guidelines. The performance standards the proposed on site management 

address Social and Environmental Assessment and 

Management Systems, Labour and Working Conditions, 

Pollution Prevention and Abatement, Community Health, 

Safety and Security, Land Acquisition and Involuntary 

Resettlement, Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable 

Natural Resource Management, Indigenous Peoples and 

Cultural Heritage. The relevant EHS Guidelines include: 

General EHS Guidelines (environment, occupational 

systems and procedures. 

2 Broad community support is a collection of expressions by the affected communities, through individuals 

or their recognised representatives, in support of the project. There may be broad support even if some 

individuals or groups object to the project. 

3 IFC Policy on Social and Environmental Sustainability (paragraph 20). 

4 www.equator-principles.com 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-10 


project. 

health and safety, community health and safety, 

decommissioning and closure) and EHS Guidelines for 

Mining. 

The SEIA must also address compliance with relevant 

host country laws, regulations, and permits that pertain to 

social and environmental matters. 

Equator Principle 4: Action Plan and Management System 

An action plan, the level of which must be appropriate to 

the nature and scale of the project, which describes and 

prioritises the actions needed to implement the mitigation 

measures, corrective action and monitoring measures 

necessary to manage the social and environmental risks 

and impacts identified in the SEIA must be compiled. A 

social and environmental management system must be 

established and maintained to implement the action plan 

and corrective actions required to comply with host 

country laws and regulations as well as the requirements 

of the IFC performance standards and guidelines. 

Equator Principle 5: Consultation and Disclosure 

Projects which may have a significant adverse impact on 

local communities are required to undertake a 

consultation process. The consultation process must 

ensure the community’s free, prior, and informed 

consultation, and it must be demonstrated that the project 

has adequately incorporated the community’s concerns. 

Equator Principle 6: Grievance Mechanism 

Consultation, disclosure and community engagement 

must continue through the construction and operational 

phases of a project. A grievance mechanism must be 

established as part of the management system in order to 

receive and facilitate the resolution of concerns and 

grievances raised by those affected by the project. The 

affected communities must be informed about the 

grievance mechanism process, which must address all 

concerns promptly and transparently, in a culturally 

appropriate manner, and must be accessible to all 

community members. 

Equator Principle 7: Independent Review 

Equator Principle compliance of the SEIA, action plan and 

public consultation process must be assessed by an 

independent social or environmental expert, who is not 

directly related to the borrower, on behalf of the lending 

institution 

Equator Principle 8: Covenants 

Covenants must be incorporated into the financing 

documentation whereby the borrower is committed to 

comply with relevant host country environmental legal 

requirements, comply with the action plan, to provide 

periodic reports as required by the financial institution to 

document compliance with the action plan and host 

country environmental and social laws, regulations and 

permits, and to decommission the facilities in accordance 

with an agreed decommissioning plan. 

Equator Principle 9: Independent Monitoring and Reporting 

The project is required to appoint an independent 

environmental and/or social expert, or to retain qualified 

The management recommendations in 

the EIA and the plans in the EMP will be 

integrated into the formal EMS. 

A comprehensive disclosure and 

consultation process will be followed as 

part of the EIA process. 

Objectives and actions in this regard have 

been included in the EIA and EMP 

reports. 

This has not yet been done 

Auryx Gold is committed to these 

covenants. 

Auryx Gold will implement this as 

required/ when relevant. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-11 


project. 

and experienced external experts to verify monitoring 

information which is reported to the financial institution. 

Equator Principle 10 

Financial institutions which are signatories to the Equator 

Principles are required to report publically at least 

annually about their Equator Principle implementation 

processes and experience. The reports typically include, 

as a minimum, the number of transactions, project 

categorisation, and the implementation process. 

*Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development 

**International Finance Corporation 

2.8 NAMIBIA’S DEVELOPMENT CONTEXT 

This principle is relevant to financial 

institutions (banks) which are signatories 

to the Equator Principles. 

The following section describes Namibia’s long-terms strategic framework for developing the country as 

well as the development strategies and plans of the Region. 

2.8.1 VISION 2030 

Namibia’s Vision 2030 5 has been developed as a long-term planning framework for the country. It is built 

on a set of development objectives, which integrate economic, social and environmental dimensions 

underpinned by key concerns identified amongst the Namibian people. Its Vision statement is “a 

prosperous and industrialised Namibia, developed by her human resources, enjoying peace, harmony 

and political stability”. It provides the long-term policy framework for the Third National Development Plan 

(NDP3) 2007/08 - 2011/12, the up-coming NDP4 and all other local and regional development plans. 

The eight major objectives of Vision are to: 

� Ensure that Namibia is a fair, gender responsive, caring and committed nation, in which all 

citizens are able to realise their full potential, in a safe and decent living environment. 

� Create and consolidate a legitimate, effective and democratic political system (under the 

Constitution), and an equitable, tolerant and free society, that is characterised by sustainable and 

equitable development and effective institutions, which guarantee peace and political stability. 

� Develop a diversified, competent and highly productive human resources and institutions, fully 

utilising human potential, and achieving efficient and effective delivery of customer-focused 

services which are competitive not only nationally, but also regionally and internationally. 

� Transform Namibia into an industrialised country of equal opportunities, which is globally 

competitive, realising its maximum growth potential on a sustainable basis, with improved quality 

of life for all Namibians. 

� Ensure a healthy, food-secured and breastfeeding nation, in which all preventable, infectious and 

parasitic diseases are under secure control, and in which people enjoy a high standard of living, 

5 www.npc.gov.na/vision/vision_2030bgd.htm 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-12 

with access to quality education, health and other vital services, in an atmosphere of sustainable 

population growth and development. 

� Ensure the development of Namibia’s ‘natural capital’ and its sustainable utilization, for the 

benefit of the country’s social, economic and ecological well-being. 

� Accomplish the transformation of Namibia into a knowledge-based, highly competitive, 

industrialised and eco-friendly nation, with sustainable economic growth and a high quality of life. 

� Achieve stability, full regional integration and democratised international relations; the 

transformation from an aid-recipient country to that of a provider of development assistance. 

Achieving Objective (vi.) forms the crux of this project as the natural capital is both the gold underground 

and the productive land around it. Both should be developed for the well-being of the country. 

2.8.2 NAMIBIA’S MILLENNIUM DEVELOPMENT GOALS (MDGS) 

Namibia has been making variable progress towards the eight MDGs it set itself in 2004: 

� Eradicate extreme poverty and hunger 

� Achieve universal primary education 

� Promote gender equality and empower women 

� Reduce child mortality 

� Improve maternal health 

� Combat HIV/AIDS, malaria and tuberculosis (TB) 

� Ensure environmental sustainability 

� Develop a global partnership for development 

The mine will make a contribution to these development goals through its contribution to the economy 

and any social upliftment programmes that it chooses to support. Its biggest contribution is expected to 

be towards the first goal, provided that it does not mine to the detriment of farming in the surrounding 

community and long term environmental sustainability of the area. 

2.8.3 THE FOURTH NATIONAL DEVELOPMENT PLAN 2012- 2017 

The Fourth National Development Plan 2012- 2017 will become effective from 1 st April 2012. The 

overarching goals of NDP4, directly adopted from Vision 2030 are: 

� High and sustainable growth 

� Employment creation and 

� Increase in income equality. 



The strategy areas publicised so far include: 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 2-13 

� Basic Enablers – the institutional environment, education and skills, health and public 

infrastructure. The desired outcome is to have cleared the backlog of critical economic and social 

infrastructures and to have established the appropriate balance between maintenance and 

expansion of new infrastructures; 

� Economic priorities – the services and manufacturing sectors where Namibia has a clear 

comparative advantage notably logistics (focused on the port of Walvis Bay), tourism and 

manufacturing. 

� Social priorities – extreme poverty reduction and creation of 1000s of short-term job opportunities 

to increase the employability of unskilled youth. 

NDP4 intends to put in place a funding mechanism, including a Public-Private-Partnership framework and 

guidelines for concessions, including partial and full privatisation, to ensure delivery of infrastructure, 

while at the same time maintaining macroeconomic stability. 



3 PUBLIC CONSULTATION 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 3-1 

The Public Consultation process aims to ensure that all persons or organisations that may be affected or 

interested in the project are informed of the issues and can register their views and concerns. Building 

from there, the process provides opportunities to influence the project design so that its benefits can be 

maximised and potential negative impacts be minimised. 

The current best practice model is to engage in a process of continuous dialogue with the community and 

other stakeholders as plans for the project evolve and the EIA is prepared. A high level of interaction is 

maintained, potential and real social and environmental impacts are identified, and community needs and 

concerns are discussed and wherever possible built into the mine development plan, including decision- 

making and management practices. Good consultation helps foster genuine relationships with mutual 

respect, shared concerns and objectives between the company pursuing the development and the 

community (Joyce and McFarlane, 2001). 

The public participation facilitator’s role is to facilitate that process of dialogue to ensure there is 

transparency and accountability in decision-making and public confidence in the proposed project and its 

management. 

3.1 INTERESTED AND AFFECTED PARTIES (IAPS) 

At the beginning of the EIA process, ASEC drew up a list of stakeholders who needed to be informed 

about the proposed project. As the public participation process evolved, this list of Interested and 

Affected Parties (IAPs) has grown. table 3-1 below gives a summary of the current status of the list of 

IAPs which can be found in Appendix C. A total of 369 people were informed about the draft EIA by email 

and an additional 588 people registered their names at the Otavi and Otjiwarongo public meetings. They 

were presumably informed through the newspaper adverts, the posters and by word of mouth. 

TABLE 3-1: SUMMARY OF INTERESTED AND AFFECTED PARTIES 

Local and regional 

government – 

councillors and key 

officers 

Otjozondjupa Regional 

Council 

Otavi Village Council 

Otjiwarongo Town 

Council 

Ministries and 

parastatals – key 

officers 

Ministry of Mines and 

Energy 

Ministry of Environment 

and Tourism 

Ministry of Works, 

Transport and 

Communication 

Ministry of Agriculture, 

Water and Forestry 

Special interest groups Other IAPs 

Neighbouring farm owners 

and Tourism Lodges 

Otjiwarongo NCCI 

members 

Attendees of public 

meetings during Otjikoto 

Scoping Phase PPP 

Relevant workers’ Unions 

Mining companies 

Chamber of Mines 

Environmental NGOs e.g. 

Earthlife Namibia; Wildlife 

Society of Namibia; Namibian 

Nature Foundation 

IAPs who registered 

(see Appendix C) 



Local and regional 

government – 

councillors and key 

officers 

3.2 THE SCOPING PHASE 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Ministries and 

parastatals – key 

officers 

Department of Water 

Affairs 

Special interest groups Other IAPs 

Individual specialists 

Ministry of Education Press / Media 

Ministry of Trade and 

Industry 

NamWater 

NamPower 

TransNamib 

Namport 

Roads Authority 

Page 3-2 

Avdale commenced the pre-feasibility study and scoping phase of the environmental impact assessment 

for its Otjikoto Project in August 2008. IAPs were invited to register and comment on the project by way of 

advertisements in newspapers, through public meetings and by submitting comments to ASEC. This is 

reported in Appendix B. 

3.2.1 SCOPING REPORT 

The ESIA scoping report, comprising the project outline and a number of specialist studies, was placed 

for public review at libraries in Otavi, Otjiwarongo and Windhoek prior to the public meetings held during 

the week of 8-10 July 2008. Additionally, meetings with Regional and Local Councils, key ministries and 

parastatals were held prior to the public meetings. 



3.2.2 ADVERTISEMENTS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 3-3 

Advertisements for the four public meetings, including a brief summary of the project, were placed in the 

following national newspapers (Appendix B): 

� The Namibian; 

� Die Republikein; and 

� Allgemeine Zeitung. 

Additionally posters (Appendix B) were placed at strategic points in Otavi and Otjiwarongo inviting the 

public to the meetings. 

3.2.3 PUBLIC MEETINGS 

Three public meetings were held as follows and were well attended (see table 3-2): 

TABLE 3-2: FIRST PUBLIC MEETINGS 

Venue and date Number of participants 

Otavi: 08 July 2008 101 

Otjiwarongo: 09 July 2008 34 

Windhoek: 10 July 2008 32 

Total attendance 167 

At each of the public meetings, a presentation was given by Teal Exploration & Mining Inc. and by ASEC 

giving an outline of the project and the main findings of the scoping report to date. A summary was 

translated into Afrikaans at the Otavi meeting. The audience was invited to give comments, either 

verbally during the meeting or written on paper provided to each participant. They were also encouraged 

to send comments later by fax or e-mail. 

Minutes of those meetings were e-mailed to all those registered interested and affected parties who had 

e-mail addresses in August 2008 and can be found in Appendix B 

3.2.4 ISSUES RAISED DURING THE SCOPING PHASE PUBLIC MEETINGS 

A summary of the issues raised at the public meeting are listed below. The issues will be carried forward 

and addressed during the current EIA process. 

Social Issues 

� The Company has made no decision on final site of plant, pit or where to make its base 

� What does Otavi need to do to attract development? 

� How can the community expect to benefit? 

� Will there be employment opportunities; training? 



� What are the employment opportunities for local people? 

� Health & safety aspects of the mine. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 3-4 

� What are the Mine Closure plans and what assurance can be given that they will be 

implemented? 

� Need for improved communications with stakeholders 

� Need to avoid informal settlement becoming established at the site. 

Environmental Issues 

� Over-high water consumption estimates. 

� Current calculations of 5% ground water recharge level is too high, unless invader bush is 

cleared 

� Monitoring groundwater 

� Preventing Cyanide pollution 

� Addressing accident spillage 

� Compensation for pollution 

� Who has the right to close the mine, (the “Watchdog role” of MET, DWA and MME) 

� Where will the waste be dumped? 

� A short mining lifespan should not jeopardize long-term farming in the wider area 

� Intended use of the remaining farmland, not used by the mine 

� Check new guidelines for the new Environmental Management Act 

� Mine closure – e.g. “proposed rehabilitation measures, what will be done to the tailings?” 

Infrastructure and resource needs 

� Re-routing the D2808 

� Up-grading rail passenger services 

� Do not harm groundwater levels for other users – rather get water from Kombat mine or the 

Eastern Water Carrier. 

� The mine should pay for any increased water prices caused by the additional demand. 

� Consider alternative power supplies 

� Be careful to avoid locating plant on solid calcrete. 



3.3 PUBLIC CONSULTATION AND REVIEW OF DRAFT EIA REPORT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 3-5 

Following the Environmental Management Act of 2007 regulations, public consultations to review the 

draft EIA report was announced on the 12 th of June and ran to 11 July 2012. Table 3-3 describes the 

steps taken to inform IAPs and Authorities. 

TABLE 3-3: SUMMARY OF CONSULTATION PROCESS FOR THE DRAFT EIA AND EMP 

TASK DESCRIPTION DATE 

Notification - regulatory authorities and IAPs 

Notification of IAPs An invitation letter to comment on the draft EIA and EMP reports 

were advertised and the summary EIA report was distributed to 

IAPs and Government bodies as listed in Appendix C. 

Site notice A site notice was placed at a prominent place at the proposed mine 

site boundary (Appendix B). 

Posters Posters, the same as the site notice but smaller, were placed in 

various public places in both Otavi and Otjiwarongo. 

Newspaper 

advertisements 

Review of EIA and EMP Reports 

Block advertisements were placed in three national newspapers 

over two consecutive weeks in The Namibian, The Republikein 

and The Allgemeine Zeitung. 

Copies of the advertisements are attached in Appendix B. 

12 June 2012 

From 12 June 

2012 

From 12 June 

2012 

12 and 18 

June 2012 

Review period The review period was publicised as from 12 June to 11 July. 12 June – 

Report availability Hard copies of the EIA report and EMP were made available for 

review at the following places: MET library in Windhoek, 

Otjiwarongo and Otavi public libraries, as detailed in the 

advertisements and IAP letters. 

Electronic copies of the EIA and EMP reports and all the specialist 

reports were available on request (on a CD) and were available at 

the Open Days. 

Summaries of the EIA report were distributed to all relevant 

authorities and IAPs that were registered on the project’s public 

involvement database via e-mail. 

The full reports and appendices were also available on the 

www.asecnam.com website. 

Public Open Days Public Open Days were held in: 

� Otavi; 

� Otjiwarongo; and 

� Windhoek. 

Neighbouring farmers were offered a special focus group meeting 

through the local Farmers Association, but there was no interest 

11 July 2012 

From 12 June 

2012 

19-21 June 

2012 



TASK DESCRIPTION DATE 

Submission of 

comments 

MET review of EIA 

report 

3.3.1 PUBLIC OPEN DAYS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


and individuals attended the Open Days. 

Eighteen posters were displayed describing the project and 

showing the findings of the EIA. Personnel from SLR Consulting, 

the mine’s designer and from AuryxGold were present to answer 

questions and respond to comments. 

Comments received in writing are attached in full in Appendix B 

together with copies of 22 SMSes received. A list of all issues 

raised during the EIA Public Open Days as well as the Scoping 

Phase is given in Appendix D. 

A copy of the final EIA report, including authority and IAP review 

comments, was forwarded to MET on completion of the public 

review process. 

The Public Open Days to review the draft EIA were very well attended, as shown in Table 3-4. 

TABLE 3-4: NUMBERS ATTENDING PUBLIC OPEN DAYS JUNE 2012 

Venue Number of people 

Windhoek Open Day, 19 June 2012 21 

Otavi Open Day, 20 June 2012 564 

Otjiwarongo Open Day, 21 June 2012 123 

Total attending 708 

Page 3-6 

16 July 2012 

Many people studied the posters and asked questions of clarification. Comments and issues relating to 

the EIA were recorded and have been summarised in Appendix D. The major issues discussed at the 

various open days related to the potential impact on groundwater of neighbouring farms and towns. 

There were many job seekers and discussion regarding job opportunities, recruitment policies and how 

recruitment should be conducted. The potential negative social issues resulting from a construction 

camp on site was also a concern to neighbouring farmers as was the devaluation of their land as a result 

of the mine. 

3.3.2 MEETING WITH THE DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS AND FORESTRY AND NAMWATER 

As part of the EIA review process, DWAF and NamWater requested a meeting with SLR and Auryx Gold 

to discuss relevant matters on the groundwater model of the proposed Otjikoto Gold mine. A meeting 

therefore held on the 10 th of July 2012. The minutes of the meeting is attached in Appendix B and the 

comments and issues raised during the meeting are included in the Issues and Reponses Report 

(Appendix D). The issues discussed during the meeting related, amongst others, to the relevant 

permitting- and associated groundwater monitoring requirements. 



4 DESCRIPTION OF CURRENT ENVIRONMENT 


SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-1 

The initial baseline specialist studies for the ESIA were conducted between April 2007 and February 

2008. In August 2008 the EIA scoping report was finalised and submitted to the Ministry of 

Environment and Tourism. After Teal Mining was taken over by Auryx Gold (Namibia) Pty Ltd. work 

resumed in July 2010. After the completion of the Preliminary Environmental and Social Impact 

Assessment of the proposed Otjikoto Gold Mine Project’ (ASEC, September 2010) a number of 

outstanding specialist studies identified during the preliminary ESIA report were conducted between 

December 2010 and December 2011. 

This Chapter describes the existing biophysical and human environment taking the findings of the 

various studies into account. Copies of the specialist studies are included as appendices to this report 

and referenced at the start of each section. 

4.2 CLIMATE 

The Otjikoto Gold Mine Project is located approximately 300 km inland from the west coast of 

Namibia. The area is characterized by low rainfall with extreme temperature ranges and unique 

climatic factors influencing the natural environment and biodiversity. 

This section describes the main climatic parameters within the Otjikoto Gold Mine Project area. 

4.2.1 SYNOPTIC CLIMATOLOGY 

The synoptic scale circulation of the region is largely the result of its location between the South 

Atlantic and Indian Ocean subtropical high-pressure cells. The high pressure (HP) belt acts as a buffer 

against the travelling depressions and anticyclones of the middle latitudes, as a result these systems 

are only able to exert an indirect influence on the local weather. The presence of the HP belt is also 

responsible for the comparative persistence of the plateau-level pressure distribution patterns despite 

considerable changes in upper air flow patterns and frequent marked changes in the weather. Due to 

its location to the north of the HP belt, the region is also accessible to the tropical cyclones of the 

southwest Indian Ocean, the effects of which may vary from drought in some areas to floods in others, 

depending on the proximity of the cyclone’s core (Torrance, 1972). 

During winter months, the HP belt shifts northward resulting in the prevalence of the generally dry 

southeast trade winds and the occurrence of enhanced anticyclonic subsidence and fine conditions. 

North-easterly and northerly winds gain prominence during summer months. The air mass properties 

and weather associated with such north-easterly and northerly winds depend largely on their path. Air 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-2 

masses moving overland via East Africa are dry with lapse rates steep enough to give rise to 

afternoon thunderstorms. Air masses with an oceanic track are much moister producing more general 

thunderstorms. The rainy season reaches a peak during January and February with the location of the 

Inter-tropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ) over the northern half Zimbabwe. The ITCZ represents the 

zone of convergence of the north-eastern monsoons (moist or dry according to its recent track), the 

southeast trades (generally dry) and the very moist Congo north-westerly airflow. The rainy season 

usually ends in March as the south-easterly airstream to the south of the ITCZ strengthens in 

accordance with the movements of the high pressure systems along the southern African coast. The 

drier air limits the rainfall to thunderstorms and showers, which gradually become more infrequent 

(Torrance, 1972). 

Coastal lows originate along the west coast and follow the coastline towards the southeast coast. The 

temperature and wind shifts associated with coastal lows resemble those of cold fronts are ore often 

mistaken as such. The coastal low is heralded by the onset of the southerly buster (cool, onshore 

airflow behind the coastal low) during which time temperature drops rapidly and pressure begins to 

rise. Although coastal lows frequently produce greater surface cooling than cold fronts, these systems 

are usually shallow (seldom deeper than 1 500 m) and seldom produce any precipitation other than 

mist and drizzle. The passage of coastal lows over coastal regions results in average to below 

average surface pressures and the occurrence of cool, very moist conditions and fair to strong winds 

with a distinctly southerly component at and below the 900 hPa level. The coastal low system is most 

frequently capped by drier and warmer NNW airflow which arises from the dominant anticyclonic 

circulation (Preston-Whyte and Tyson, 1989). 

4.2.2 REGIONAL METEOROLOGY 

Meteorological mechanisms govern the dispersion, transformation, and eventual removal of pollutants 

from the atmosphere. The analysis of hourly average meteorological data is necessary to facilitate a 

comprehensive understanding of the ventilation potential of the site. The vertical dispersion of pollution 

is largely a function of the wind field. The wind speed determines both the distance of downward 

transport and the rate of dilution of pollutants. The generation of mechanical turbulence is similarly a 

function of the wind speed, in combination with the surface roughness. 

Air temperature is an important parameter for the development of the mixing and inversion layers. It 

also determines the effect of plume buoyancy as the larger the temperature difference between 

ambient air and the plume, the higher the plume will rise. This in turn will affect the rate of dissipation 

of pollutants before it reaches ground level. Incoming solar radiation also determines the rate of 

development and dissipation of the mixing layer. Relative humidity is an inverse function of ambient air 

temperature, increasing as ambient air temperature decreases. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-3 

Precipitation represents an effective removal mechanism of atmospheric pollutants and is therefore 

frequently considered during air pollution studies. Evaporation is a function of ambient temperature, 

wind and the saturation deficit of the air. Evaporation rates have important implications for the design 

and implementation of effective dust control programmes. 

The Otjikoto Gold Mine Project falls within the central northern part of Namibia. Historical 

meteorological data are limited, with only short-term hourly data available since June 2007 from the 

on-site weather station. Regional data on temperature, rainfall, humidity and evaporation were 

obtained from the Atlas of Namibia (Mendelsohn et.al., 2009). 

4.2.2.1 Regional Precipitation and Evaporation 

Otjiwarongo falls within the higher rainfall band of Namibia, with annual average rainfall ranging 

between 350 mm and 450 mm. Rainfall is higher at Otjiwarongo decreasing towards Outjo, which lies 

west of the project area. 

Namibia has high evaporation rates, in general. Evaporation rates at Otjowarongo is between 1 960- 

2 100 mm per year increasing towards Outjo where it ranges between 2 100-2 240 mm. 

4.2.2.2 Ambient Air Temperature 

Maximum temperatures within the Otjiwarongo region range between 34-36 °C and occur mainly 

between December and February. The lowest temperatures are between 4-6 °C during the months of 

June to July. 

Frost is associated with the region but is only likely to occur for 1-5 days per year. 

The number of sunshine hours in the region is around 9-10 hours per day (Mendelsohn et.al., 2009). 

4.2.2.3 Solar Radiation 

Incoming solar radiation increases from sunrise (06:00) to reach a maximum at midday (12:00 – 

13:00) and then decreases till sunset (19:00). Within the Otjiwarongo and Outjo area, solar radiation is 

on average between 6.2-6.4 kWhr per m² per day. This is the highest solar radiation area within 

Namibia. 

4.2.2.4 Relative Humidity 

Relative humidity for the region, based on Grootfontein statistics, varies between 10% to 20% during 

winter months to between ~50-85% during summer months. The highest humidity in the central 

northern and central regions is in March as progressively more moisture feeds southwards from the 

Intertropical Convergence Zone. 



4.2.2.5 Regional Wind 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-4 

The wind field of the region represents a combination of the synoptic-scale circulation and the local 

land-sea breeze circulation. Wind data for Outjo indicate high wind speeds in general ranging between 

~2-10 km/hr (7.2-36 m/s) (Mendelsohn et.al., 2009). 

4.2.3 OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE SITE 

4.2.3.1 Otjikoto Meteorological Station 

A Davis Vantage Pro-2 Plus Weather Station and a data receiver console with a data logger were 

installed at the project site during June 2007. The console is located inside a complete system shelter 

that can be locked (see figure 4-1). 

Weather 

Station 

FIGURE 4-1: WEATHER STATION 

The station uses a wireless integrated sensor suite that runs on solar power. A Lithium battery 

provides backup at night and during cloudy days. The battery on the station needs to be replaced at 

least every eight months. The station can transmit data up to 300 metres in line of sight to the console. 

The console currently runs on alkaline batteries but it can be connected to a 220V electricity supply. It 

is expected that the batteries on the console will require replacement every three months if it is not 

connected to electricity. It is also recommended that once permanent structures with 220V electricity 

are erected in a 300 metres line-of-site radius from the station, the console be relocated to these 

structures to ensure access to electricity and the security of data on the data logger. The data is 

logged at 30-minute intervals. 

Receiver 

console with 

data logger 

Wind speed and direction as recorded by the on-site weather station were verified by purchasing 

weather data from the United States MM5 database for the years 2008 and 2009. The MM5 data were 

extracted for the same location as where the Otjikoto weather station is. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-5 

The MM5 and on-site weather data show similar prevailing wind directions to be from the east and 

east-south-east with occasional airflow from the north-east and south-east. MM5 wind speeds are 

much higher in general than the on-site data, ranging primarily between above 4 m/s whereas the on- 

site data have wind speeds primarily below 5 m/s. 

Measured data are preferred above simulated meteorological data and since the prevailing wind 

directions are mainly similar between the two datasets, the on-site weather data can be regarded as 

representative of the on-site conditions. 

Period 

2008 

Period 

2009 

Measured Onsite Data MM5 Data 



Day 

2008 

Day 

2009 

Night 

2008 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



Page 4-6 



Night 

2009 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



Page 4-7 

FIGURE 4-2: COMPARISON OF MEASURED WEATHER DATA AT OTJIKOTO AND THE MM5 DATA 

FOR THE PERIOD 2008 AND 2009. 

4.2.3.2 Study Area – Meso-scale Dispersion Potential 

The analysis of meteorological data observed for the site provides the basis for the parameterisation 

of the meso-scale ventilation potential of the site, and to provide the input requirements for the 

dispersion simulations. Parameters that need to be taken into account in the characterisation of meso- 

scale ventilation potentials include wind speed, wind direction, extent of atmospheric turbulence, 

ambient air temperature and mixing depth. A comprehensive data set for at least one year of site- 

specific hourly average wind speed, wind direction and temperature data are needed for the 

dispersion simulations. 

On-site weather data for the period 8 June 2007 to 30 November 2011 were available. Data 

availability for the parameters used in the assessment are provided in Table 4-1. Data availability 

should be more than 90% (Hall & Spanton, 1999). The meteorological dataset from the Otjikoto 

weather station has on average 76% data availability. For year 2007, the data only start in June but 

during 2008 only 21% data are available with the period February to October missing. The following 

years show good data recovery of 92% (2009), 91% (2010) and 88% (2011). 

TABLE 4-1: DATA AVAILABILITY OF METEOROLOGICAL PARAMETERS RECORDED AT THE 

OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT SITE. 

Data Period: 8 June 2007 to 30 November 2011 

Parameter Availability 

Wind Speed 76% 

Wind Direction 75% 

Temperature 76% 

Relative Humidity 76% 

Pressure 76% 

Rainfall 76% 



4.2.3.3 Surface Wind Field 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-8 

The vertical dispersion of pollution is largely a function of the wind field. The wind speed determines 

both the distance of downward transport and the rate of dilution of pollutants. The generation of 

mechanical turbulence is similarly a function of the wind speed, in combination with the surface 

roughness. 

Period, daytime and night-time wind roses for the period 8 June 2007 to 30 November 2011 are 

provided in Figure 4-3. Yearly wind roses for 2007 to 2011 are also shown in Figure 4-3 with the 

monthly wind roses. 

The prevailing wind field is from the east and east-south-east with a frequency of occurrence of over 

22%. Less frequent winds occur from the westerly sector. During the day, more frequent winds 

associated with high wind speeds occur from the east, east-south-east, south-east and north-east with 

almost 18% calm conditions. Night-time airflow shows similar patterns but with less frequent winds 

from the north-east and at lower wind speeds. The percentage calm conditions increase to 35%. 

The data reflect very little variation in the wind field between the various years. The year 2007 only 

reflects wind flow for part of the year with 2008 only at 21% data availability. The comparison between 

the years should therefore be limited to 2009, 2010 and 2011. All three years show dominant airflow 

from the east and east-south-east with some variance in the frequency of occurrence and wind 

speeds. During 2008, more frequent winds were recorded from the east-south-east than from the east 

with very few exceeding 6 m/s. The year 2009 has an increased frequent airflow from the east and 

stronger winds from the east-south-east. Winds from the east-south-east dominate during 2011 with 

high wind speeds, exceeding 6m/s, recorded from the east-south-east. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-9 

FIGURE 4-3: PERIOD, DAY-TIME, NIGHT-TIME AND YEARLY WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO 

GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 

The variance in wind fields and wind strength in January reflects the average prevailing wind direction 

from the east to the south-east but also frequent winds from the south-west. Between February and 

April, easterly and east-south-easterly airflow increase with also more frequent winds from the north- 

east. During the months of May and June the prevailing wind direction changes slightly to have more 

frequent flow from the east-south-east. This dominance is east-south-easterly flow continues 

throughout July and August but with increased flow also from the east. August months are associated 

with higher wind speeds as reflected in figure 4-4. Similar wind flow is reflected in the September and 

October wind roses with higher wind speeds in October. More frequent airflow from the south-west 

also starts in October and is carried through to November where the frequency of the south-easterly 

and easterly winds subside. Easterly winds dominate during December with less frequent airflow from 

the other directions. Wind speeds are again much lower than in the preceding months. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-10 

FIGURE 4-4: PERIOD WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 

2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-11 

FIGURE 4-5: MONTHLY WIND ROSES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-12 

Frequency distribution of wind speeds provides an indication of the percentage time the wind speed 

exceeds certain thresholds. From figure 4-6 it is evident that the wind speeds are primarily below 

5 m/s with strong winds of more than 6 m/s occurring for less than 0.1% of the time. Wind speeds 

required to lift particulates are given as 5.4 m/s and occurred for 0.5% of the time. Moderate wind 

speeds between 2 m/s and 4 m/s occur for 26.8% with those between 1 m/s and 2 m/s occurring for 

24.5%. 

FIGURE 4-6: AVERAGE WIND FREQUENCY AND VELOCITY OVER THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO 

NOVEMBER 2011. 

4.2.3.4 Temperature 

Air temperature is important, both for determining the effect of plume buoyancy (the larger the 

temperature difference between the plume and the ambient air, the higher the plume is able to rise), 

and determining the development of the mixing and inversion layers. The minimum, maximum and 

mean temperatures recorded on-site are shown in table 4-2. Monthly average diurnal temperatures for 

the Otjikoto site are provided in figure 4-7. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-13 

TABLE 4-2: MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND AVERAGE TEMPERATURES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD 

PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec 

Maximum 36.7 34.1 33.8 29.9 29.8 28.6 27.7 31.5 34.8 37.4 37.9 37.4 

Minimum 9.8 9.6 7.6 7.8 0.6 -5 -1.6 -2.1 0.1 1.4 5.6 7.8 

Average 22.0 21.3 20.6 19.4 16.9 13.9 14.1 17.9 22.4 23.4 23.2 23.4 

FIGURE 4-7: MONTHLY AVERAGE TEMPERATURES FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE 

PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 

4.2.3.5 Rainfall 

Rainfall represents an effective removal mechanism of atmospheric pollutants and is therefore 

frequently considered during air pollution studies. The total rainfall for the project area is shown in 

Table 4-3and figure 4-8. Annual rainfall trends indicate summer rainfall (December to March) and dry 

winter months (June to August). The highest rainfall was recorded in 2011 with 215.5 mm for January, 

133.2 mm for February, 129.8 mm for March and 150.4 mm for April. The year 2010 reflects a different 

pattern with the highest rainfall recorded during December (88.6 mm). Over the three years (with 

complete datasets), the highest total rainfall recorded was in 2011 (652.4 mm) with 556.8 mm 

recorded in 2010 and 318.2 mm in 2009. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-14 

TABLE 4-3: TOTAL MONTHLY RAINFALL FOR THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE PERIOD 8 

JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total 

2007 N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. 0 0 0 0 12.8 14.8 8.2 35.8 

2008 85.40 N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. 8 1 95.0 

2009 9.8 8.2 51.4 11.8 18.4 0.4 0 0 10.6 61.4 57.6 88.6 318.2 

2010 168.4 82.2 120.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 94 91.8 556.8 

2011 215.2 133.2 129.8 150.4 1.2 0 0 0 0.2 6.2 16.2 0 652.4 

FIGURE 4-8: TOTAL MONTHLY RAINFALL AS RECORDED AT OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT FOR THE 

PERIOD 8 JUNE 2007 TO NOVEMBER 2011. 

4.3 GEOLOGY AND SURFACE WATER FLOW AND TOPOGRAPHY 

4.3.1 GEOLOGY 

The project area is underlain by Damara Supergroup intracratonic sediments deposited between 830- 

760 Ma. Swakop Subgroup strata underlie the project area comprising Okonguarri Formation, marble 

of the Karibib Formation intruded by Salem Suite granites. The mica schist both overlies and 

underlies the marble. No outcrops are seen in the project area and lithological details are derived from 

drilling data. Its mineral composition is predominantly quartz-biotite with calcareous and quartzitic 

intercalations. The marble formation is coarse grained, light grey to white with occasional graphite, 

biotite and calc-silicate layers and minor dolomitic horizons. Themarble-schist contact zones as shown 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-15 

in published geology maps are not accurate enough for detailed groundwater exploration work due to 

the 1:1 000 000 scale of the maps. 

The occurrence of Salem Suite granite outcrops or sub-outcrops in the area are erratic. These 

represent pegmatitic phase of the Salem Suite granitic intrusions to the south of the project area. The 

granites have an intrusive relationship with the Swakop Subgroup rocks in the area. In addition to the 

above lithologies, superficial deposits in the form of thick (up to30m) calcrete deposits occur in the 

project area. These formed by dissolution of carbonates at depth and precipitation at surface due to 

evaporation of discharged groundwater. The superficial cover is expected to enhance recharge 

potential in the project area (Seimons, W., 1990) but may also conceal structural features of interest. 

(Avdale preliminary study report, Groundwater resource assessment). 

The Otjikoto deposit occurs approximately 1 km to the northwest of the lower contact of the “Main 

Marble Marker” of the Karibib Formation. This marble unit represents a useful marker horizon and, to a 

large extent, represents the only outcrop in the region (Discovery of the Otjikoto gold deposit in 

Namibia, J. Wilton, P.J.A. Lombaard, H.G.Philpot, Anglovaal). 

4.3.2 SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE AND TOPOGRAPHY 

The project area is located in the most eastern parts of the Ugab catchment, an ephemeral river 

catchment draining westwards into the Atlantic Sea. The regional surface water divide to the 

neighbouring Etosha and Omatako catchments is located towards the east and north of the farm 

Otjikoto, see Figure 4-9. 

The main surface water flow in the vicinity of the mine site is in a north-western direction, following the 

gradient towards the Platveld basin (see blue arrows in Figure 4-9). There are no clearly defined 

channels found on aerial photographs or satellite images. Figure 4-9 shows the poorly developed 

drainage system which was digitized from the 1:50 000 and 1:250 000topographic maps. The planned 

mine pit is situated close to the local surface water divide which was calculated based on a 

combination of LIDAR and SRTM data. Surface water flow in this region occurs as overland flow 

accumulating in pans and depressions from where it infiltrates or evaporates. 

The local topography is flat with a gentle slope towards the north-west with freely draining soils. The 

site is located at an elevation of 1500-1510 mamsl, just north of a local surface water divide. There 

are no well defined surface water drainage features on the site and no major surface water flow or 

defined channel flow is expected other than local events after heavy rainfall. No baseline surface 

water quality data is available for the site. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-16 

FIGURE 4-9: OTJIKOTO GOLD MINE: OVERVIEW ON THE LOCATION OF THE MINE SITE WITHIN 

THE REGIONAL CATCHMENTS (DATA SOURCE: ATLAS OF NAMIBIA) AND DETAIL VIEW ON THE 

MINE SITE AND THE SURFACE WATER FLOW DIRECTION AS WELL AS THE LOCAL WATER 

DIVIDE (BASED ON LIDAR DATA) 



4.4 GROUNDWATER 

4.4.1 INTRODUCTION 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-17 

AGES was appointed to conduct a baseline hydrogeological assessment of the Otjikoto Gold Mine 

Project in Namibia. The purpose of this investigation was to qualify the requirements for mine water 

supply, mine dewatering and environmental impacts that could be associated with the proposed mine 

development. The focus area was on the farm Otjikoto and the surrounding environment which might 

be affected by the development. Additional work, such as water quality analysis, a detailed 

geohydrological model, water quantity and recharge models, was conducted by SLR and the reports 

are contained in Appendix E. 

4.4.2 HYDROCENSUS 

AGES worked with two sets of groundwater data, i.e. data from the hydrocensus conducted by Carr 

Barbour & Associates (February – April 1996) and from the onsite survey conducted by AGES in 

September 2007. 

During the 1996 hydrocensus water levels (see Figure 4-10) were measured at seven boreholes 

showing an average depth of 29 m, with the shallowest hole at 17 m and the deepest water level at 48 

m. The average yield of measured boreholes (16 in total) recorded in the DWA database was72 m 3 /d, 

with a lowest yield of9.6 m 3 /d and a highest yield of 326 m 3 /d. 

During September 2007 a further hydrocensus was conducted for the proposed project. A total of 40 

boreholes were surveyed. The majority of these boreholes are on-site exploration boreholes, and only 

one of these boreholes was reported to have a submergible pump installed. 

The project area is situated within a groundwater control area managed by Namwater (BIWAC, 2007). 



FIGURE 4-10: OTJIKOTO DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS HYDROCENSUS (1996) 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-18 



4.4.3 AQUIFER CLASSIFICATION 

4.4.3.1 Marble Aquifer to the South 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-19 

The Otjiwarongo Marble Aquifer (OMA) is situated approximately 10 km to the south-west of the site 

and supplies water to the Omarassa-Otjiwarongo Water Scheme that supplies water to the town of 

Otjiwarongo. 

The total recommended abstraction from this aquifer is 2.8 Mm 3 /a (7600 m 3 /d) (Seimons, 1989). This 

aquifer is classified as a sole source aquifer. 

4.4.3.2 Platveld Basin 

The mine area is situated on the eastern margin of the Platveld Basin of which the dominant geology 

consists of quarts-biotite schists, calcitic and dolimitic marble. This aquifer is also a sole source 

groundwater unit as groundwater is the only option for farmers. The approximate average yield of 

boreholes in the study area is 175 m 3 /d (Seimons, 1989). 

4.4.4 HYDROGEOLOGY AND CONCEPTUAL MODEL 

The geological formations form a number of hydraulic zones: 

� Calcrete forms the upper layer, which would enhance groundwater recharge. The calcrete is 

too shallow to form an aquifer but is expected to be permeable and would allow seepage from 

mineralised stockpiles. 

� The regional marble formations form a major aquifer that strikes south-east to north-west. The 

marble forms a fractured porous aquifer with a high permeability and storativity. Underground 

solution channels occur in the marble aquifers. 

� The schist formations in which the mine is located form a minor aquifer with permeable zones 

formed by faulting. 

� Regional fault zones link the marble and schist aquifers and form conduits for groundwater 

flow. 

The general direction of groundwater flow is from the Marble Aquifer in the south-east to the Schist 

and Platveld Aquifer in the north-west, following the topographic gradient. 

4.4.5 WATER QUALITY SUMMARY 

During October 2007 water samples were taken for 10 of the boreholes intersected in the September 

2007 hydrocensus. These samples were taken to determine macro and micro chemical analysis, and 

evaluated against South African water quality guidelines. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-20 

According to these guidelines the water is classified as water of marginal water quality (Class 2) for 

domestic water quality. This means that the water is only conditionally acceptable for potable 

requirements and disinfection and softening would be required to make the water suitable for potable 

and mine water supply. 

4.5 AIR QUALITY 

The information provided in this baseline description is taken from the ‘Air Quality Baseline for the 

Otjikoto Gold Mine Project in Namibia’ by Airshed Planning Professionals (2012) (Appendix F). The 

nearest potential sensitive receptors are shown in Figure 4-11. 


In order to understand the baseline situation, on-site meteorology was obtained from the on site 

weather station and analysed (see section4.2). Meteorological characteristics of a site govern the 

dispersion, transformation and eventual removal of pollutants from the atmosphere. Pollution 

concentration levels fluctuate in response to changes in atmospheric stability, to concurrent variations 

in the mixing depth, and to shifts in the wind field. Spatial variations, and diurnal and seasonal 

changes, in the wind field and stability regime are functions of atmospheric processes operating at 

various temporal and spatial scales. Hourly average wind speed, wind direction, temperature and 

rainfall data measured over the period June 2007 to November 2011 were used to inform the local 

dispersion potential of the site. 

For a comprehensive baseline assessment ambient monitoring data are required. Otjikoto Gold 

Project installed eight single dust fallout buckets and a PM10 minivol sampler in November 2010. This 

served to measure background dust deposition and PM10 ambient concentrations, respectively. More 

than one year of data is included in this study to provide an indication of the background dust fallout 

rates and PM10 concentrations prior to the commencement of mining operations. 

In addition, all existing sources of air pollution in the region were identified and qualitatively described 

based on the associated pollutants and potential to contribute to the background ambient 

concentrations and dust fallout levels at the project area. 

4.5.2 ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY AND MIXING DEPTH 

The vertical component of dispersion is a function of the extent of thermal turbulence and the depth of 

the surface mixing layer. Unfortunately, the mixing layer is not easily measured, and must therefore 

often be estimated using prognostic models that derive the depth from some of the other parameters 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-21 

that are routinely measured, e.g. solar radiation and temperature. During the daytime, the atmospheric 

boundary layer is characterised by thermal turbulence due to the heating of the earth’s surface and the 

extension of the mixing layer to the lowest elevated inversion. Radiative flux divergence during the 

night usually results in the establishment of ground based inversions and the erosion of the mixing 

layer. The mixing layer ranges in depth from ground level (i.e. only a stable or neutral layer exists) 

during night-times to the base of the lowest-level elevated inversion during unstable, day-time 

conditions. 

Atmospheric stability is frequently categorised into one of six stability classes. These are briefly 

described in table 4-4. 

TABLE 4-4: ATMOSPHERIC STABILITY CLASSES. 

A very unstable calm wind, clear skies, hot daytime conditions 

B moderately unstable clear skies, daytime conditions 

C Unstable moderate wind, slightly overcast daytime conditions 

D Neutral high winds or cloudy days and nights 

E Stable moderate wind, slightly overcast night-time conditions 

F very stable low winds, clear skies, cold night-time conditions 

The atmospheric boundary layer is normally unstable during the day as a result of the turbulence due 

to the sun's heating effect on the earth's surface. The thickness of this mixing layer depends 

predominantly on the extent of solar radiation, growing gradually from sunrise to reach a maximum at 

about 5-6 hours after sunrise. This situation is more pronounced during the winter months due to 

strong night-time inversions and a slower developing mixing layer. During the night a stable layer, with 

limited vertical mixing, exists. During windy and/or cloudy conditions, the atmosphere is normally 

neutral. 

For elevated releases such as stack emissions, the highest ground level concentrations will occur 

during unstable, daytime conditions. Ground level concentrations depend on a combination of wind 

speed and plume buoyancy. If the plume is considerably buoyant (high exit gas velocity and 

temperature) together with a low wind, the plume will reach the ground relatively far downwind. With 

stronger wind speeds, on the other hand, the plume may reach the ground closer, but due to the 

increased ventilation, it will be more diluted. A wind speed between these extremes will therefore be 

responsible for the highest ground level concentrations. In contrast, the highest concentrations for 

ground level, or near-ground level releases from non-wind dependent sources will occur during weak 

wind speeds and stable (night-time) atmospheric conditions. 



4.5.3 EXISTING SOURCES OF ATMOSPHERIC EMISSION IN THE PROJECT AREA 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-22 

The main activity around the proposed Otjikoto Gold Project is feedstock farming. The B1 national 

road is approximately 2 km west of the proposed mine with a few unpaved farm roads surrounding the 

site. These activities are likely to result in particulate emissions at a localised scale whereas SO2 and 

NOx are likely to result from biomass burning (veld fires). Traffic on the national road will add to both 

the particulate and gaseous emissions whereas windblown dust from exposed tilled land could be a 

significant source of particulate emissions. 

Table 4-5 lists all the criteria pollutants and the likely sources resulting in these pollutants within the 

vicinity of the Otjikoto Gold Project. 

TABLE 4-5: KEY POLLUTION SOURCES IN THE VICINITY OF THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT AND 

ASSOCIATED CRITERIA POLLUTANTS. 

PM10 and PM2.5 Mining operations 

Transport 

Dust entrainment on sand and gravel roads 

Agriculture (land clearing and controlled burning) 

Biomass burning 

Sulphur dioxide Mining operations 

Oxides of Nitrogen 

Carbon monoxide 

Ozone 

Windblown dust from exposed agricultural land 

Transport (vehicles and trucks moving along the B1 national road) 


Benzene Transport (vehicles and trucks moving along the B1 national road) 


Lead Transport (vehicles and trucks moving along the B1 national road) 

The contribution of various sources of emission to ambient particulate concentrations within the region 

is of interest given that elevated concentrations having been recorded. The most significant sources 

located within the region include: 

� Fugitive emissions from quarrying and mining operations - comprising mainly dust releases, 

with small amounts of NOx, CO, SO2, methane, CO2 being released during blasting 

operations. Currently there are no mines located near the proposed Otjikoto Gold Project. 

There may however be a few quarries in the region but this needs to be confirmed. Emissions 

from such small-scale quarry operations are likely to be very low and would result in negligible 

cumulative impacts. 

� Agriculture is a dominant land-use within the area surrounding the Otjikoto Gold Project. The 

farming activities in the area comprise mainly of cattle and other feedstock farming. Particulate 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-23 

matter is the main pollutant of concern from agricultural activities as particulate emissions are 

derived from windblown dust, burning crop residue, and dust entrainment as a result of 

vehicles travelling along dirt roads. In addition, pollen grains, mould spores and plant and 

insect parts from agricultural activities all contribute to the particulate load 6 . As far as can be 

ascertained, no chemicals are used for crop spraying. These chemicals typically result in 

odiferous emissions. Crop residue burning is an additional source of particulate emissions and 

other toxins. Due to the small scale of farming activities these are regarded to have an 

insignificant cumulative impact. 

� Biomass burning - aerosols, black carbon and hydrocarbons are associated with biomass 

burning. Biomass burning is also a significant source of greenhouse gases, especially CO2 

and methane (CH4), black carbon and photochemical gases (NOx, CO and hydrocarbons) that 

lead to the production of tropospheric ozone (O3). The extent of NOx emissions depend on 

combustion temperatures, with minor sulphur oxides being released. Burning crop residue 

may be a significant source of atmospheric emissions within the area. 

� Vehicle tailpipe emissions - significant primary pollutants emitted by motor vehicles include 

CO2, CO, hydrocarbons (HCs), SO2, NOx, particulate matter and lead. The main road 

between Otjiwarongo and Otavi are likely to make a minor contribution to the ambient air 

quality with in the vicinity of the Otjikoto Gold Project. 

4.5.4 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY STATUS QUO 

A dust monitoring network comprising of eight single dust fallout buckets and one PM10 minivol 

sampler was installed at the end of November 2010 and is still operational. The location of the dust 

fallout buckets and PM10 sampler are shown in Figure 4-11. 

Eight single dust fallout buckets (following the American Society for Testing and Materials standard 

method (ASTM D1739-98)) were purchased by the mine. One of the onsite personnel was trained in 

exchanging the dust fallout buckets. The buckets are exposed for a period of one month (30 days ±2 

days). The exposed buckets are rinsed out with de-ionised water and poured into plastic bottles that 

are couriered to the Analytical Laboratory in Windhoek for analysis. The results are reported to the 

mine on a monthly basis. 

The mine is renting a PM10 minivol sampler on a monthly basis. The sampler was installed at the 

mine in November 2010. On-site personnel were trained in exchanging the PM10 filters. The filters are 

collected and replaced every six days. The filters are marked and sealed within containers provided 

with a log sheet that is kept up to date (including the date and duration of sampling and the flow rate of 

the sampler). The filters are then couriered to the Airshed offices in South Africa where they are sent 

for analysis. 

6 World Health Organization, 2000 



4.5.4.1 Dust fallout for the Otjikoto Gold Project 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-24 

A total of eight dust buckets were located close to potential future sources of particulates such as the 

proposed unpaved roads, tailings dam, pit area and waste rock dump. In addition, some of the single 

dust buckets were located in close proximity to sensitive receptor areas located in close proximity to 

the proposed project site. 

The monitored dust fallout results for the period November 2010 to January 2012 are shown in table 

4-6. 

From the data collected over the 15 months, dust fallout rates were in general low and well below the 

South African National Standard (SANS) limit for residential areas of 600 mg/m²/day except during 

September 2011 at OM1 (831 mg/m²/day). This dust fallout unit is located to the east of the proposed 

mining operations. It is likely, that since such high dust fallout was only collected for one month, it was 

due to localised activities near OM1. 

In general, OM2, has the lowest dust fallout rates ranging between 7 and 91 mg/m²/day. This dust 

fallout unit is located next to the B2, away from main dust generating activities. 

Since August 2011 to January 2012, OM3 collected the highest dust fallout ranging between 130 to 

280 mg/m²/day. OM3 is located next to the entrance to the mine property and collected dust fallout is 

due to dust generation on the unpaved access roads associated with the on-site prospecting activities. 

A decrease at OM3 was observed during September and December 2011 which may be due to a 

decrease in on-site activities. However these results do not represent baseline for this location 

because of the influence of the on-site activities. 

OM8, located next to the weather station on-site, collected average dust fallout rates between 2 and 

298 mg/m²/day. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-25 

FIGURE 4-11: LOCATION OF THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT MONITORING NETWORK AND NEAREST POTENTIAL SENSITIVE RECEPTORS. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-26 

TABLE 4-6: DUST FALLOUT RATES FROM THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT MONITORING NETWORK (NOVEMBER 2010 TO JANUARY 2012). 

Bucket 

Number 

Dust fallout rate (mg/m²/day) 

Nov-10 Dec-10 Jan-11 Feb-11 Mar-11 Apr-11 May-11 Jun-11 Jul-11 Aug-11 Sep-11 Oct-11 Nov-11 Dec-11 Jan-12 

OM 01 137 57 18 18 42 60 11 N.D. N.D. 353 831 4 33 59 115 

OM 02 51 91 26 13 53 24 33 N.D. N.D. 35 11 7 75 9 75 

OM 03 320 168 7 22 44 29 66 N.D. N.D. 231 57 130 271 75 280 

OM 04 124 119 7 35 90 26 13 N.D. N.D. 2 60 22 9 37 29 

OM 05 104 102 13 18 190 16 9 N.D. N.D. 88 7 16 44 13 7 

OM 06 104 102 38 13 79 9 29 N.D. N.D. 15 37 121 95 20 209 

OM 07 27 563 27 22 73 38 9 N.D. N.D. 174 35 37 77 18 190 

OM 08 298 249 16 75 44 62 15 N.D. N.D. 2 115 146 112 59 227 

Note: N.D. – No data. 



4.5.4.2 PM10 results for the Otjikoto Gold Mine 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-27 

The position of the PM10 monitor in relation to the proposed project site is shown in Figure 4-11. The 

PM10 monitor is located at the on-site weather station, almost in the centre of the proposed mine area. 

Sampled daily PM10 results for the period 20 April to 12 October 2010 are shown in figure 4-12 with the 

averages shown in Table 5-1. Missing data from the first three months was due to technical problems with 

the latest data from October 2010 to January 2011 awaiting delivery and analysis. A total of 17 samples 

were analysed, resulting in a 53% data recovery. 

Measured PM10 daily concentrations are moderate in general, not exceeding the WHO_IT3 guideline. 

The more stringent WHO guideline was however exceeded on six occasions, mostly within the winter 

month of June. It should be noted however that the data record is very limited and the general 

background PM10 may be higher. 

FIGURE 4-12: PM10 AMBIENT CONCENTRATIONS FOR THE PERIOD 20 APRIL TO 12 OCTOBER 2011. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-28 

TABLE 4-7: DAILY PM10 CONCENTRATIONS AS MEASURED AT THE OTJIKOTO GOLD PROJECT. 

Filter description Date taken to field PM10 24-hour Concentrations (µg/m³) 

A26 not known 41.67 

A27 not known Damaged filter 


A29 not known Damaged filter 


A31 20/04/2011 10.58 

A32 27/04/2011 55.56 

A33 04/05/2011 69.44 

A34 11/05/2011 Damaged filter 

A35 18/05/2011 41.67 

A36 24/05/2011 27.78 

A37 01/06/2011 55.56 

A38 08/06/2011 55.56 


A40 22/06/2011 69.44 

A41 28/06/2011 13.89 

A42 06/07/2011 27.78 




A46 03/08/2011 13.89 


A48 17/08/2011 N.D. 

A49 24/08/2011 N.D. 

A50 30/08/2011 N.D. 

A51 05/09/2011 N.D. 

A52 11/09/2011 N.D. 

A53 17/09/2011 N.D. 

A54 23/09/2011 N.D. 

A55 29/09/2011 N.D. 

A56 05/10/2011 27.78 

A57 11/10/2011 41.67 

A58 17/10/2011 41.67 

Maximum 69.44 

Average 39.84 

Notes: N.D. – no data; 

WHO IT-3 guideline of 75 µg/m³ and Ambient Air Quality Guideline of 50 µg/m³ for highest daily 

average concentrations. 

WHO IT-3 guideline of 30 µg/m³ and Ambient Air Quality Guideline of 20 µg/m³ for annual 

average concentrations. 

4.5.5 SUMMARY 

The main findings from the air quality baseline characterisation are: 

� The prevailing wind field is from the east-south-east and east, with occasional airflow from the 

south-east, the north-east and the south-west. Wind speeds are generally low, with 68.5% of the 

time where wind speeds are below 2 m/s. Calm conditions (i.e. wind speeds of less than 1 m/s) 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-29 

occurred for 44% of the time. Strong winds (i.e. >5.4 m/s) required to lift and disperse particulates 

were recorded for 0.5% of the time. Data recovery for 2007and 2008 were poor but the last three 

years were good, ranging between 88% and 92%. 

� Annual rainfall trends indicate summer rainfall (November to February) and dry winter months 

(June and August). The total rainfall measured at the Otjikoto Gold Project site was318.2 mm in 

2009, 556.8 mm in 2010 and 652.4 mm in 2011. 

� Data from the Otjikoto Gold Project dust fallout monitoring network indicate dust fallout rates 

generally below the SANS residential limit of 600 mg/m²/day. The highest dust fallout collected 

was during September 2011 at OM1, exceeding the SANS residential limit. OM1 serves as a 

background unit and it is suspected that this was due to localised dust generating activities near 

the unit. On average, OM3 located next to the entrance to the mine property, collected the 

highest dust fallout and this is due to dust generation on the unpaved access roads. 

� The PM10 sampler located at the Otjikoto weather station recorded moderate PM10 

concentrations not exceeding the WHO-IT3 limit. The highest concentration measured was 69.4 

µg/m³ with an average of 39.8 µg/m³. The data retrieval is however poor at 53%. 

4.6 BIODIVERSITY 


Biological diversity is a term that was coined at the 1992 Earth summit in Rio de Janeiro. It can be 

described as the variability amongst living organisms from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial, 

marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexities of which they are a part; this 

includes diversity within species, between species and of ecosystems. 

To understand biodiversity one must appreciate all its components. Biodiversity includes: 

� Biodiversity patterns – the species of plants and animals and the different habitats in which they 

live. 

� Ecosystem processes – the complex interactions (events, reactions or operations) among biotic 

and abiotic elements of ecosystems that lead to a definite result. These processes include energy 

cycles, nutrient cycles, oxygen cycles and water cycles and fluxes (Wallace 2007). 

� Ecosystem services – the aspects of ecosystems utilised (actively or passively) to produce 

human wellbeing. Ecosystem services include ecosystem organisation or structure as well as 

processes/functions if they are utilised by humanity either directly or indirectly (Fisher et al., 

2009). 

This chapter consolidates the results from the vegetation, invertebrate, vertebrate and terrestrial ecology 

studies into one integrated chapter. The individual reports can be found in Appendix H. 



4.6.2 REGIONAL CONTEXT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-30 

The area falls within the semi-arid Thornbush Shrubland vegetation type of the Acacia Tree-and-shrub 

Savanna Biome. The area receives a mean annual rainfall of about 450 mm, with a coefficient of 

variation of about 30%, meaning that rainfall is fairly unpredictable. The mean annual evaporation rate is 

about 2,000 mm. The landscape is characterized by dense tree and bush savanna, dominated by Acacia 

species and annual and perennial grasses. Bush density and grass composition are largely determined 

by micro-habitat conditions and rangeland management practices. Throughout the focal areas the 

vegetation is dense (difficult to walk through) and highly bush-encroached. Between April 2007 and 

February 2008 a number of specialist studies were conducted. The findings and recommendations of 

each study are summarised below. Figure 4-13 summarises the findings of the specialist studies to date. 

4.6.3 VEGETATION 

Two site visits were conducted to investigate the flora of the proposed project area. The first one was 

carried out in April 2007 during the dry season focusing on the general vegetation of the area; while the 

second visit was conducted beginning of February 2008 after good rains had been received in the area 

investigating specifically geophytes which often are only be seen early in the rainy season. Vegetation in 

seasonally wet areas also varies with the degree of water logging. Many Namibian geophytes are under- 

collected and little-known, and they are very often neglected in studies such as these due to time 

constraints. 

The greater part of the project area falls within the Tree and Shrub savanna zone, which is listed as the 

dominant vegetation type in central Namibia. It is characterised predominantly by Acacia spp., including 

A. reficiens, A. hebeclada subsp. hebeclada, A. mellifera subsp. detinens, A. fleckii, A. erubescens and 

several others. Other common tree species include Philenoptera nelsii and Peltophorum africanum in 

sandy areas, Combretum apiculatum subsp. apiculatum on limestone and rocky outcrops, and Ziziphus 

mucronata in various habitats. In 1971 Giess first noted a tendency towards bush encroachment in the 

zone by A. mellifera subsp. detinens in particular. 

The specific area affected by the proposed mine includes two habitat types. On the farms Otjikoto and 

Gerhardshausen there is a large ephemeral pan surrounded by woody species, and the rest of the area is 

composed of thornbush thicket. The latter includes both sandy areas and calcrete-rocky areas, including 

a prominent ridge (see Figure 4-13). Vegetation differs considerably between the pan and the thicket, but 

the rocky and sandy areas of the thicket vegetation tend to grade into one another, with many species 

(particularly trees and shrubs) common to both. Vegetation in these zones is discussed in more detail in 

the sections below. 

Diversity was slightly higher in the thicket habitat (65 vs 61 species), although overall it was quite low, 

most probably due to the highly bush-encroached nature of the site. The riparian vegetation of the pan 

supports a slightly higher concentration of protected tree species. 



FIGURE 4-13: SUMMARY OF FINDINGS OF SPECIALIST STUDIES, JULY 2007 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-31 

In all, 107 plant species (including infraspecific taxa) were found on the Otjikoto study site (Appendix H 

provides the full plant species list including conservation status and voucher numbers). Sixty-two voucher 

specimens were collected and will be lodged at the National Herbarium in Windhoek. Appendix H lists the 

species that have been collected or recorded for the whole of the four quarter-degree squares within 

which the mine falls. No red data species have been recorded for the area. However, eight endemic, 

seven near-endemic and thirteen protected species appear in this list. Those of these that were observed 

in the project area during this visit are listed in table 4-8, with comments on their conservation status 

provided. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-32 

The species of most concern is Combretum imberbe, which is becoming threatened by illegal harvesting 

for charcoal and timber. The rest of the protected and endemic species are neither highly restricted nor 

very uncommon or rare where they occur. In fact most of them are common and widespread. 

It is highly likely that Aloe littoralis, a protected succulent, occurs on site even though it has not been 

recorded. 

TABLE 4-8: PROTECTED, ENDEMIC AND NEAR-ENDEMIC SPECIES THAT OCCUR ON THE OTJIKOTO 

PROJECT AREA. 

Species Status 

Occurrence 

Thicket Pan 

Comment 

Acacia erioloba Protected (Forestry Act) X X Very few seen, very wide 

(camel-thorn) 

distribution in Namibia 

Acrotome fleckii Endemic Annual, widespread, common 

Albizia anthelmintica Protected (Forestry Act) X Very few seen, reasonably wide 

(worm-cure albizia) 


Albuca rautanenii Endemic Reasonably widespread, rarely 

seen or collected due to 

ephemeral aerial parts but usually 

common where it is found 

Avonia dinteri Protected (Forestry Act) 

Boscia albitrunca Protected (Forestry Act) X Very few seen, very wide 

(Sheperd’s tree, 

witgat) 


Combretum imberbe Protected (Forestry Act) X Widespread, under increasing 

(Leadwood, 

threat in places due to 

omumborongbonga) 

uncontrolled harvesting for 

charcoal and other uses. Found 

here in the vicinity of the pan. 

Cyphostemma juttae Protected (Forestry Act), 

(Bastard cobas) near-endemic 

Cyphostemma uter Protected (Forestry Act), 

near-endemic 

Dactyliandra 

welwitschii 

Near-endemic 

Eragrostis 

omahekensis 

Endemic 

Eriospermum 

roseum 

Near-endemic Widespread, common 

Erythrina decora Protected (Forestry Act), 

(Namibkoraalboom) endemic 

Ficus cordata Thunb. 

subsp. Cordata 

(Namaqua fig) 

Protected (Forestry Act) 

Heteromorpha Endemic Related to Heteromorpha trifoliate 

papillosa 

(Parsley tree), occurs in Namibia 

as a shrub 

Hiernia angolensis Near-endemic X Widespread, common 

Indigofera 

hochstetteri Baker 

subsp. Streyana 

Endemic 

Lantana dinteri Near-endemic 

Leucas pechuelii Near-endemic X Widespread, common 



Species Status 

Maerua schinzii 

(Ringwood tree) 

Megalochlamys 

marlothii 

Ornithoglossum 

calcicola 

Peltophorum 

africanum 

(huilboom, 

muparara) 

Peltophorum 

africanum 

(Weeping wattle) 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Protected (Forestry Act) 

Near-endemic 

Occurrence 

Thicket Pan 

Comment 

Page 4-33 

Endemic Reasonably widespread, appears 

to be limited to calcareous 

substrates 

Protected (Forestry Act) X Very few seen, widespread in 

north of Namibia, common 

Protected (Forestry Act) Very few seen, reasonably wide 


Petalidium rautanenii Endemic 

Philenoptera nelsii Protected (Forestry Act) Very few seen, widespread and 

(appelblaar) 

common in Namibia 

Rennera eenii Endemic 

Stapelia schinzii Protected (Forestry Act), 

endemic 

Stigmatorhynchus 

hereroensis 

Endemic 

4.6.3.1 Thornbush Thicket 

This is, by far, the dominant habitat in the greater area as well as the area to be affected by the mine. It 

is predominantly characterised by Acacia spp., and a considerable part of the habitat is quite severely 

bush-encroached. Large woody species seen include Acacia erioloba, Philenoptera nelsii, Peltophorum 

africanum and Boscia albitrunca. All these occurred in very low numbers. Common shrubs included 

various Acacia species and Croton gratissimus var. subgratissimus, the latter particularly common in the 

calcrete areas. Characteristic herbs included Monechma divaricatum (figure 4-14), Leucas pechuelii, 

Seddera suffruticosa, Eriocephalus luederitzianus, Melhania virescens, Kalanchoe brachyloba and Felicia 

clavipilosa subsp. clavipilosa. Blepharis obmitrata (Figure 4-15) was characteristic of and common in the 

calcrete areas. 

FIGURE 4-14: MONECHMA DIVARICATUM IS COMMONLY FOUND UNDER TREES AND SHRUBS IN 

SANDY THICKET AREAS. 



FIGURE 4-15: BLEPHARIS OBMITRATA, CHARACTERISTIC OF THE CALCRETE ROCKY AREAS. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-34 

Although a number of protected tree species and three near-endemic species were present in this habitat 

they are all of quite wide distribution in Namibia and are present here in very low numbers. Within a 

restricted zone this habitat has already been heavily impacted by exploration tracks, however due to the 

lack of plant species of real conservation concern this is not considered to be a sensitive habitat in the 

project area. 

4.6.3.2 Ephemeral Pan 

The ephemeral pan, including the marginal vegetation, covers a relatively small proportion of the overall 

project area and will not be directly affected by the proposed mine development, but it accommodates a 

diverse species composition. It is characterised by a number of robust grasses, including Andropogon 

gayanus var. polycladus, Urochloa brachyura and Eragrostis superba as well as Leonotis ocymifolia var. 

schinzii (figure 4-16 and Figure 4-17). The pan margin is characterised by woody species such as 

Ziziphus mucronata, Combretum imberbe and Acacia spp. Several of these trees are protected species, 

as discussed later. 

FIGURE 4-16: THE PAN SOUTH OF THE GAME PROOF FENCE BETWEEN FARM OTJIKOTO AND FARM 

GERHARDSHAUSEN. 



FIGURE 4-17: LEONOTIS OCYMIFOLIA, CHARACTERISTIC OF THE PAN HABITAT. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-35 

This habitat is heavily grazed in the smaller, northern section where cattle are carried. On the farm 

Gerhardshausen, south of the game proof fence, it appears to be grazed very little and appears relatively 

pristine (figure 4-16). Further South the pan apparently has previously been used to grow crops (pers. 

Comm., A. Lombard). 

Several of the grasses that occur are very palatable grazing species (e.g. Urochloa brachyura, Eragrostis 

superba), potentially making this important pasture in an area that carries so much dense thicket. This 

notwithstanding, it appears that game farming predominates in the pan habitat, and most game are 

browsers or facultative browsers, and not critically dependent on grazing from the pan habitat. 

Due to the lack of species of conservation concern, this habitat cannot be regarded as carrying any 

sensitive vegetation. However, pans in general carry other species when they are wet, and at that time 

they are also an important resource for migrating birds, wild mammals and invertebrates. 

4.6.3.3 Summary 

There are no plant species of sufficient conservation concern in any of the above habitats and due to the 

relatively low sensitivity of the vegetation present no special mitigation measures are necessary. A permit 

should be obtained from the Directorate of Forestry for removal/destruction of the protected tree species. 

4.6.4 AMPHIBIANS, REPTILES AND MAMMALS 

The specialist report is based on available information, own experience and knowledge and field work 

conducted during 3 to 10 April 2007. 

An annotated checklist of amphibians, reptiles and mammals occurring within the project area is included 

in Appendix H. Fourteen (14) species of amphibians, seventy-eight (78) species of reptiles and seventy- 

eight (78) species of mammals are known or expected to occur within the project area. To a greater or 

lesser extent, most of these species can be expected to interface with the proposed mine. 



4.6.4.1 Amphibians 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-36 

Since there is a lack of permanent free water in the region, this frog fauna (of 14 species) is adapted to 

opportunistic breeding in temporary pans and rainwater pools. These breeding opportunities exist, more 

or less uniformly throughout the project area, with a large population expected to be at the large pan to 

the east of the proposed mining site. Therefore, the loss of breeding habitat and living habitat would be 

expected to be limited to the actual footprint of the mine development, which represents only a small 

proportion of the project area and a very small proportion of the national habitats available for each of 

those species. 

The only species of conservation concern is the Spotted Rubber Frog (Phrynomatis affinis) (figure 4-18). 

Although this species undoubtedly occurs in the project area, the population in this area would be 

relatively small in comparison to the national range. The loss of this species on the footprint as well as in 

the extended mine area (worst case scenario) would not have a significant impact on this species' 

national conservation status. 

FIGURE 4-18: SPOTTED RUBBER FROG (PHRYNOMATIS AFFINIS). 

The Dombe Dwarf Toad (Bufo dombensis) is a Namibian endemic and is not expected to be unduly 

influenced by the development of this project. 

4.6.4.2 Reptiles 

The seventy-eight (78) species of reptiles expected to occur in the wider project area, can also be 

expected to occur throughout the immediate mine footprint. However, as the footprint is a very small 

proportion of the wider project area, which is itself a minor proportion of the various species' national 

ranges, the reptile fauna should not be affected enough to alter the national conservation status of any 

species. Four species of reptiles are Protected Game under the Nature Conservation Ordinance no. 4 of 

1975, as follows: 

� Leopard Tortoise (Geochelone pardalis), 

� Kalahari Tent Tortoise (Psammobates oculiferus), 

� Veld Leguaan (Varanus albigularis) (figure 4-19), and 

� Southern African Python (Python natalis) (figure 4-19). 



FIGURE 4-19: VELD LEGUAAN AND SOUTHERN AFRICAN PYTHON. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-37 

The Namibian Dwarf Gecko (Lygodactylus bradfieldi), Western Whip Snake (Psammophis trigrammus), 

Leopard Whip Snake (Psammophis leopardinus) and the Zebra Snake (Naja nigricincta) are Namibian 

endemics. During a survey in 2011, two Kalahari purple-glossed snakes (Amblyodipsas ventrimaculata) 

were observed on the calcrete ridge west of the Otjikoto pan; one specimen was collected and sent to Dr 

Graham Alexander (Wits University) for identification and will be deposited at the Transvaal Museum as a 

voucher. This species was previously listed as potentially occurring marginally in the area, so finding two 

specimens within a few metres of each other may be of some significance. 7 

However, overall, reptiles are not expected to be unduly influenced by the development of this project, as 

significant populations occur outside the project area. 

4.6.4.3 Mammals 

The seventy-eight (78) species of mammals expected to occur within the immediate mine footprint can 

also be expected to occur throughout the wider project area. As the footprint is a very small proportion of 

the wider mine area, which is itself a minor proportion of the various species' national ranges, the 

mammal fauna should not be affected enough, under any circumstances, to alter the national 

conservation status of any species. Sixteen (16) species of mammals are listed as Protected Game 

under the Nature Conservation Ordnance no. 4 of 1975 (see figure 4-20): 

� Aardwolf (Proteles cristatus), 

� Bat-eared Fox (Otocyon megalotis), 

� Cape Fox (Vulpes chama), 

� Leopard (Panthera pardus), 

� Cheetah (Acinonyx jubatus), 

� Honey Badger (Mellivora capensis), 

� Aardvark (Orycteropus afer), 

� Pangolin (Manis temminckii), 

� Hedgehog (Atelerix frontalis), 

� Bushbaby (Galago moholi), 

� Damara Dik-Dik (Madoqua damarensis), 

7 Report prepared for A. Speiser Environmental Consultants cc. 



� Blue Wildebeest (Connochaetes taurinus), 

� Duiker (Sylvicapra grimmia), 

� Red Hartebeest (Alcelaphus buselaphus), 

� Steenbok (Raphicerus campestris), and 

� Eland (Tragelaphus oryx) 

No Namibian endemic mammals occur in the project area. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-38 

FIGURE 4-20: AARDWOLF (PROTELES CRISTATUS), HONEY BADGER (MELLIVORA CAPENSIS), CAPE 

FOX (VULPES CHAMA) AND CHEETAH (ACINONYX JUBATUS). 

The project area encompasses a large section of land within what is considered the core area of the 

Namibian cheetah population - which is the largest population of cheetah in the world. As proposed, the 

mine as such will disrupt the home ranges of only a few animals. 


Fourteen (14) species of amphibians, seventy-eight (78) species of reptiles and seventy-eight (78) 

species of indigenous Namibian mammals are expected to interface with the Otjikoto Gold Mine project. 

No species are expected to be affected to the extent that their regional or national conservation status will 

be degraded. 

4.6.5 ENTOMOLOGY 

Insects are the dominant life form (54% of all living organisms) in almost all parts of the Namibian 

territory, and their taxonomic and ecological diversity require consideration of a wide range of 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-39 

environmental conditions 8 . Due to the small size of insect individuals and their complex life cycles, which 

may require very specific conditions and an almost stationary way of life, any profile of insect population 

needs to be considered at both micro and macro environmental levels 9 . The area was evaluated with 

these aspects in mind. The investigation was therefore designed to provide a working profile of the 

insects occurring in the area, as very little information on this fauna was available. The study did not aim 

to provide a comprehensive account of all resident insect species, or to delineate the probable ecological 

effect of mining operations on particular insect communities. Both the latter experimental designs would 

have necessitated longer-term studies, and the relevancy of such studies in the particular area is 

doubtful. The entomological faunistic profile was then evaluated to provide environmental management 

recommendations. 

The study was approached as follows: 

� Review of published reports, maps, and other relevant information; 

� Consultation of published and unpublished databases providing distribution records of Namibian 

insects, with specific reference to endemic and rare species; 

� Site visit and environmental examination; 

� Deployment of traps and sampling regimes for rapid assessment of specific faunal elements; 

� Gathering of species-specific information where necessary, e.g. range, host, or habitat profiles. 

A rapid assessment procedural framework 10 , adapted to the time frame for the study, was adopted for a 

field survey (04-06 May 2007) 11 and definitive identification of all the material has not been carried out. 

All material collected during the course of this investigation were deposited in the collections of the 

National Museum of Namibia for future reference. 

4.6.5.1 Potential Sensitive Communities 

Well-known ecological groups were selected as possible indicators to determine whether areas sensitive 

to disturbance may occur. The groups were selected for known, relevant habitat or ecological specificity 

and where taxonomical information for the majority of taxa would be readily available. Unusual results or 

patterns would suggest that more intensive sampling, potentially combined with ecological 

experimentation, may have been needed to clarify potential environmental impacts. 

8 May, R.M. 1978.The dynamics and diversity of insect faunas. 188 - 204. In Mound, L.A. & Waloff, N. 

Diversity of insect faunas. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford. 

9 Samways, M.J. 1993. A spatial and process sub-regional framework for insect and biodiversity 

conservation research and management. In Gaston, K.J., New, T.R. & Samways, M.J. Perspectives on 

insect conservation. Intercept, Andover. 

10 Magurran, A.E. 2004.Measuring biological diversity. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford. 

10Sutherland, W.J. 2000. The Conservation Handbook: Research, Management and Policy. Blackwell 

Science, Oxford. 

11 Sutherland, W.J. 2000. The Conservation Handbook: Research, Management and Policy. Blackwell 




Soil Organisms 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-40 

Various tropical soil taxa are highly evolved in savannas and are essential for the maintenance of 

productivity in these soils, whether for aeration, drainage, nutrient recycling, etc. Some of these are 

occasionally restricted to very small distributional ranges, though then the ranges are usually defined by 

specific barriers such as drainage systems or linear rock outcrops, vegetation, or geological weathering. 

No such barriers can be defined in the project area. In Namibia, likely taxa for attention include 

saprophytic organisms such as dung beetles (Scarabaeidae); detritivores such as darkling beetles 

(Tenebrionidae) and termites; as well as a range of predators such as ants (Formicidae) and ground 

beetles (Carabidae). 

In no places did the thin sand cover seem deep enough to host a unique psammophilous fauna. Areas 

covered with sand are therefore unlikely to harbour any species whose survival may be directly or 

indirectly threatened. 

In exposed clay depressions, the deep cracks forming during the dry season provides a refuge for some 

very interesting beetles (Carabidae, Scarabaeidae) that are relatively rare in Namibia due to the 

dominance of sandy soils throughout the country. It can be expected that a number of Namibian 

endemics will occur or may be discovered in the project area. However, these clayey soils are 

widespread in the southern part of the Grootfontein district and eastern parts of the Outjo district. Thus it 

is extremely unlikely that the proposed mining area will have any significant impact on such potential 

endemics. 

Herbivorous Insects 

Savanna biomes are dominated by trees (phanerophytes), and to a lesser degree annuals (therophytes), 

i.e. herbs and grasses12. Herbivore and saprophytic (to break down woody material) insect taxa, 

together with their associated predators and parasites, can therefore be expected to be dominant groups 

in savanna ecosystems. Indicator organisms, though highly diverse and specific, are not suitable for 

evaluating broad ecological processes in large ecosystems 13 . When assessing the conservation status of 

large ecosystems it is therefore more productive to prioritize ecological processes by evaluating keystone 

taxa 14 . Considering that it was the end of the wet season, the study did evaluate some taxa such as 

butterflies (host-specific herbivores), moths (host specific herbivores), jewel beetles (saprophytic), and 

micro bee-flies (pollinator), combined with general observations on vegetation. The primary goal was to 

search for unexpected organisms, or vegetation units that are atypical for fine-leaved savanna, as such 

organisms may indicate unusual ecological conditions. Insect sampling included yellow pan traps (for 

Buprestidae [jewel beetles]; Mythocomyidae [micro-bee flies]; Tephritidae [fruit flies]); light traps (for 

12 Scholes, R.J. 1997. Savanna, pp. 258-277. In: Cowling, R.M., Richardson, D.M. & Pierce, S.M. 

Vegetation of southern Africa. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 

13 Magurran, A.E. 2004.Measuring biological diversity. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford. 

14 Sutherland, W.J. 2000. The Conservation Handbook: Research, Management and Policy. Blackwell 




SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-41 

moths; Cerambycidae [longhorn beetles]); transects (for butterflies), examining social spider Stegodyphus 

nests and more general observations. 

No unusual vegetation or taxa were observed. The project area is unlikely to host any species whose 

survival may be directly or indirectly threatened. 

Saprophytic Insects 

Saprophytic taxa that are primarily associated with the decomposition of wood in savanna ecosystems, 

with particular reference to longhorn beetles (Cerambycidae), shothole borers (Bostrychidae), and click 

beetles (Elateridae), were considered under the previous section. However, since the diversity of larger 

herbivores, with specific reference to game animals and cattle, are a renowned feature of African 

savannas, and the saprophytic insects ensuring the decomposition and recycling of their dung, e.g. dung 

beetles (Scarabaeidae) and termites (Isoptera), are particularly important for the maintenance of soil 

fertility in savanna ecosystems, they were also considered as a primary group for evaluating the potential 

impact of the proposed development. However, the movement of large game is severely restricted. The 

area is primarily farmland with cattle being the dominant mammalian herbivores, though some free- 

ranging game species, e.g. kudu, and a fenced area with more exotic game also occur. Unfortunately it 

was too late in the season to make direct observations about dung beetle diversity. For example, over 

two nights only 11 specimens of two taxa of Aphodiinae (miniature dung chafers) were recorded at light. 

However, the single collecting record at the National Museum for the Otjikoto area, in December 1999, 

indicated that large numbers of dung beetles were recorded, with at least 3 species of Heliocopris, 2 

species of Scarabaeus, and numerous Onthophagus, Aphodiinae, and other smaller Scarabaeinae. 

Given the relatively low diversity of game, the 1999 National Museum record of dung beetle diversity is 

probably a good reflection of what can be expected. 

It is unlikely that the area will harbour saprophytic communities of special conservation interest or 

concern. 

Semi-aquatic and Aquatic Taxa 

Only ubiquitous aquatic fauna can be expected due to the lack of natural open water, which was 

confirmed through light trapping and examination of farm dams, drinking troughs, and spill-over pools.15 

Primary aquatic orders such as Plecoptera, Trichoptera and Odonata are mainly absent, except for some 

wide-spread and vagile elements of the latter two orders16. During the rainy season, temporary pools 

forming in shallow clay pits would result in rapid population build-ups of some species, with specific 

reference to Culicidae (mosquitoes), Tabanidae (horse-flies), and other biting and nuisance flies. 

15 Suhling, F & Martens, A. 2007.Dragonflies and damselflies of Namibia. Gamsberg Macmillan, 

Windhoek. 

16 Mey, W. 2001. Observations of the caddisfly fauna (Insecta: Trichoptera) of three perennial rivers in 

northern Namibia. Cimbebasia 17: 229-236. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-42 

Surprisingly at least three species of Lampyridae (firefly-beetles) arrived at light traps. The unexpected 

occurrence of so many firefly species (only one species is formally recorded for Namibia) does not 

indicate unique environmental attributes, but rather the poor state of general knowledge about Namibia’s 

insect fauna. It was, however, significant that all Lampyridae morphospecies were most common at the 

edge (20.01565�S 17.11255�E) of a large natural pan. Aerial and topographic maps confirmed that 

natural pans such as these are very rare in the wider area, thus these pans forms ‘islands’ of open 

vegetation, covered with dense perennial grasses of various life-forms, tree species such as Acacia 

hebeclada, and probably containing extensive shallow water areas during the rainy season. The study 

did not allow closer examination of the fauna of this pan as it is not directly affected by the proposed 

mining development, though judging from the ant species observed on the pan surface, and the diversity 

of species arriving at the light, the pan is considered to be the most unique habitat in the area. 

Some of the pan fauna are likely to occur or may spread into newly debushed areas, e.g. note that 

Lampyridae were found at least 12 km away. Lampyridae are predatory beetles, and though their larvae 

require semi-aquatic conditions, the adult males may range quite widely in search of mating partners or 

food. It is extremely unlikely, however, that the full diversity of pan species will be found elsewhere, either 

as a species complex or as individual components in other species complexes, as the unique set of 

environmental conditions found at the pan are unlikely to be duplicated elsewhere. 

4.6.5.2 Further Field Collection 

The bycatch in the subsequent fieldwork by EduVenture supplemented the above data (for methods, see 

Appendix H). The sample was dominated by a single huge collection of >1000 Collembola. Collembolans 

are not normally abundant in Namibia, but can experience population explosions under favourable 

conditions. The abundant rain during the collecting period probably provided the trigger for this unusual 

event. Collembola are not expected to be a significant component of the fauna at the project area during 

normal years. 

The bulk of the catch was made up by a few very common species, and there were many uncommon 

species, indicative of a complex, thriving community. The pugnacious ant, Anoplolepis sp., made up 

almost half of collected specimens. Other particular common taxa were other ants, Alydidae bugs, 

weevils, crickets and aphodiine dung beetles. Besides the Collembola, 1467 insect specimens were 

collected, comprising 12 orders and at least 51 families. 

No species were found that were of particular vulnerability or uniqueness. Most recorded taxa are 

widespread in northern Namibia. Some of the Adesmiines, as well as the Gryllacridids, are typical of the 

Otavi Mountainland. Their presence at Otjikoto is probably restricted to the hill on Otjikoto, which has 

biogeographical affinities with the Otavi Mountains further north. Contrary to expected, collection at the 

waterlogged pan did not deliver any fauna of special interest. 




SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-43 

The general area in which the proposed development will take place is likely to contain some endemic 

and rare species, though none have been definitively recorded. The possible presence of endemic or 

rare taxa does not indicate ecological sensitivity. Only the insect community at the pan (20.01565�S 

17.11255�E) may be wholly unique for the area. No endangered insect species are presently known to 

occur in the project area. 

At present only a few established alien insects occur. Undoubtedly cosmopolitan, anthropophilous alien 

insects will become established together with the development activity, and can only be excluded through 

extraordinary measures. At this stage no alien insect species are known that should be excluded through 

strict quarantine or other managerial steps. Once mining activities cease and the area is rehabilitated, 

any established alien insects will either die out or will be absorbed into the overall community structure, 

probably without undue effect on ecological processes. If particular alien insect species need to be 

excluded or controlled in future, government departments responsible for such control are responsible to 

inform stakeholders. 

The intended sites for major disturbance (open pit, plant area, etc.) are all situated on savanna plain 

habitat, which is considered to be of low sensitivity for insect communities. 

At present only the natural pan to the east of the proposed mining site, its northern end at 20.0156�S 

17.1125�E, is identified as being of medium sensitivity for insect communities. 

4.6.6 ARACHNIDA 

This specialist report was compiled using existing publications and lists (where possible) of the main 

arachnofauna components of the Thornbush Savanna. The value of the Thornbush Savanna for arachnid 

diversity and threats were evaluated. Endemic species were identified and individual species were 

evaluated for their potential importance. Further collecting records in the vicinity of the proposed mining 

area were evaluated from the respective Natural History collection databases of the National Museum of 

Namibia. This method was used to: 

� form an idea what baseline data, if any, already exists for the area; and 

� if possible, to narrow down the list of Thornbush Savanna species to potential species to be 

found on the actual proposed mining area and immediate vicinity. Unfortunately these databases 

do not give an accurate view of an area’s collecting history neither do they have the same level of 

reliance as data from publications. However, they provide a good indication of the level of data 

existing from the area. 

The following protocol was followed: Farms with a radius of 25km from the proposed mining site were 

selected, and all data from that area was extracted from the databases. All farms selected fall within the 

Thornbush Savanna, and are relatively homogenous concerning elevation (1300-1700 m) and geology 

(with two main substrate types namely sand and calcrete to the west and schist and dolomite to the east). 



Appendix H of the specialist report provides the findings of the literature research. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-44 

Little information is still available for Namibia’s arachnofauna. Especially the smaller arachnid orders 

occurring in Namibia – pseudoscorpions (Pseudoscorpiones), harvestmen (Opiliones) and whipscorpions 

(Amblypygi) – are not well studied and collected and where information does exist it is too patchy for any 

comparative and evaluative purposes. The study therefore focused mainly on the arachnid groups best 

studied in Namibia, namely the spiders (Araneae), scorpions (Scorpiones) and solifugids (Solifugae). 

For the database searches, the smaller orders as well as the Myriapoda (centipedes and millipedes) and 

aquatic invertebrate databases were also incorporated. (Although not closely related to arachnids, the 

myriapods and aquatic invertebrates are curated together with the arachnology collections, hence their 

inclusion here). 

For spiders and solifugids, vegetation provides the substrate on and under which they hide and hunt and 

the suitable microclimates for their survival. In addition, vegetation provides the structures on which 

spiders build their webs and retreats. There is thus a high correlation between the vegetation type of an 

area and the spiders and solifugids found in the area. Likewise, the scorpion fauna of an area is 

intricately associated with its geology and geological substrate, the latter which also influences 

vegetation. Vegetation type is thus commonly used as an indication of species expected to occur in an 

area. 17 The proposed mining site can be classed as thornbush thicket, falling within the Thornbush 

Savanna 18 . 

4.6.6.1 Findings of Spiders, Scorpions and Solifugids 

Data currently available indicates that the Thornbush Savanna vegetation type is not exceptional - neither 

in its species diversity nor endemism of the arachnofauna (see table 4-9). Although areas are threatened 

by bush-encroachment and/or intense agricultural pressures, it is not under large scale threat of 

development projects. There is still sufficient habitat left to serve as species refugia. 

TABLE 4-9: SPIDER, SCORPION AND SOLIFUGID DIVERSITY OF THE THORNBUSH SAVANNA IN 

RELATION TO THEIR NAMIBIAN DIVERSITY. 

Spiders 1 Scorpions 2 Solifugids 1 

Namibia 587 85 127 

Thornbush Savanna 36 0 14 

% of Namibian fauna 5 0 6 

1 Griffin (1998) 

2 National scorpion collection database; Prendini (unpublished data) 

Note: Thornbush Savanna covers 5% of Namibia’s land surface. 

17 Griffin, E. & Dippenaar-Schoeman, A.S. 1991.A checklist of, and references to, the Namibian sppider 

fauna (Arachnida, Araneae). Cimbebasia 13: 115-183. 

18 Giess, W. 1971, 1998.A preliminary vegetation map of Namibia Dinteria 4. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-45 

The vegetation of the proposed mining site is relatively homogenous (C. Mannheimer, pers. comm.). 

Except for the pan to the east of the site, there are no geographic features, e.g. mountains, which could 

provide for a diversity of habitats. The area is not pristine (C. Mannheimer, pers. comm.) with quite a high 

level of bush encroachment. Sensitive or extreme habitat specific species are thus already expected to 

be locally extinct. 

Except for six (6) records (all spiders, collected in 1973, Otjikoto) (see figure 4-21; the blue star indicates 

the collecting locality) no data concerning the non-acarine arachnids, myriapods and aquatic 

invertebrates exists for the area with a 25 km radius from the proposed mining site. 

FIGURE 4-21: FINDINGS OF ARACHNIDA RECORDS FROM LITERATURE RESEARCH 

4.6.6.2 Field Collection 

EduVentures conducted a brief baseline study of arachnids during February 2008 (see full report in 

Appendix H). The survey focused on arachnids, but there was a large insect by-catch, reported above. 

Five collecting methods were employed at each of four different study sites. 

Approximately 2800 invertebrate specimens were collected in total: 317 arachnid specimens comprising 

27 families and 66 species, 30 myriapod specimens comprising two orders, eight and two specimens of 

crustaceans and molluscs respectively with one species each. 

Although a relative large diversity in spiders was found (66 species), these are mostly groups expected in 

a savannah. Only a few were abundant, and the occurrence of numerous uncommon species is indicative 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-46 

of a thriving community. The most common ground dwelling spiders were the Gnaphosidae (mouse 

spiders) while the most common plant dwelling spiders were the Oxypidae (lynx spiders). The 

Gnaphosidae, Salticidae and Thomisidae were the most diverse groups. At least one species, Palfuria sp. 

(Zodariidae), are not known from the area and is likely to be an undescribed species. Some species 

recorded from the site are relatively widespread in Namibia, but contains listed species in other southern 

African countries. An example is the baboon spiders (Theraphosidae) which have the potential to become 

vulnerable due to them being slow breeders highly susceptible to disturbance (once removed from 

burrow, mortality is near 100%). Other common large species that were collected were huntsman spiders, 

Sparassidae. Six scorpion species were collected, all being relatively common and widespread species. 

No solifuge males, necessary to identify to species or sometimes to genera or family, were collected, so 

further interpretation other than four species collected, is not possible. 


From the data currently available for the groups discussed here it seems unlikely that there would be 

species at the proposed direct mining site and immediate vicinity that would be identified as of particular 

vulnerability or uniqueness. 

4.6.7 PAN INVERTEBRATE SPECIALIST STUDY 

The above studies of invertebrates of the Otjikoto site indicated the need for a more focussed survey of 

the pan and its immediate surrounds, specifically to assess the significance of the pan for aquatic 

invertebrates and to investigate the possibility that unique communities of ants and scorpions might 

inhabit the pan and its fringes. 

A brief survey of the pan and surrounding areas was carried out by Peter Hawkes & Jonathan Fisher 

(AfriBugs CC) from 21-23 June 2011, approximately six weeks after the end of one of the wettest rainy 

seasons in recorded history. The pan and surrounding areas at Otjikoto were searched for 1) evidence 

that the pan might be of significance for aquatic invertebrates, 2) scorpion species and 3) ant species. 

Approximately equal amounts of time were spent searching the central pan area, the pan surroundings 

and the calcrete outcrops to the west of the pan; during these searches, representatives of as many ant 

species as possible were collected; these were later identified as far as possible using currently available 

identification keys. Surveys for scorpions were focussed mainly on searching for specimens of or habitat 

suitable for the very restricted bothriurid species Lisposoma josehermana, which was previously recorded 

in the general vicinity of the Otjikoto site. A summary of the findings are included below with further detail 

available in the specialist report in Appendix H. 

In general, the central pan area was very dry and dusty and no surface water was found anywhere on the 

Otjikoto site, despite the very heavy rains that had occurred during the previous few months; even digging 

into the soil at depths of close to one metre in the entrances to warthog burrows within the central portion 

of the pan area did not reveal soil that was more than slightly damp. Excavation (to a depth of about 30 

cm) of a Camponotus mayri nest in more wooded vegetation about 900 metres north of this area (but well 

within the pan boundaries) again indicated that no significant soil moisture remained, confirming that 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-47 

infiltration rates are fairly high and especially in years of normal to low rainfall, the pan cannot be 

expected to be more than ephemeral in nature. In the past, the area was used for crop production and the 

central pan area should now be considered transformed and of low conservation value. 

Observations of the site and information provided on the farm’s history, suggested that the central pan 

area had been cleared of trees and most shrubs and bushes through many years of ploughing and maize 

cultivation. The low vegetation diversity and depauperate ant community (characterised by domination by 

a few species favoured by disturbance) tended to support this viewpoint and the conclusion that the pan 

might be of lower, rather than higher, conservation significance than its surroundings. 

However, inspection of satellite imagery, supported by analysis of elevation data, indicates that while the 

central portion of the Otjikoto pan does show residual linear disturbance indicative of cultivation, the 

depression within which this area lies is far greater in extent than the previously cultivated portion and 

that there are several other pans in the region with similarly treeless central portions. In only one of these 

other pans (and only in one section of the treeless portion) was there visible evidence of ploughing. In 

each case the central treeless portion is approximately equivalent to the modelled deepest region of the 

pan (bearing in mind the limitations of the accuracy of the SRTM dataset), leading to the conclusion that 

the treeless nature of these areas is most likely a natural consequence of frequent water-logging of the 

soil leading to the death of any trees that might otherwise have established. The presence of disturbance- 

resistant ant species and a reduced ant and plant diversity in the central pan region at Otjikoto may thus 

also be at least in part a natural result of frequent flooding and this argues against considering the central 

pan as transformed and of low conservation value. The central pan portion was thus probably chosen for 

cultivation because of its treeless nature (in conjunction with naturally higher water levels), rather than the 

lack of trees being a consequence of agricultural practices; the pan depression as a whole (covering 

some 8 times the area of the cultivated portion) is unlikely to have been artificially created. 

Cultivation has however almost certainly contributed to further lowering of ant and plant diversity and 

increased dominance by disturbance-resistant species in the Otjikoto pan; this view is supported by the 

apparently higher structural diversity of the plant communities in the central pan areas (at Otjikoto as well 

as at the neighbouring pan areas) that do not show evidence of ploughing. The logical conclusion is thus 

that while lower plant and ant community diversity (and hence most likely lower diversity of many other 

taxa) within the central pan areas is natural, it has been exaggerated at Otjikoto by disturbance from 

cultivation and this pan is probably less natural and at present of lower conservation value than its 

neighbouring counterparts. The normal disturbance patterns in the pan areas and the consequent non- 

climax form of the natural plant and animal communities inhabiting them will however most likely favour a 

fairly rapid return to the natural state if cultivation is ceased and natural rehabilitation allowed. 

The presence of several pans with similar characteristics and probably a very similar invertebrate fauna 

within distances of 10-30 km of the Otjikoto site indicates that the habitat type is not unique in the region 

and thus the pan at Otjikoto probably does not represent a highly conservation-significant habitat for 

terrestrial or aquatic invertebrates. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-48 

In conclusion, the Otjikoto pan, while partially transformed by agriculture, is clearly of natural origin and 

represents a habitat type that is relatively rare in the region. It is also likely to return to its equilibrium 

state fairly rapidly in comparison to other habitats in arid environments, and it is therefore recommended 

that this portion of the site be preserved and allowed to rehabilitate naturally. 

The high permeability of the soils in the Otjikoto pan areas, as evidenced by the rapid drying out of the 

pan even during a period of cool weather, suggest that transmission of surface contaminants to the 

ground water would be rapid, and it must be recommended that great care is taken to prevent any 

possible contamination of the environment especially in the vicinity of the pan. 

4.6.8 AVIFAUNA 

The area falls within the semi-arid Thornbush Shrubland vegetation type of the Acacia Tree-and-shrub 

Savanna Biome, which is characterised by fairly unpredictable and erratic rainfall pattern. Because of the 

semi-arid character and variable rainfall, many bird species found in the project area (as in other parts of 

Namibia) are highly nomadic, moving from place to place in search of appropriate conditions. This differs 

from migratory species that undertake fixed annual movements, usually from north of the equator to the 

southern hemisphere and back. Nomadic species by contrast generally remain within Namibia or 

adjacent parts of the southern African subregion, but move around widely and in no fixed pattern, to 

exploit patchy and unpredictable food, water and other ecosystem resources. Thus a number of nomadic 

species that occur in the area may not be present at certain times of the year or in some years, and their 

abundance may differ dramatically over time. 

4.6.8.1 Methods 

The study consisted of two parts, first a desk study to: 

� Determine which bird species are known and likely to occur in the focal area 

� Identify endemic and Red Data species occurring in the area 

� List migrating species recorded in the area 

� Identify any likely important habitats and sites special to birds from aerial photographs 

� Check whether there are any likely critical factors from the avifaunal perspective likely to 

jeopardize the Project and that may require further investigation and/or assessment. 

This desk study draws on (a) the National Avifaunal database that holds all available information from the 

national bird atlas project, road counts, breeding records and all museum specimens, (b) published 

information in both research publications and reports, and (c) Dr. Ch. Brown has over 25 years of 

experience of working on birds in Namibia. 

The second part of the study consisted of a short field visit to the project site to: 

� gather general bird sightings across the area, to strengthen the existing list and ensure that no 

key species had been overlooked; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-49 

� search likely areas for nest sites of Whitebacked and Lappetfaced Vultures and Tawny, 

Wahlberg’s, Martial and Bateleur Eagles; and 

� check that there are no important microhabitats for birds that have not shown up clearly on the 

aerial photographs, including the pan on the southeastern side of the farm Otjikoto, depressions 

and drainage lines. 

The project area was systematically covered by vehicle and on foot. A total of some 86 km was travelled 

in, and around the periphery of the project area. Particular attention was paid to the proposed pit area, as 

well as to the possible tailings and plant sites as provided in 2007. 

A vantage point from a low ridge on the southern boundary of the farm Otjikoto was used to find the 

locations of higher copses of trees above the bush thicket (see Figure 6.26). These groups of larger trees 

could be potential breeding sites for red data birds that were highlighted in the desk study as requiring 

field verification. Each of these locations were visited and checked for nests. The results are presented 

below. 

North west view North view North east view 

Thicket of Acacia melifera Clump of larger Acacia trees 

FIGURE 4-22: VIEW FROM A RIDGE OVER THE PROJECT AREA FROM NORTH-WEST TO NORTH- 

EAST, THICKETS OF ACACIA MELIFERA – SUCH BUSH THICKETS DOMINATE IN THE AREA, WITH A 

FEW COPSES OF TALLER TREES – MAINLY ACACIA REFICIENS AND TERMINALIA PRUNOIDES THE 

LAST BEING FAVOURED NESTING TREES OF VULTURES. 



4.6.8.2 Bird Diversity of the Project Area 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-50 

A total of 127 bird species were recorded in the avifaunal database for the two ¼ degree squares across 

which the project area falls. During the field visit, a total of 66 species was recorded, 14 of which were 

new for the focal squares, bringing to 141 the recorded bird diversity of the area (see Appendix H). 

These records were derived from some 26 visits to the respective squares. They represent about 70% of 

the total number of species that would be expected in that area. It is mainly the uncommon and rare 

species that are not listed. 

Thirteen species are Palaearctic migrants and ten are intra-African migrants, all visiting Namibia during 

the summer months. None of the Palaearctic species breed in Namibia. They mostly move around in 

nomadic fashion in search of good foraging areas, often following rainfall events. All intra-African 

migrants, but one, breed in Namibia (the exception being Abdim’s Stork). Yellowbilled Kites have been 

recorded breeding only in northern Namibia, the cuckoos are all parasitic and lay in other birds’ nests, 

and the nightjars are all ground breeders. All these species have large widespread populations and their 

conservation status will not be significantly impacted by habitat loss as a result of an open pit mine and 

related infrastructure. The one possible exception is Wahlberg’s Eagle which, though not on the Red 

Data list, has shown significant declines in Namibia and South Africa in recent years. The status of this 

tree-nesting species in the project area was checked during the field visit, with specific reference to 

nesting there. 

4.6.8.3 Endemic and Red Data Species 

No birds endemic to Namibia were recorded within the proposed project area, nor are any expected to 

occur there. Thirty-five (35) birds endemic to the southern African (sA) subregion were recorded (sA 

endemics in table, see Appendix 8). The conservation status of these species is considered to be 

“secure”, i.e. not threatened in any way. 

The Red Data listing is an approach based on probabilities of extinction. Six Red Data species have 

been recorded in the project area. All are birds of prey and they are listed below: 

� Booted Eagel; 

� Whitebacked Vulture; 

� Lappetfaced Vulture; 

� Tawny Eagle; 

� Martial Eagle; and 

� Bateleur. 

4.6.8.4 Field Findings 

The proposed open pit mining area, the likely tailings site and that of the plant facilities, as well as the 

larger surrounding area are all fairly uniform, bush thicket with a few copses of larger trees rising about 

the surrounding bush. There is little habitat diversity in the project area. No significant ecological 

features or important micro habitats were found. No red data species were seen during the field visit. No 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-51 

nests of red data bird of prey species were found in the copses of taller trees – the only likely sites that 

they would select for breeding. 


The project area supports a typical avifaunal assemblage of thorn tree and thorn bush savanna species. 

Some 141 bird species have been recorded for the two ¼ degree squares in which the project falls 

(1917Cc & 2017Aa), some 70% of the expected avifaunal diversity, and generally representing the more 

commonly occurring species in that area. The project area does not fall within Namibia’s endemic zone 

and there are no endemic birds to Namibia in the project area. While a number of species recorded are 

endemic to the southern African sub-region (typically the “south-west arid” zoogeographic zone), these 

species all have large ranges in southern Africa and none are considered to be threatened in any way. 

Six species recorded for the project area are listed in Namibia’s Red Data Book: Whitebacked Vulture 

listed as Near Threatened; Lappetfaced Vulture listed as Vulnerable; and Tawny, Booted, Martial and 

Bateleur Eagles all listed as Endangered. For all these species the main impact in the focal area would 

have been breeding disturbance and loss of breeding sites. A careful search of the most likely breeding 

sites (copses of taller trees) revealed no sign of nests. 

Based on the above, it is concluded that the loss of habitat resulting from the proposed mining and 

processing developments in the project area poses no significant conservation risk to the avifauna in the 

area. 

4.7 ECONOMY 

Dr Jon Barnes provided the economic background and baseline information of the wider project setting, as 

well as the local land uses that will be displaced or modified by mine development. His full report is included at 

Appendix L. 

4.7.1 NATIONAL ECONOMIC SETTING 

Namibia has one of the healthiest economies in southern Africa. Its small population, significant natural 

resources, sound governance, and human capital have allowed peace and prosperity to prevail in the 

twenty years since independence. Low rainfall and poor soils mean that agricultural potential is low, 

restricting most agricultural development to the extensive use of rangelands for livestock production. The 

use of minerals has been the backbone of the natural resource-based economy 19 and economic rents from 

minerals have to a certain extent been reinvested with the aim of ensuring sustainable growth and 

development. The tourism sector has also performed well with a significant nature-based tourism 

component showing good growth. 

19 Lange, G-M. 2003. National wealth, natural capital and sustainable development in Namibia. Research 

Discussion Paper No 54, Directorate of Environmental Affairs, Ministry of Environment and Tourism, 

Windhoek, Namibia. 15pp. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-52 

The Namibian economy is closely linked to the much larger South African economy, which has also been 

growing well in the last decade. Namibian per capita income is among the highest in southern Africa and 

Africa as a whole, which belies marked inequalities in wealth. Significant growth in mineral income is 

expected in Namibia in the next few years, as a result of major investments in new mining projects. 

Along with many other developing countries, Namibian economic growth was affected negatively by the 

global financial crisis of 2008, with sharp cuts in demand for most of the natural resource products it 

produces. This crisis affected the industrialised countries in particular, and their economies have been 

slow in regaining momentum, weighed down by the excessive borrowing needed to finance stimulus 

programmes. Essentially, the world economy was prevented from entering into a prolonged depression, 

by strong growth prevalent in emerging economies, notably China. This growth has been the driver of a 

general global economic recovery, which began in earnest in 2010. Namibia benefitted from this. 

Table 4-10 shows the recorded measures for Namibia's national income, measured here as gross 

domestic product (GDP), between 2005 and 2010. Estimated anticipated GDP for the years 2011 and 

2012 is also shown. Data and estimates are derived from the United Nations Statistical Division 

Database 20 , and predictions are made based on a detailed analysis of Namibia's macro-economic outlook 

made by Investment House Namibia 21 as well as insights gleaned from Sherbourne 22 . 

figure 4-23 further shows the recorded and expected contributions made by the mining sector, the 

livestock sector and the tourism sector to the GDP as a whole. These data show that the mining sector, 

dominated by diamonds, was severely affected in 2009 as a result of the Global financial crisis and 

resultant failed demand. Growth has since resumed, and it is predicted that it will continue. Also affected, 

in part, by the world economic downturn, growth in livestock production and tourism has been slow over 

the period. These activities and the factors affecting them are discussed below. 

20 UNSD/United Nations Statistical Division. 2012. National accounts main aggregates database 

downloads. United Nations Statistical Division, New York, USA. 

[Accessed at: < http://unstats.un.org/unsd/snaama/dnlList.asp >] 

21 Van Wyk, J.D., van Rensburg, B. & van Rensburg, A. 2011.Namibian economic research: Namibia 

macro-economic outlook 2011-2012. Investment House Namibia, Windhoek, Namibia. 54pp. 

22 Sherbourne, R. 2010. Guide to the Namibian economy 2010. Institute for Public Policy Research, 




SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-53 

The Otjozondjupa Region is occupied by semi-arid savanna vegetation types, with commercial farmland 

on the west, and communal land on the east. The dominant land uses make use of the natural 

rangelands for extensive grazing with livestock and wildlife. Only in limited areas is crop production 

possible. Mining is important in a few localities, and essentially dominates the economy of Otjozondjupa 

Region. The Otjozondjupa Region hosts the Okorusu Fluorspar mine, the Ohorongo cement mine, and the 

Otjozondjupa and Purity manganese mines. The small urban centers of Otjiwarongo, Otavi, Grootfontein 

and others, provide services for these activities. 

TABLE 4-10: GDP AND SELECTED COMPONENT ACTIVITIES - N$ MILLION, 2012 CONSTANT PRICES 

Year 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011E* 2012E* 

GDP 61,039 65,357 68,869 71,804 71,289 74,411 77,717 81,169 

Real growth rate % 7.1% 5.4% 4.3% -0.7% 4.4% 4.4% 4.4% 

Mining 4,887 6,237 6,268 6,088 3,347 3,728 3,624 3,834 

Real growth rate % 27.6% 0.5% -2.9% -45.0% 11.4% -2.8% 5.8% 

% of total GDP 8.0% 9.5% 9.1% 8.5% 4.7% 5.0% 4.7% 4.7% 

Livestock 2,123 2,204 2,102 2,161 2,155 2,226 2,304 2,391 

Real growth rate % 3.8% -4.6% 2.8% -0.3% 3.3% 3.5% 3.8% 

% of total GDP 3.5% 3.4% 3.1% 3.0% 3.0% 3.0% 3.0% 2.9% 

Tourism 1,814 1,948 2,154 2,212 2,321 2,442 2,578 2,728 

Real growth rate % 7.4% 10.6% 2.7% 4.9% 5.2% 5.6% 5.8% 

% of total GDP 3.0% 3.0% 3.1% 3.1% 3.3% 3.3% 3.3% 3.4% 

* Estimate 

FIGURE 4-23: RECORDED AND PREDICTED NATIONAL INCOME CONTRIBUTIONS (AS MEASURED 

THROUGH GDP) FOR MINING, LIVESTOCK, AND TOURISM IN NAMIBIA BETWEEN 2005 AND 2012 



4.7.2 CURRENT LAND USES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-54 

Current land use in the project area is typical of that in semi-arid commercial land where the thorn-veld 

savanna vegetation type predominates. This involves livestock production on medium to large scale 

fenced ranches using cattle, and wildlife-based tourism on these properties, either in combination with 

livestock or replacing it. 

Cattle are bred and grown out for slaughter, or purchased and finished for slaughter, using natural 

rangelands as fodder. Although the arid conditions mean that stock carrying capacities are low and 

variable, the sweet nature of the grazing means that animal growth is possible throughout the year. 

Capital investments are high relative to returns and employment is low per unit of land. Some enterprises 

are fully commercial in that they aim primarily to produce beef and beef cattle. These can be termed 

'commercial' systems. Others are less commercially orientated and, while also producing beef and stock, 

they also serve a role of storing value in the herd. These tend to be less intensive, and are found in some 

resettlement farms. These can be termed 'cattle post' enterprises. 

Tourism has become important first as a supplementary activity to livestock and commonly replacing it as 

game numbers increase. Supplementary activities involve safari hunting and guest farm tourism, and 

pure wildlife use involves wildlife viewing lodge development and some safari hunting. Barnes & Jones 23 

described the development of wildlife use for tourism in commercial land. The enterprises where the 

intention is to have significant investment in wildlife stocks and the full development of wildlife viewing 

activities tend to be of larger scale and can be termed 'high value' tourism enterprises. Where 

investments in wildlife are smaller, tourism is less intensive and of lower value and these may be termed 

'low value' tourism enterprises. 

Empirical data have been used here to develop financial and economic models of the typical livestock 

and tourism land uses which take place in the immediate vicinity of the Otjikoto mine. These are 

annualized budget and dynamic cost-benefit models which provide details of financial and economic 

values associated with different types of investment in livestock and wildlife-based tourism in the area. 

They follow the approach and methods used by Barnes et al. (2010), and Turpie et al. (2010). These 

models and their values are to form the baseline for analysis of the impacts of mining on current 

economic activities. Details on the methods and assumptions used are described in the specialist report. 

Table 4-11 shows the primary values associated with the current land uses. 

Generally it can be seen that land use in the northern savanna is not highly attractive for the investor, with 

low financial profitability and returns on investment. Tourism may be slightly more financially attractive, 

and this might explain the tendency for wildlife use to expand at the expense of livestock in this setting. In 

terms of economic contribution (contribution to the national income) tourism is distinctly more efficient 

than livestock production. Several forces affect the relative values for land uses in this setting. Bush 

23 Barnes, J. & Jones, B. 2009.Game ranching in Namibia. In: Suich, H., Child, B. with Spenceley, A. 

(Eds.). Evolution and innovation in wildlife conservation: From parks and game ranches to transfrontier 

conservation areas. Earthscan, London, UK. 113-126. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-55 

encroachment has reduced the suitability of rangeland in the Otjikoto mine area for both livestock and 

tourism. Use of invader bush for commercial production of fuel can provide a financially and economically 

viable way of ameliorating this problem. 

Poor terms of trade have affected extensive livestock production while rapidly growing demand for 

tourism allows for the generation of higher economic rents. Climate change is expected to reduce 

stocking rates in the Namibian savanna and will generally affect livestock incomes more than tourism 

incomes. 24 Economic analysis has shown however, that improved rangeland management can 

significantly enhance livestock incomes 25 , and this can offset other negative influences. Growth in tourism 

demand and income has in recent years been low, partly due to the global downturn, but analysis shows 

that tourism development and investment can significantly enhance incomes. 26 

TABLE 4-11: FINANCIAL AND ECONOMIC VALUES ASSOCIATED WITH THE LAND USES OTJIKOTO 

MINING AREA (N$, 2012) 

Land use 

Livestock 

Commercial 

Livestock 

Cattle post 

Tourism 

High value 

Tourism 

Low value 

Financial data 

Initial capital 4,443,800 1,365,800 14,030,800 9,429,200 

At stability 

Gross turnover 1,110,500 502,400 18,512,800 11,313,50 

0 

Variable financial costs 484,500 299,500 14,111,200 8,623,600 

Fixed financial costs 570,300 108,400 2,988,600 2,647,800 

Entrepreneur net income 55,600 94,600 1,413,000 42,100 

Local income 83,600 130,800 597,800 495,700 

Overall return 

Financial IRR*** (10 years) 6.6% 8.3% 21.0% 9.1% 

Financial NPV**** (10 years @ 10%) -853,800 -181,500 6,111,400 -398,400 

Wage bill 139,300 36,200 1,321,400 504,000 

Economic data 

Initial capital 4,111,600 1,199,100 12,183,500 8,068,300 

Gross output 902,300 571,400 16,834,600 10,577,90 

0 

Economic costs 782,700 343,200 12,653,600 8,411,100 

Incremental contribution to GNI* 119,600 228,200 4,181,000 2,166,800 

Incremental contribution to NNI** -63,600 197,000 3,850,300 1,925,400 

Economic IRR (10 years) 6.81% 10.86% 63.09% 43.18% 

Economic NPV (10years @ 10%) -671,500 75,600 22,318,200 10,569,40 

0 

Number of jobs 7 4 41 15 

Incremental contribution to GNI/ha 8.93 24.1 385 321 

Incremental contribution to NNI/ha -4.75 20.4 355 285 

Local income/ha 6.24 8.12 55.1 73.4 

Entrepreneur net cash Income/ha 4.15 7.03 130 6.23 

Initial economic capital/ha 307 140 1,122 1,195 

Economic gross output/ha 67.3 66.6 1,551 1,567 

24 Turpie, J. et al. Climate change vulnerability and adaptation assessment for Namibia's biodiversity and 

protected area system. Strengthening the Protected Area Network (SPAN) Project, Ministry of 

Environment and Tourism, Windhoek, Namibia. 248pp. 

25 Humavindu, M., Barnes, J., Nott, C., de Klerk, N. & Kruger, B. 2011.Economic valuation of good rangeland 

management and incentives for efficient implementation of the National Rangeland Strategy.Country Pilot Partnership 

Programme, Ministry of Environment and Tourism, Windhoek, Namibia. 53pp. 

26 Barnes, J. & Alberts, M. 2012.Assessment of peoples' engagement in sustainable use activities on the coastal zone 

of Namibia.Namibian Coast Conservation and Management (NACOMA) Project, Ministry of Environment and 

Tourism, Windhoek, Namibia. 47pp. 



* GNI = Gross national income, a measure of the national income similar to GDP 

** NNI = Net national income, gross national income less asset depreciation 

*** IRR = Internal rate of return over 10 years 

**** NPV = Net present value over 10 years at a 10% discount rate 

4.8 Social Environment 


SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-56 

Ms Auriol Ashby compiled the social baseline and the social impact variables that may influence or be 

affected by the proposed mining development. Social baseline information was obtained from numerous 

government documents, key informant meetings held with the Otjozondjupa Regional Council, the Otavi 

and Otjiwarongo Town Councils and neighbouring mines, and from issues raised during the scoping 

phase public consultation. The full social assessment report is included at Appendix K. 

4.8.2 POPULATION CHARACTERISTICS 

The Otjikoto Project is situated in the large, central Otjozondjupa Region. The region is the fifth largest 

region in Namibia, 105 460 sq. km, with a total population of 142 400 people, giving a population density 

of 1.4 persons/sqkm 27 . 63% of the population is over 15 years of age and there are slightly more males 

than females 28 . 

The main languages spoken at home are Otjiherero (28%), Nama/Damara (22%) and Oshiwambo (20%), 

Afrikaans (11%), Kavango (8%), San (5.3%), German (1.6%) and English (1%). For the region as a 

whole, the literacy rate is 75% for all persons over 15 years of age. Many people are literate in more than 

one language: literacy in English is 52%, 48% in Afrikaans, 24% in Otjiherero, 23% in Oshiwambo and 

2% in German. 

The Otjozondjupa Region is divided into seven constituencies and the proposed mine is situated on the 

main road between the Otavi and Otjiwarongo Constituencies. The 2011 census shows a decrease in 

Otavi constituency’s population from 12 387 in 2001 to 11 800 in 2011, of which 5 200 live in the 

municipality of Otavi. By contrast, the more populated and economically active Otjiwarongo Constituency 

had grown from 23 412 people in 2001 to 30 400 in 2011, of which 28 000 inhabitants lived in the town of 

Otjiwarongo. Both town councils have greatly over estimated the growth of their towns. 25% of 

households in Otavi constituency are headed by women whereas in Otjiwarongo 42% are female headed 

households. The average household size in the region has dropped from 4.6 in 2001 to 4.1 in 2011 and 

in Otavi constituency it has dropped from 4 to 3.7 people per household. 

The 2001 Population census found there were 1,351 households in Otjozondjupa Region whose main 

language is San, equivalent to 5.3% of the region’s population. The eastern part of the region is part of 

27 NPC. 2012. Namibia 2011 Population and Housing Census Preliminary Results 

28 NPC. 2005. 2001 Population and Housing Census: Otjozondjupa Report. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-57 

the traditional homeland of the Ju/’hoansi San 29 and Tsumkwe is the administrative centre of the 

Ju/hoansi San community. The Nyae Nyae Conservancy is home to approximately 2,500 San while 

approximately 7,000 Ju/’hoansi live in the N≠Jaqna Conservancy 30 . Some Indigenous People, such as 

the Ju/’hoansi San, may live and be employed on neighbouring farms and in Otavi. No evidence has been 

found that they have claimed any land in the mining area. 

4.8.3 THE AFFECTED COMMUNITY 

4.8.3.1 Neighbouring landowners and farm-workers 

The mine is surrounded by commercial farm land which is used primarily for ranching cattle with some 

game hunting and tourism use in varying combinations. The closest direct neighbouring farms encircling 

the mine farms clockwise are: Erhadtshof, Bergershof, Okaruiputa, Erpfsfarm, Houmoad, Okaputa, 

Okaputa West, Stark, Fisher, Lardner, Hester, Embla and Tirol. 

Figure 4-24 shows the location of the mine site in relation to the neighbouring farms. 

FIGURE 4-24: LOCATION OF EPL AND MINE FARMS 

29 Murphy A., Southern Africa, Retrieved on 27 February 2012 at Google books, p.346 

30 NACSO 2010, Namibia’s Communal Conservancies: a review of progress and challenges in 2009. 



4.8.3.2 Otavi 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-58 

The town of Otavi is situated near the cross roads of the main north-south National Road B1, the road to 

Grootfontein and the road to Outjo. The town (and proposed mine site) is also on the north-south railway 

line that runs from Ondangwa to Walvis Bay. 

Since 2009, Otavi has experienced a boost through the construction of Southern Africa’s most modern 

cement plant, situated 25km north of Otavi. The Ohorongo Cement plant is able to produce 700,000 tons 

of cement annually of which 300,000 tons will be for Namibian consumption. The reserves are expected 

to last for 300 years. In full production the plant employs about 300 people of whom 40% stay in Otavi 

and 60% in Tsumeb and are bussed to and from work. Dozens of Namibians have received training in 

Germany. It is expected that up to 2,000 indirect jobs will be created in the security services, catering, 

and transport and logistics sectors. To save on coal, the company is investing a further N$120 million on 

de-bushing equipment to harvest invader bush in the Otavi area on nearly 50 farms. This is expected to 

create a further 50 direct jobs and further jobs might be created for transporting the harvested bush to the 

plant. 

In 2010, Government upgraded Otavi from village to town status and an entirely new leadership has 

taken over since the ESIA Scoping Phase. The council is very positive and is enthusiastically promoting 

the town. 

Otavi can offer: 

� Large reserves of rain-fed groundwater; 

� Up-graded state health centre, 2 private doctors and a private veterinarian; 

� 3 primary schools and one secondary school; 

� Limited service sector: AGRA, Spar, FNB and Standard Bank, Post Office, Telecom, Magistrates 

court, a regional council office and a small range of retail and service suppliers; 

� Limited manufacturing - Mossi Nets, Namib Mills (a maize mill, mahangu plant and sugar packing 

plant), protective clothing; 

� Upgraded sports field, community hall, swimming pool, library, night clubs and several churches; 

� Land earmarked for offices, housing development for medium-upper income housing and for 300- 

400 low cost housing, through the Build Together programme (Ministry of Regional and Local 

Government, Housing and Rural Development (MRLGHRD). In 2008, the Ratepayers Association 

reported that there were many undeveloped, but already serviced plots available for building 

houses for people in the higher income bracket, which would encourage newcomers to integrate 

in the existing community; 

� Two lodges and several Bed and Breakfasts that serve passing tourists but otherwise the town’s 

facilities serve its resident population and surrounding farmland; and 

� In 2007, it twinned with Bloemfontein, South Africa which has offered technical support. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-59 

It seems to have strong political support from Cabinet and parliamentarians as many have farms in the 

area. Among the planned projects are a new Municipal complex (N$11 million), the upgrade of sewerage 

and water reticulation (N$20 million), an artisan training centre and a new primary school. 

Otavi Town Council has a vision and plan to attract investors to the town 31 . It wants more job 

opportunities to “rekindle economic activity for the benefit of all that means the Village Council’s revenue 

base will expand, more SMEs and businesses will emerge and indirect jobs will be created”. It feels 

frustrated that larger Local Authorities in the region do not divert development opportunities to the smaller 

ones. 

Otavi’s Strategic Plan (2009-2013) aims to uplift the town and is based on the needs and expectations of 

its stakeholders – residents in both formal and informal housing, the local business community, investors, 

government ministries, NGOs, schools and churches. The plan honestly scrutinizes the many issues and 

challenges facing the town and highlights five strategic objectives, one of which is to promote sustainable 

socio-economic growth. 

The Council would like to encourage Auryx Gold’s to source labour from the town and to accommodate its 

workforce in Otavi, thus bringing more economic benefits. 

4.8.3.3 Otjiwarongo 

Otjiwarongo is the regional capital and is 70km south of Otjikoto mine, on the main B1 northern highway. 

The town is six times the size of Otavi, with a population of 30,400 (2011) of which approximately 7,000 

own formal plots and are ratepayers 32 . Otjiwarongo’s larger population sustains a much larger and 

diverse economy including many service industries and institutions. Its industries are not large: 

polystyrene, tyre re-tread, taxidermist, Fabupharm (manufactures a wide range of cosmetic and toiletry 

preparations as well as registered pharmaceutical products for the private and the Government Tender 

Market), brick makers, two auction houses, Namaqua Meat for European export, and charcoal production 

based on a number of nearby farms. 

It has several government and private primary and secondary schools and has good medical services 

including doctors, dentists, pharmacists and a government and private hospital. A Multipurpose Help 

Centre was established with funding from its twin town in the Netherlands which provides afterschool 

support and a feeding programme (with food from Spar) to about 80 orphans and vulnerable children. The 

centre manager and two staff are funded by the council. A multi-market centre provides SME support. 

The Otjiwarongo Town Council’s five year strategic plan 2009 – 2013 has identified a number of 

developmental challenges: service provision backlogs, lack of institutional capacity, slack economic 

growth and job creation, inadequate and decaying infrastructure and inadequate funds to meet all the 

developmental needs of the town. Its strategic plan addresses these issues through five strategies: 

31 Otavi Village Council Strategic Plan 2009-2013 

32 Otjiwarongo Town engineer at the stakeholder meeting 



� Socio-economic development 

� Infrastructural development 

� Capacity building 

� Operational efficiency 

� Budget and finance 

To be achieved by: 

� Reducing poverty levels 

� Facilitating SME development 

� Ensuring a health & hygienic environment and 

� Mitigating HIV/AIDS 

� Infrastructural development 

� Budget and Financial 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-60 

The Town Council gets no money from central government for capital development such as street lighting 

and plot development to formalise informal settlements. They are proud that it has good town planning, 

even in informal areas. 

The town hopes to be the main service centre for Auryx Gold’s operations and its personnel. 

4.8.3.4 Otjozondjupa Regional Council 

Over the last decade, government has put considerable resources into building the capacity of regional 

structures with the aim of decentralising services closer to the people. Several line ministries, notably 

Education, Gender and Child Welfare, the Department of Works and the Directorate of Rural Water 

Supply are formally under the Regional Councils. 

The Otjozondjupa Region has seven elected council members, one for each constituency and one 

Governor appointed by the President of Namibia. The Council’s Strategic Plan 2009 - 2014 aims to 

ensure that Otjozondjupa makes a significant contribution toward the achievement of Vision 2030 over 

the five-year period. The strategic plan gives an analysis of the key development issues it faces in table 

4-12. 

TABLE 4-12: ANALYSIS OF THE REGION’S KEY CHALLENGES AND THEIR ROOT CAUSES 

Strategic Issue Root Causes 

Low revenue base 

� Low own income generation capacity - from existing 

services, new services and poor income collection 

� Lack of conducive investment environment 

Low Local Economic Development � Under utilization of available natural resources 

(LED) and high unemployment � Insufficient funding and skills; No proactive identification, 

marketing and tapping of LED potential 

Poor disaster preparedness 

� 

� 

Lack of funds; Poor planning 

Insufficient local capacity to handle emergencies 

� Unaffordability/High building standards & cost 

Shortage of appropriate housing � Unemployment; poverty 

� Insufficient funding 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-61 

Strategic Issue Root Causes 

High crime rate � Poverty, unemployment and moral decay 

� Ignorance/culture/peer pressure/poor education, poverty, 

High HIV/AIDS prevalence 

� 

weak moral values 

Ineffective implementation of legislation on HIV control and 

prevention 

� Historical political context 

� Lack of motivation, Inadequate education facilities & 

Low literacy/education levels 

� 

resource materials 

Poverty, poor early childhood development 

� Unfavourable education policy; Shortage of qualified 

teachers 

Limited community awareness and � Poor community engagement strategy 

knowledge of ORC and its services � Poor public relation and marketing of ORC services 

Limited involvement of private � Poor private sector engagement strategy 

sector 

� Poor marketing of ORC services and potential 

Low budget for rural electrification 

� 

� 

Inadequate funds 

Poor planning 

Source: ORC Strategic Plan 2009-2014, p11 

The Regional Council’s three strategic themes are: (i) Sustainable Socio-economic Development (ii) 

Good Governanceand(iii) Operational Excellence. The Regional Local Economic Development Strategy 

was adopted by Council in June 2011and it lists the needs and strategies for the region: 

AGRICULTURE– Key challenges identified include poor livestock quality on communal and 

resettlement farms, livestock marketing challenges for communal farmers, overstocking and 

resultant overgrazing of farm land, limited crop production, inadequate water infrastructure for 

agricultural development, unmet resettlement needs, bad road conditions and bad infrastructure, 

and inadequate financing agriculture development. Main LED initiatives identified are support to 

communal farmers, outreach of existing skills development programmes, database development on 

skills development programmes for farmers, development of regional marketing calendar for 

livestock, regional Livestock Marketing Workshop, marketing infrastructure upgrade and 

maintenance in constituencies, Rangeland Management Training for communal farmers, virgin land 

development for agricultural production, water infrastructure development in prioritized targeted 

communal land, prioritize resettlement needs of people with livestock on town lands, horticultural 

production on resettlement farms, de-bushing of agricultural land (including exploring potential for 

energy production), urban agricultural (horticultural) initiative on settlement and town lands (including 

incentives), and up scaling of Ministry of Agriculture Water and Forestry (MAWF) pilots in the region. 

TOURISM– Key challenges identified include under-developed craft and cultural tourism, 

inadequate marketing & promotion for the tourism sector, inadequate or under-developed tourist 

attraction, and inadequate contribution of the communal conservancies to tourism growth, and 

guest and tourist accommodation inadequacies in certain urban localities. Main LED initiatives 

identified are safety & security coordinating mechanism in region, marketing agency 

establishment, establish regional tourism forum and revive local tourism forums, training of 

tourism operators, hospitality infrastructure in targeted urban localities (e.g. tourism info centre 

cum coffee shops, restaurants, Internet café’s, and craft market development), training institutions 

development in the region, product development for tourism (inclusive of tourism route 

development, day tours, etc), support to communal conservancies (institutional and resource 

support mobilized), guest accommodation in targeted locations. 

MANUFACTURING– Key challenges identified include challenges for the charcoal industry, 

procurement challenges for the manufacturing industry, competition from South African and other 

suppliers, skills availability challenges for the manufacturing industry, high costs of inputs, 

uncertainties and unpredictability of the Angolan market, and work permits for skilled workers. 

Main LED initiatives identified are about exploring value addition in charcoal production, regulation 

and control of charcoal industry, encourage the introduction of entrepreneurship in school syllabus, 

vocational and technical skills, procurement of local products & services by public services, 

database development of manufacturers and other business in region, incentives package 

development for industry in the region, and marketing initiatives for manufactured products in the 



region. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-62 

SERVICES– Key challenges identified include challenges of local authority services, inadequate 

stakeholder relationships and communication, inadequate settlements development, limited 

serviced and prime land availability in urban areas, skills development gaps, housing and 

accommodation demand not met, and poor levels of public services provision (related to essential 

services such as education, health, security, etc). Main LED initiatives identified are skills 

development for local authorities and settlements, strengthen Regional Education Forum, 

strengthen local stakeholder platforms, establish regional Local Authority (LA) platform, 

development of standardized LA profiles, strengthen attachment programmes of technical and 

vocational skills training facilities in region, regional trust fund establishment, develop strategies 

for improving revenue collection for LAs/settlements, explore support towards Public Private 

partnerships (PPPs) for servicing land in targeted LAs, engage TransNamib/Ministry of Works and 

Transport on prime land in LAs, engage Telecom/cellular phone companies (MTC/LEO), 

ORC/CENORED/Namwater on service provision issues in the region, explore incentives for 

business and industrial development in LA areas, explore PPP’s on health services in targeted LA 

areas, identification of champions for local opportunities. 

MINING– Main LED initiatives identified under mining are to establish a regional trust fund, 

engage mining companies on possible PPPs for developing declared settlements and nearby LAs, 

engage respective mining company and MRLGHRD on Kombat proclamation to a settlement or 

village, engage Ohorongo Cement on opportunities for SMEs, Memorandum of Understanding 

with Ohorongo Cement on cooperation with Otavi Town Council, and research on small-scale 

mining activities in Otjozondjupa and follow-up activities. 

SMES/INFORMAL– Key challenges identified include unavailability of affordable business 

premises, unresponsive business environment, expensive urban land for business purposes, and 

inadequate support service provision in region. Main LED initiatives identified are formalization of 

marketing structures in settlements and Local Authorities (LA), training and mentorship support for 

SMEs and informal sector, assessment of formal business opportunities in targeted localities, 

support formalization of SMEs and informal, regional fund for supporting SMEs, explore zoning 

solutions for SMEs, incubation facilities for SMEs, representation of SMEs & informal, advocating 

for procurement criteria and practices that make participation of local SMEs possible, LAs & 

regional council & other public agencies (voluntarily) procure from local SME suppliers or 

contractors, and develop regional database of accredited contractors for local procurement 

preferences. 

CLEAN DEVELOPMENT MECHANISM– Main LED initiatives identified are fuel-efficient wood 

cook stoves, hybrid biogas-diesel electricity generation for off-grid settlements (e.g. Gam), 

Affordable clay-house development using sun-baked clay bricks, production of wood pellets from 

invader bush for sale to the international energy market, local SME manufacture of transportable 

charcoal retorts, small-scale SME production of charcoal briquettes (in Otavi, Okahandja, and 

Grootfontein), avoidance of methane emissions and high value compost production using biogas 

digesters at commercial poultry farms, composting of municipal organic waste and collection of 

recyclable municipal waste by SME collectors using cargo bicycles, additional financial support to 

the Solar Revolving Fund and urban fruit tree orchards using treated municipal wastewater for 

irrigation (in addition looking at other uses for the recycled waste water). 

4.8.3.5 National Government 

The new Environmental Regulations recognise that any organ of state that may have jurisdiction over any 

aspect of the proposed project is regarded as an Interested and affected party. The National Planning 

Commission (NPC) is responsible for planning government priorities and directing the course of national 

development which is then implemented by the various government Offices, Ministries and Agencies. Of 

particular importance to the project and the surrounding area are: 

� The Ministry of Mines and Energy (MME) facilitates and regulates the development and 

sustainable utilization of Namibia's mineral and energy resources for the benefit of all Namibians 

� The Ministry of Agriculture Water and Forestry (MAWF) is mandated to promote, develop, 

manage and utilize agricultural, water and forestry resources. It wants to diversify agricultural 

practices and products, create jobs, improve competitiveness, develop Namibia’s market locally, 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-63 

regionally and internationally, ensure potable water and basic sanitation services, promote 

integrated environmental management, improve regulatory environment, build capacity for the 

people, promote food safety standards and most of all, ensure food security. 

� The Ministry of Environment and Tourism (MET) is tasked to manage the country’s ecological 

processes and life-support systems, conserve biological diversity, and ensure that natural resources 

are sustainable for the benefit of all Namibians, both present and future. 

� The Ministry of Works and Transport (MWT) is tasked to provide effective transport infrastructure 

and specialised services. This includes the Roads Authority (RA) which manages the national road 

network with a view to support economic growth. 

� The Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare (MLSW) is responsible for the execution of the 

Labour Act No. 11 of 2007, the Social Security Act No. 34 of 1994, the Employees Compensation 

Amendment Act No. 5 of 1995 and the Affirmative Action Act (Employment) No. 29 of 1998. The 

various Acts stipulate, amongst other things, sound labour relations, employment equity, fair 

employment practices, training, minimum basic conditions of service, workplace health and safety 

and retrenchment. Compliance is enforced and monitored by the Ministry of Labour through the 

office of the Labour Commissioner. 

� The Ministry of Health and Social Services (MHSS) oversees policy formulation, provides 

health facilities and manages healthcare provided by regional directorates. 

� The Ministry of Education (MoE) provides pre-primary schooling, formal general education at 

primary and secondary level (grades 1-12), higher education, vocational education and training, 

education for out-of-school youth and adults and life-long learning. 

� State Owned Companies such as the Roads Authority, NamPower, NamWater, TransNamib 

and Telecom. 

4.8.4 LABOUR AND INCOME 

The labour force in Otjozondjupa is approximately 55,000 people, of whom about 31,000 are male. The 

labour force participation rate (LFPR) or the economically active population is the proportion of the 

working population (both employed and unemployed) over 15 years old. Otjozondjupa has the fifth 

highest LFPR in the country at 71%, which is above the national average of 55% 33 . As to be expected 

urban rates are higher than rural rates and they are higher for males in all the constituencies (82% of 

males compared to 60% of women). The 2008 Namibia Labour Force Survey found that the national 

unemployment rate was 51.2%. Unemployment rates (using a broad definition) in Otjozondjupa Region are 

significantly higher among women (65%) compared to 27% male unemployment. Youth unemployment 

(15-34 years) is below the national average at 50% but young women, have the highest unemployment 

rate in the region, 73% compared with men 31% 34 . 

Of those employed in the region, approximately 51% are employed in the private sector, 22% are employed by 

government and parastatals and approximately only 9% are subsistence farmers /farm workers. Agriculture 

(the data includes forestry) is an important source of employment accounting for almost 30% of 

33 MoLS. 2010. Namibia Labour Force Survey 2008, Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare 

34 NPC. 2005. 2001 Population and Housing Census; Otjozondjupa Region 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-64 

employment in Otjozondjupa. The manufacturing sector includes mining, quarrying, electricity, gas and 

construction and accounts for nearly 12% of the workforce. The largest occupational group is elementary 

occupations which includes labourers and other unskilled occupations and constitute 40% of all those 

employed. 35 

The main source of income in the region is derived from wages and salaries which make up 54% of a 

household’s total income source. Business and non-farming activities accounts for 5% whilst cash 

remittances sent home by family members from elsewhere account for 13% and 12% 36 . Over the whole 

region, 13% of households rely on pensions and only 10% on subsistence agriculture and cattle rearing 37 . 

Thirty nine commercial farms in the region have been used for the resettlement of 116 farmers 38 which 

has generally not been economically beneficial to the families concerned or for the land’s productivity. 

The living standard of households can be partly expressed by examining patterns of consumption. From 

national statistics, annual consumption levels where the head of household is without formal education 

averaged N$16,530 in 2003-4 (approximately a quarter of Namibia’s population has never attended 

school). This compares to N$147,477 where the household head has a tertiary qualification. The average 

annual consumption of households in commercial farming was N$224,850, compared to those in 

subsistence farming which was N$21,530. When shown by the dominant language groups nationally, the 

average annual household consumption of German households is N$193,684, of Afrikaans households is 

N$93,156, of Otjiherero households is N$42,478, of Nama/Damara households is N$23,920 and of San 

households it is N$14,505 39 . An atlas of poverty in Namibia 40 estimates the median annual expenditure 

per person living on commercial land in this part of Namibia is N$5,000 – 6,000 (figure 4-25). A large 

number of Namibians seeking jobs in the formal sector are held back due to a lack of necessary skills or 

training. 

35 Ibid 

36 NPC. 2005. 2001 Population and Housing Census; Otjozondjupa Region 

37 MoLS. 2010. Namibia Labour Force Survey 2008, Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare 

38 Otjozondjupa Regional Council. 2011. Otjozondjupa Regional LED Strategy 

39 NPC. 2006. Namibia Household Income and Expenditure Survey 2003/2004 

40 RAISON. 2011. An Atlas of Poverty in Namibia. Central Bureau of Statistics 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-65 

Source: RAISON. 2011. An Atlas of Poverty in Namibia. 

FIGURE 4-25: ESTIMATES OF MEDIAN ANNUAL EXPENDITURE PER PERSON IN THE WIDER PROJECT 

AREA. 

Namibia’s Gini coefficient is one of the highest in the world (0.63) and Otjozondjupa is the region with the 

fourth highest (0.60) which reflects the great inequalities of income between households 41 . The San are 

the poorest population group in the country and there were 1,350 San households in this region at the last 

census. 

4.8.5 BASIC INFRASTRUCTURE AND HOUSING 

In Otjozondjupa Region in 2001, 39% of households lived in housing which was provided by their 

employer while 48% lived in their own homes. The proportion of households living in impoverished 

41 NPC. 2008. A Review of Poverty and Inequality in Namibia 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-66 

dwellings (shacks) was only 10% in the region. Nevertheless, in 2001, 40 - 60% of households along the 

road between Otjiwarongo and Otavi relied on the bush as their only toilet. 

Commercial farmers have generally improved the housing conditions of the workers considerably since 

independence by comparison whereas there has been a worsening situation in urban areas. The main 

concern for people who live in employer-provided housing is where they will live on retirement or when 

unemployed. 

Otavi has earmarked land for 300-400 low cost housing but a big challenge is to provide serviced plots as 

it relies on government funding to install water, sewerage and electricity. The decentralised Build 

Together Programme of the Ministry of Regional Local Government Housing and Rural Development 

(MRLGHRD) and the parastatal – the Namibia Housing Enterprise (NHE), provide loans for house 

construction. 

Several NGOs operate in the low cost housing sector. The Shack Dwellers Federation of Namibia (SDFN) 

is a network of housing saving schemes that aims to improve the living conditions of low-income people 

living in shacks, rented rooms and those without any accommodation, while promoting women’s 

participation. 

The Clay House Project is based in Otjiwarongo and provides building skills in alternative construction 

methods using locally produced clay bricks. 42 . It also offers dry toilets but these cost N$10,000 – 15,000 

each. The project has built more than 240 homes in informal settlements and several pre-schools and it 

started a pre-school support programme in 2008. 

4.8.6 HEALTH 

Rural households are more likely to be located nearest to a clinic and 59% of households in Otjozondjupa 

have a clinic as the nearest government health facility. Urban households are more likely to be nearest to 

a government hospital and 39% of households have a hospital as the closest facility. Overall, 49% of 

households walked to their nearest health facility which indicates the proximity of health facilities to the 

population they serve. 

Child immunisation rates are good in the region, with over 76% of children fully vaccinated. Incidence of 

diarrhoea among the under fives was 13% and 86% of mothers knew how to treat diarrhoea. 

The biggest concern is that 27% of children under 5 years in Otjozondjupa were found to be stunted 

(short for their age) while 15% were under weight for the age 43 . Both these indicators are used by 

Namibia’s Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) to measure poverty and it show that chronic childhood 

malnutrition is widespread and worsening. The Ministry of Health and Social Welfare (MHSS) has a 

42 http://home.arcor.de/clayhouse/ 

43 MHSS. 2008. Namibia Demographic and Health Survey 2006/07 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-67 

detailed implementation plan to reduce malnutrition that includes improved maternal nutrition, 

breastfeeding and feeding programmes at ECD centres and primary schools. 

In 2001, the top killer diseases in Otjozondjupa Region for 5 year olds and older were AIDS (19%), TB 

(15%) and cancer (9%) 44 . 

4.8.7 HIV/AIDS 

HIV/AIDS is regarded as far more than a health issue alone as it has impacted on every sector in 

Namibia. As with the rest of southern Africa, the HIV/AIDS epidemic has had a devastating impact on 

families and has put a considerable strain on government services. The government has yet to introduce a 

population-wide survey, so HIV prevalence among males is not known. The HIV prevalence ratio among 

pregnant women visiting the three sentinel hospitals closest to the mine site is shown in table 4-13 45 . 

TABLE 4-13: HIV PREVALENCE RATES FOR YOUTH AND ADULTS IN SELECTED SITES, 2004 - 2010 

Sentinel site 

% HIV prevalence rate 

15-24 years age group 25-49 years age group 

2004 2006 2008 2010 2004 2006 2008 2010 

Tsumeb 6.3 16.2 5.2 11.2 25.8 17.6 28.1 34.3 

Grootfontein 23.7 13.4 9.8 9.9 31.6 24.8 24.2 19.5 

Otjiwarongo 9.5 11.5 9.6 10 23.7 27.2 21.1 23.5 

Nationally 15.2 14.2 10.6 10.3 23.9 26.5 24.7 26.4 

The impressive decrease in Grootfontein recorded since 2004, among youth and adults, may reflect the 

intensive social and behavioural change programmes implemented by the Namibia Defence Force at their 

base and by NGOs in the town. Tsumeb now has the fourth highest rate in the country and this is thought 

to be linked to its highly mobile population, where there are a large number of men with cash, 

unaccompanied by their families. Male dominated industries, such as defence, construction, mining and 

the transport sectors bring significant risk to the resident population. 

The main drivers of the epidemic in Namibia are multiple concurrent partnerships, inconsistent condom 

use and unprotected sex, mobility patterns of migrant workers, low perception of risk of HIV infection, 

alcohol use and abuse, and transactional and intergenerational sex. Of concern is the rate of infections 

amongst the youth has remained stable or even slightly increased at all three towns, compared to the 

downward national trend. 

The early diagnosis of HIV, together with supportive counselling, on-going monitoring and good nutrition 

can lengthen the period before a person may need anti-retroviral treatment (ART). The Namibian 

Government and partners have rolled out anti-retroviral treatment to all district hospitals and some health 

44 El Obeid et al. 2001.Health in Namibia. RAISON 

45 MHSS. 2010. Report on the 2010 National HIV Sentinel Survey 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-68 

centres. Strict adherence to the treatment and a continued supportive environment can lengthen and 

improve the quality of life of people living with HIV by many years. 

4.8.8 EDUCATION 

4.8.8.1 Overview 

Largely due to pre independence apartheid policies, by 2001, only 21% of the people living in the 

Otjozondjupa Region had completed secondary school, of which 5% held some higher tertiary training. 

22% of the people had never attended school and a further 35% did not complete primary school. The net 

result of this is that between 50-60% of households in the mine’s area have no member who has higher 

than primary education and this impacts detrimentally on income levels 46 . 

The literacy rate in Otjozondjupa in 2001 was 75% of people over 15 years but literacy rates vary 

tremendously across the region. Urban literacy rates were 88% compared with 64% in the rural areas. 

Literacy rates in Otavi constituency were 65% 47 . 

There are 65 schools in Otjozondjupa, 44 primary, 12 combined schools and 9 secondary schools. With 

the total number of school learners being 33,317 pupils, 30 119 of them attend state schools. Currently, 

school attendance among girls and boys is 85% and 82% respectively. The Ministry of Education’s 

(MoE) regional office has admitted that they are not able to support and attend to all the needs of the 

state schools sufficiently 48 . 

4.8.8.2 Early Childhood Development (ECD) 

In Namibia, early learning opportunities for young children are extremely limited, especially in rural areas. 

Programmes for the 2-5 year olds are primarily community or privately run with little or no government 

funding. The MoE is re-introducing state support for pre-primary education for the 5-6 year olds, while the 

Ministry of Gender and Child Welfare (MGECW) has overall responsibility for other ECD centres. 

Three thousand (24%) of the region’s 3-6 year olds are attending the 81 ECD centres in the region as in 

March 2011 but only 41% of their caregivers have received any training in ECD. Perhaps of greatest 

concern is that almost half of the centres have no trained staff at all. Many ECD centres simply enable 

mothers to go out and earn a living. ECD centres charge fees ranging from N$50 – N$400 per month, 

depending on their catchment areas. 

4.8.8.3 Primary and Secondary Education 

Otavi has three primary schools: Otavi Primary has 600 learners, Shalom Primary has 800 learners in 

double shifts (it is much harder for children in the second shift) and the private German school has 150 

learners. Currently, the German private school takes German speakers but some residents are 

46 RAISON. 2011. An Atlas of Poverty in Namibia. Central Bureau of Statistics 

47 NPC, 2005, 2001 Population and Housing Census; Otjozondjupa Region. 

48 MoE, 2011.Education Statistics 2009.Education and Management Information System (EMIS) 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-69 

advocating for a double medium school: German and English up to grade 4 and from there onwards 

English medium. 

Kharob Secondary School was originally a primary school and has expanded to offer Grade 12 ordinary 

level and higher level in Science, Biology and Geography. Of the 70 matriculates in 2010, about 55% 

passed. Many secondary school children in the Otavi area attend school in Tsumeb, 63km north of Otavi. 

In Namibia poor Grade 1 performance may be linked to lack of ECD opportunities.Nationally, grade 1 

repetition rates increased from 18.9% in 2002 to 20.7% in 2008. School leaving rates in grade 1 

increased from 2.3% in 2002 to 4.2% in 2008 49 . This is a unique and defining feature of Namibian 

education that one child in every five is a repeater. There are about 550 000 learners in grades 1-10 and 

110 000 of these have repeated at least one year of school. They occupy the time of 3 600 teachers and 

the space of over 300 schools which is a huge economic burden on the country. Grade 10s don’t ‘fail’; 

there are simply no places for them in grade 11 and so the Ministry of Education uses the results as a 

means of limiting entry. There is no standard required at grade 10 for progression to grade 11 because 

the grade 12 examination has been designed from the outset to cater for all abilities 50 . 

In 2011 across the country, only 51.5% of Grade 10s who took the Junior Secondary Certificate (JSC) 

examination qualified for admission to grade 11 in 2012 on the minimum requirement of 23 points in their 

best 6 subjects and above with an F grade (symbol) in English. Otjozondjupa Region performed better 

than both Khomas and Omaheke regions 51 . 

Learners who drop out of school early or who want to improve their grades can continue their education 

through distance learning at the Namibian College of Open Learning (NAMCOL). 

4.8.8.4 Vocational Training 

Since independence enrolment in Vocational Training Centres has increased more than sixteen times 

from about 150 trainees to 2,500 trainees. Community Skills Development Centres (COSDECs) have 

been established in nine locations, including Otjiwarongo and Tsumeb, to provide non-formal short-term 

training for youth and adults 52 . The KAYEC Trust, an NGO, has campuses in Windhoek and Ondangwa 

and it provides level 1 training in a range of vocational skills on 13 week highly practical courses. 

The Otjiwarongo COSDEC offers one year, Level One competency-based training in baking, bricklaying 

and plastering, building maintenance, hairdressing, needlework and office administration. It has trained 

80 trainees / year in full time courses since 2004 and it has run additional, shorter courses too. The 

Tsumeb COSDEC offers basic computer literacy, bricklaying and plastering, building maintenance, food 

preparation, leather tanning, office administration, plumbing and pipefitting, welding and fabrication. The 

49 MoE. 2011, Ibid 

50 Clegg, A. 2011.The Namibian education Time Bomb. The Namibian 01.02.2011 

51 http://www.moe.gov.na/news_article.php?id=49&title=Results of The 2011, Junior Secondary 

Certificate 

52 http://www.cosdef.org.na/ 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-70 

Tsumeb SME Support Centre provides business training courses and counselling to small business 

owners and entrepreneurs. It has Small Business Incubation Units which it rents to local SME operators 

as part of their business support services. 

The Namibian Institute of Mining and Technology (NIMT) is reputed to be the best vocational training 

centre in the country by the mining sector. It has three campuses, at Tsumeb, Arandis and 

Keetmanshoop which are providing training in: 

� Fitting & Turning (including Machining): Arandis, Tsumeb and Keetmanshoop 

� Boiler making/Plating/Welding: Arandis, Tsumeb and Keetmanshoop 

� Diesel-/Petrol Mechanics: Arandis, Tsumeb and Keetmanshoop 

� Electrical: Arandis, Tsumeb and Keetmanshoop 

� Instrumentation 

� Bricklaying/Plastering 

� Carpentry/Joinery 

� Plumbing/Sheet metalwork 

� Refrigeration/Air-conditioning 

� Clothing Production 

� Millwright (Electrical) – Tsumeb only 

� Autotronics – Tsumeb only 


The baseline study has found that within Otjozondjupa Region there are great differences between 

income groups and it is the fourth most unequal region in the country. Low education levels affect 

employability and many households’ ability to earn a decent wage. The median expenditure per person 

living on commercial land along this section of the B1 is only N$5,000 – 6,000 per annum. Although the 

region has a relatively high labour force participation rate (71%), unemployment is high among women 

(65%), particularly among young women (73%). Unemployment is higher in rural than in urban areas and 

is higher in small towns such as Otavi compared to Otjiwarongo. Poverty is widespread, as reflected in 

levels of child stunting affecting 27% of children under 5 years. 

Urban migration is continuous as reflected in the growth of both neighbouring towns, as people move to 

seek better opportunities. The development plans for the region and towns seek socio-economic 

development which provides income-earning opportunities. 

4.9 Archaeology 

The information provided in this baseline description is taken from the following archaeology 

reports:Archaeological assessment of current mineral exploration works at Otjikoto, Otjozondjupa Region 

(QRS, May 2007) and Archaeological assessment of current mineral exploration works at Otjikoto, 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-71 

Otjozondjupa Region: additional observations (QRS, June 2007). The reports can be found in Appendix 

I. The findings are incorporated into this Chapter. 

4.9.1 THE PROJECT AREA 

Previous archaeological work in the project area is limited to two extended transects running 

approximately parallel to the National Road B1. These were carried out as part of the archaeological 

assessment of major electricity transmission lines. No archaeological sites were located on either 

transect, indicating that few archaeological sites would be found in the study area. 

For the current project, within the survey area transect lines covering a total of 71 km were searched by 

foot or vehicle. Transect were selected using aerial photos and 1:50 000 topographical maps, to provide 

a maximum coverage of calcrete remnants and other outcrop, as well as areas of low ground. Historical 

maps were consulted, e.g. Kriegskarte Deutsch-SWA, (Dietrich Riemer, 1904) to determine possible sites 

of old settlements, and local residents were interviewed for information on burial places and other sites of 

cultural or historical significance. 

Archaeological sites in Namibia are protected by the National Heritage Act (No. 27 of 2004) and graves 

are protected under the Burial Places Ordinance (27 of 1966). 

4.9.2 FINDINGS 

Two site of archaeological / historical interest were located on the farm Otjikoto during the first site visit 

and are protected under the above mentioned Act / Ordinance. 

Location QRS 83/1&2 (Lat. -20.00593 / Long. 17.11444) is set in dense thorn bush in a low lying area 

characterised by sandy loamy soil. Approximately eighteen (18) cairns were found composed of loose 

calcrete fragments in roughly circular or elliptic arrangements, ranging from 0.6 to 3.2 m in diameter 

(figure 4-26). No cultural items were observed on or near the cairns, but they appear to be of artificial 

origin. Similar heaps could result from natural root-heaving, but these are unusually characterised by 

larger calcrete fragments standing in the near-vertical position. Small heaps of stones may also result 

from shallow grading of tracks, but these are generally characterised by poorly sorted fragments with 

some heaping of soil. In this instant the cairns appear to be of hand-sorted fragments, and are therefore 

considered as possible burial cairns. 

It has to be noted that the sites are low lying which would have been favoured as winter grazing by 

Herero pastoralists who occupied the area in the 18th and 19th centuries. Winter grazing areas were 

usually the sites of permanent homesteads (ozonganda) and these were occupied for up to 30 years. 

Burial cairns are often the only remaining traces on these sites. The Otavi sheet of the Kriegskarte 

Deutsch-SWA indicates a number of major settlements and main routes in the Otjikoto area, which also 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-72 

raise the likelihood that the cairns are burial sites. On these evidences and inferences the site QRS 

83/1&2 is considered to be an important site until proven otherwise. 

When considering existing potential impacts from on-site exploration activities, the significance rating 

(ranging from 0 – 5) QRS 83/1&2 is rated as 4 which means that QRS 83/1&2 is a ‘multi-component site, 

or central site with high research potential’. The vulnerability ranking (0 - 5) is also rated as 4, translating 

as ‘high likelihood of partial disturbance due to proximity of development’. 

FIGURE 4-26: CAIRNS IN THE OTJIKOTO AREA. 

Location QRS 83/3 (Lat. -19.98297 / Long. 17.11588) is located on an east-facing side of a low calcrete 

remnant with very dense thorn bush cover. A group of approximately twelve (12) graves was 

encountered in an area of about 30m x 15m showing the remains of a boundary fence of wire and 

wooden poles (figure 4-27). The cemetery contains four graves with rectangular stones and concrete 

surroundings, and three of these have (partly) legible inscriptions. A further six graves are extended 

cairns, oriented east-west, and the remaining two are traditional grave cairns, possibly individuals who 

were not baptized. 

When considering existing potential impacts from on-site exploration activities, the significance rating 

(ranging from 0 – 5) QRS 83/3 is rated as 5 which means that QRS 83/3 is a ‘major archaeological site 

containing unique evidence of high regional significance’. The vulnerability ranking (0 - 5) is also rated as 

5, translating as ‘direct or certain threat of major disturbance or total destruction’. 



FIGURE 4-27: GRAVES FOUND NEAR FARM OTJIKOTO. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-73 

An additional archaeological survey and assessment of farms Gerhardshausen and Okaputa Nerd (also 

named Felsenquelle) was conducted on 11 and 12 June 2007. Four Christian burial sites of historical 

interest were located during this site visit and are protected under the above mentioned Act / Ordinance. 

Site QRS 83/5 (Lat -20.04588/Long 17.11324) is located among trees and shrubs on the southern edge 

of a clearing around the Gerhardshausen farmhouse, which was apparently abandoned in the 1940ties. 

A single Christian grave within a small fenced-off area was located. The grave has a brick and mortar 

surround and a grey marble headstone surmounted by an iron crucifix. The inscription is clearly 

readable. 

Sites QRS 83/4, QRS 83/6 and QRS 83/7 are located on farm Okaputa Nord. 

QRS 83/4 (Lat -20.06808/Long 17.09664) lies in low thornbush vegetation on the edge of a clearing near 

the farmhouse. Two Christian graves within a small fenced-off area were located. The graves are 

probably those of farm labourers, with rough stone cairns and some bottles. No names are available, but 

the farm manager stated that relatives occasionally visit the graves to tidy up. 

QRS 83/6 (Lat. -20.0697/Long. 17.09872) is located in a low calcrete and marble ridge within the dense 

thornbush. The site looks like a single Christian grave without a headstone. 

QRS 83/7 (Lat. -20.06907/Long. 17.0947) is situated beneath a large tress close to the farmhouse. The 

four Christian graves are surrounded by a stone-wall. Two graves have grey marble headstones and the 

inscription is clearly visible. The two remaining graves have thick lead plates set onto the headstones 

and on these the inscription are barely legible. 

The provisional significance ratings (ranging from 0 – 5) of QRS 83/4 – QRS 83/7 are rated as 3 which 

means that all four archaeological ‘sites forming part of an identifiable local distribution or group’. The 

vulnerability rankings (0 - 5) are rated as 2-3, translating as ‘low or indirect threat from possible 

consequences of development’ or ‘probable threat from inadvertent disturbance due to proximity of 

development’. 



4.9.3 SUMMARY 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-74 

Location QRS 83/1&2 of eighteen (18) cairns and Location QRS 83/3 of approximately twelve (12) graves 

are both sites of high significance and vulnerability. At present it is recommended that both sites are 

fenced off for the time being. 

Four Christian burial sites on farms Gerhardshausen and Okaputa Nerd (also named Felsenquelle) are 

reasonably visible and their location is well known to the present property owner. As the farms might be 

bought by the client it is important to integrate these sites with the project Global Information System 

(GIS), to ensure that they can be taken into account in the planning of further exploration and possible 

mining development. 

All sites are protected by the Burial Ordinance. 

4.10 VISUAL BACKGROUND 


A site visit was conducted by VRM in October 2010 and a preliminary report was submitted in December 

2010. A follow on report was completed in May 2012. The information provided below is taken from the 

Visual Impact Assessment – Proposed Otjikoto Gold Mining Project’, (VRM, May 2012). The report is 

attached in Appendix J 

Visual impact is defined as ‘The effect of an aspect of development on a specified component of the 

visual, aesthetic or scenic environment within a defined time and space.’ 53 As identified in this definition, 

‘landscapes are considerably more than just the visual perception of a combination of landform, 

vegetation cover and buildings as they embody the history, land use, human culture, wildlife and seasonal 

changes to an area.’ 54 These elements combine to produce distinctive local character that will affect the 

way in which the landscape is valued and perceived. 

The study made use of the Visual Resource Management (VRM) methodology. 55 This is a systematic 

process developed by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) from the United States Department of 

Internal Affairs to evaluate potential visual impacts associated with landscape modifications. 

4.10.2 VISUAL DESCRIPTION OF SITE 

The project area is covered by Tree and Shrub Savannah type vegetation. This is the dominant 

vegetation type in central Namibia. An ephemeral pan, situated on farms Otjikoto and Gerhardshausen, is 

surrounded by woody species, whereas the rest of the project area is composed of thorn bush thicket. 

53 Oberholzer, B. 2005. Guideline for involving visual and aesthetic specialists in EIA processes: Edition 1. 

CSIR Report No ENV-S-C 2005 053 F. Republic of South Africa, Provincial Government of the Western 

Cape, Department of Environmental Affairs and Development Planning, Cape Town 

54 U.K Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA, ‘Guidelines for Landscape and 

Visual Impact Assessment’, Second Edition, Spon Press, 2002., Pg 9. 

55 Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of Interior. 2004. Visual Resource Management Manual 

8400 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-75 

Figure 4-28shows the topography of the area and figure 4-29andfigure 4-30show photographs of the 

site’s open space sense of place. 

FIGURE 4-28: SITE TOPOGRAPHIC AND RIDGE MAP 



FIGURE 4-29: GPS 3 SHOWING LANDSCAPE CHARACTER OF EXISTING CATTLE FARM 

FIGURE 4-30: GPS1 VIEW NORTH-WEST TOWARDS PROPOSED SITE 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-76 



4.10.3 VIEWSHED 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-77 

A viewshed is ‘the outer boundary defining a view catchment area, usually along crests and ridgelines’. 56 

This reflects the area or extent where the landscape modification would probably be seen. However, 

visibility tends to diminish exponentially with distance which is well recognised in visual analysis 

literature. 57 Therefore the views of a landscape modification would not necessarily influence the 

landscape character within all areas of the viewshed. 

The area where a landscape modification does start to influence the landscape character is termed the 

Zone of Visual Influence (ZVI) and is defined by the U.K Institute of Environmental Management and 

Assessment (IEMA), ‘Guidelines for Landscape and Visual Impact Assessment’ as the ‘area within which 

a proposed development may have an influence or effect on visual amenity (of the surrounding areas).’ 

This concept is addressed in the VRM methodology Distance Ratings. These are defined by the Bureau 

of Land Management (U.S. Department of Interior) and subdivide the landscape into three distance 

zones based on the relative visibility from travel routes or observation points: 58 

� Foreground / Middle ground, up to approximately 6km, which is where there is potential for 

the sense of place to change; 

� Background areas, from 6km to 24km, where there is some potential for change in the 

sense of place, but would only take place with very large landscape modifications; and 

� Seldom seen areas which fall within the Foreground / Middle ground area, but as a result 

of no receptors, they are not viewed, or seldom viewed. 

As depicted in the Viewshed Map on Figure 4-31, the potential visible extent of the mining activities 

(without vegetation screening) shows two different scenarios: proposed infrastructure with a height of 

40m and proposed infrastructure with a height of 60m. Both scenarios extend extensively well beyond the 

24km buffer to the north-west due to the flat nature of the landscape. 

56 Oberholzer, B. 2005. Guideline for involving visual and aesthetic specialists in EIA processes: Edition 

1. CSIR Report No ENV-S-C 2005 053 F. Republic of South Africa, Provincial Government of the 

Western Cape, Department of Environmental Affairs and Development Planning, Cape Town. 

57 Hull, RB; Bishop, ID.Journal of Environmental Management. Vol 27, no. 1, pg 99-108. 

58 Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of Interior. 2004. Visual Resource Management 

Manual 8410 



FIGURE 4-31: VIEWSHED MAP. 

4.10.4 PHYSIOGRAPHIC RATING UNITS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-78 

During the study, the following criteria were used to undertake a broad-brush landscape characterization 

exercise to identify the dominant landscapes as well as to define the physiographic units within the 

defined Viewshed area. These are land parcels within the property which have physical as well as 

graphic similarities.’ 59 The assessment criteria are: 

� Similar visual patterns, texture, colour, variety (vegetation); 

� Like geographic character; 

� Similar impacts from manmade modifications (land use); 

� Areas of high prominence; and 

� Topography. 

As depicted on figure 4-32, the following landscapes were defined as falling within the ZVI of the 

proposed project. The landscape character of each physiographic rating unit PRU are: 

� Game farms; 

59 Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of Interior. 2004. Visual Resource Management 

Manual 8410 



� Agricultural; 

� Road/railway corridor; 

� Ephemeral pan; 

� Existing modified landscapes (e.g. from prospecting, power lines); and 

� Ridgeline. 

FIGURE 4-32: PHYSIOGRAPHIC RATING UNITS (PRU). 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-79 

In order to understand the landscape character, the major landscapes (PRUs) affecting the visual context 

within the ZVI were identified and rated in terms of the VRM Scenic Quality rating criteria, the sensitivity 

of the property and the distance of the property from major access routes and viewing points. 

4.10.5 SCENIC QUALITY 

The landscape character is defined as ‘the distinct and recognisable pattern of elements that occurs 

consistently in a particular type of landscape, and how this is perceived by people. It reflects particular 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-80 

combinations of geology, landform, soils, vegetation, land use and human settlement.’ It creates the 

specific sense of place or essential character and ‘spirit of the place’. 60 

Our visual sense of landscape is created by more than just a combination of landform, vegetation cover 

and buildings. The landscape represents the history, use of land, culture, wildlife and seasonal changes 

of an area, which combine to produce a distinctive local character and affect the way the landscape is 

experienced and valued. The landscape continually evolves in response to natural or manmade 

processes. 

In the visual resource inventory process, Scenic Quality is determined using seven key factors: landform, 

vegetation, water, colour, adjacent scenery, scarcity, cultural modifications. 

During the rating process, each of these factors is ranked on a comparative basis with similar features 

within the physiographic province. The evaluation of scenic quality is done in relation to the natural 

landscape. This does not mean that manmade features within a landscape necessarily detract from the 

scenic value. Manmade features that compliment the natural landscape may enhance the scenic value. 

Landscape type TOTAL Scenic Quality 

Game farms 12 B - Medium 

Cattle farms 8 C - Low 

Main tarred road/Railway corridor 12 B - Medium 

Ephemeral pan 16 B - Medium 

Minor gravel road 12 B - Medium 

Ridgeline 12 B - Medium 

Game Farms 

Landform: The game farming areas are located more to the south-east of the site and 

closer to the more tourist-related area of the Waterberg National Park. Landform 

is mainly uniform, with slight undulations and some small hilly outcrops 

(Doppelkopf). 

Vegetation: Although the field study did not extend to this area, the vegetation appears 

Water: None 

similar to the Tree and Shrub Savannah vegetation of the site. The vegetation 

type is interesting but fairly common. 

Adjacent Scenery: Colours are subtle and mostly secondary and tertiary. The adjacent scenery is 

Cultural 

Modifications: 

similar. 

Cultural modifications are limited, which increases the wilderness landscape 

character and adds value to the area as a tourist destination. A NamPower 

60 U.K Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA), ‘Guidelines for Landscape and 

Visual Impact Assessment’ Second Edition, Spon Press, 2002.Pg 120/121. Latin genius locī :genius, 

spirit + locī, genitive sing. of locus, place 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-81 

200KV powerline lies in the vicinity of the game farming area, which runs 

between the region and the site. The power line, at the entrance to the 

Kambaku Game Lodge, detracts from the sense of place within a 1km buffer 

from the line. 

Scenic Quality: The overall scenic quality of this area is defined as moderate. 

Cattle Farms 

Landform: The cattle farming areas are very similar in landscape character to the game 

farming areas, but with less undulation of terrain. This reinforces the uniformity 

of the terrain and vegetation. 

Vegetation: Veldt grasses, used as a source of cattle food, have been allowed to grow in 

Water: None 

some areas of the natural tree and shrub vegetation. 

Adjacent Scenery: The adjacent scenery is similar. 

Cultural 


The area reflects more cultural modifications, as the farms are smaller in size 

and have more dwellings. 

Scenic Quality: As a result of these cultural modifications, and the uniformity of the landscape 

Road / Rail Infrastructure 

with low scarcity, the scenic quality of the area would be moderate to low. 

Landform: The landscape is uniform, but with slight undulations, which localize the visibility. 

Vegetation: The vegetation has been mainly removed for safety reasons, but the vegetation 

zone between the road and the rail is a vital component of the landscape 

character. This visual screening contains the views from the road and effectively 

creates a corridor effect. Due to probable higher moisture from road run-off and 

access to more sunlight from road clearing, the trees adjacent to the road are 

also slightly larger than the surrounding bush, which increases the vegetation 

value for this landscape. 

Colours Mid to light tone ochres, greens and greys are predominant. 

Water: None apparent 

Adjacent Scenery: Similar in landform, vegetation and colour. 

Scarcity: Clearing of the bush by cattle farmers, and the buffer between the road and the 

Cultural 


site, increases the scarcity of the road / rail corridor. The section of the road in 

the vicinity of the mine still has a strong corridor effect. 

Well balanced with a visual separation of the road and rail. The vegetation 

dominates the view. 

Scenic Quality: Due to the increased size of the trees with a corridor effect, as well as the 

scarcity of the adjacent trees, the scenic quality of the road / rail corridor is 

moderate. 



Minor Road 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-82 

Landform: A uniform landscape, but with slight undulations, which localize the visibility. 

Vegetation: The vegetation grows close to the road, creating a narrow cutting through the 

Water: None 

thick bush. This increases the value of the scenic quality. 


Cultural 


Modifications are limited to the extent of the road. 

Scenic Quality: Although the narrow road cuts though the bush, it does increase the value. The 

Ephemeral Pan 

feature is fairly common in the area and the scenic quality is moderate to low. 

Landform: The shallow bowl effect of the landscape in this area increases the scenic 

quality. 

Vegetation: According to the Preliminary Environmental and Social Impact Assessment, the 

ephemeral pan has marginal vegetation, but a diverse species composition. 

Some areas have been cultivated or heavily grazed. Other areas appear 

relatively pristine. 61 

Water: During the rainy season, if the pan fills with water, then the water would create a 

strong focal point, adding value to the scenic quality of the surrounds. 

Adjacent Scenery: The scenery is fairly common within the area, with slightly undulating terrain and 

Cultural 


uniform vegetation. 

From a visual perspective, the cultural modifications are limited and the natural 

vista has value. 

Scenic Quality: Due to the presence (inference) of water, and the scarcity of the feature, the 

Ridgeline 

scenic quality of the area is moderate to high. 

Landform: The underlying geology of the area has resulted in a sight elevation due to 

weather resistant rock. In a mainly flat terrain, the slight elevation does increase 

the value of this area. 

Vegetation: Similar to the surrounding Tree and Shrub Savannah type. 

Water: None 


Cultural 


Limited to cattle farming activities which do not dominate the landscape. 

Scenic Quality: Due to the increased scarcity of this subtle landform, the scenic quality is 

61 ASEC. Preliminary Environmental and Social Impact Assessment of the proposed Otjikoto Mine Project 

for Auryx Gold Corporation. September 2010. Pg 49 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


moderate to low. 

4.10.6 KEY OBSERVATION POINTS 

Page 4-83 

Key Observation Points (KOPs) are defined by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) Visual Resource 

Management, as the people located in strategic locations surrounding the property that make consistent 

use of the views associated with the site where the landscape modifications are proposed. These 

locations are important in terms of the VRM methodology as it requires that the degree of contrast that 

the proposed landscape modifications will make to the existing landscape is measured from these most 

critical locations within the zone of visual influence. 62 

Surrounding the proposed site are the following receptors: 

� B1 National Road northbound and southbound; 

� D2808 district road; 

� Receptors alongside the site such as Okariuputa Game Farm; 

� The farm north of the site, Erhardtshof; 

� Okapuka Nord, a game farm immediately to the south which is part of a conservancy; 

� A smallholding on the B1 National Road at Platveld; and 

� Kambaku Safari Lodge and Game Farm to the east of the site. 63 

4.10.7 SUMMARY 

As a result of the moderate levels of landscape character, only the core receptors were identified as Key 

Observation Points (KOPs). The following KOPs were selected to be assessed in the Contrast Rating 

stage in order to determine visual impacts: 

� B1 northbound; 

� B1 southbound; and 

� Cattle farm/ D2808 eastbound. 

4.11 Noise 


The information provided in this baseline description is taken from the ‘Noise Impact Study for 

Environmental Impact Assessment’ undertaken by M2 Environmental Connections. The full report is 

included in Appendix G. 

62 

Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of Interior. 2004. Visual Resource Management Manual 

8400 

63 

ASEC. Preliminary Environmental and Social Impact Assessment of the proposed Otjikoto Mine Project 




4.11.2 NOISE SENSITIVE DEVELOPMENTS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-84 

Noise-Sensitive Developments (NSDs) were initially identified using Google Earth ® , supported by a site 

visit to confirm the status of the identified dwellings. 

The reason for the site visit, apart from sampling ambient sound levels, is that there could be a number of 

deserted or abandoned dwellings that could be seen as a sensitive receptor, or small dwellings that could 

not be identified on the aerial image, or those that were built after the date of the aerial photograph. 

4.11.3 CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL SOUND CHARACTER 

4.11.3.1 Measurement Techniques 

Ambient (background) noise levels were measured at appropriate times in accordance with the South 

African National Standard SANS 10103:2008 "The measurement and rating of environmental noise with 

respect to land use, health, annoyance and to speech communication". The equipment used to gather 

data were a Sound Level Meter (SLM) a Microphone (which was fitted with an appropriate windshield), a 

Preamplifier, a Calibrator and an Anemometer. 

Measurements were taken during the day and early morning on 1 and 2 November 2010 respectively. 

The sound measuring equipment was referenced directly before, and directly after the measurement was 

taken. In all cases drift was less than 0.2 dBA from the 94 dBA reference signals. 

4.11.3.2 On-Site Measurement 

Measurements were taken during the day and early morning on 1 and 2 November 2010 respectively. 

The sound measuring equipment was referenced directly before, and directly after the measurement was 

taken. In all cases drift was less than 0.2 dBA from the 94 dBA reference signal. 

The locations used to measure ambient (background) sound levels are presented in figure 4-33. These 

points are considered sufficient to determine the ambient (background) sound levels in the area. The 

results are presented in table 4-14below. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-85 

FIGURE 4-33: MONITORING POINTS SELECTED NEAR THE PROPOSED SITE (MARKED AS BLUES 

SQUARES) 

TABLE 4-14: RESULTS OF AMBIENT SOUND LEVEL MONITORING (DATUM TYPE: UTM, ZONE 33 

SOUTH) 

Point name Co-ordinates 

East, South 

Wind speed 

Ave. (m/s) 

LAeq,T 

(dBA) 

LA90 

(dBA) 

LA, max 

(dBA) 

LA, min 

(dBA) 

Temp 

( o C) 

Humidity 

(%) 

AG01 (D) 719959 7794918 1.9 42.4 33.5 57.2 29.3 35.5 19.0 

AG02 (D) 724068 7791125 2.7 40.8 33.9 51.0 28.6 34.5 16.6 

AG03 (D) 726694 7784209 1.7 34.0 22.4 49.3 18.6 34.3 17.6 

AG04 (N) 717386 7790734 0.4 65.6 20.5 89.7 18.4 16.1 30.4 

AG05 (N) 718350 7790431 0.1 41.5 24.1 41.5 19.4 15.6 30.0 

AG06 (N) 719286 7790139 1.3 28.3 21.8 53.5 17.9 15.1 32.9 

From the data obtained, it can be seen that the ambient daytime sound levels ranges between 22.4 

(LA,90) and 18.6 (LA,min) dBA. The average ambient night-time sound levels (LA,90) ranged between 20.5 

and 15.1 dBA (LA,min). All samples illustrate the rural character of the area during periods with light winds 

and mainly natural sounds defining the acoustic character, the area is considered rural. According to 

South African National Standard (SANS) 10103:2008, the maximum average ambient noise levels for 

rural residential areas are 45dBA (day) and 35dBA (night). 



4.11.4 SUMMARY 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 4-86 

Based on these observations it is suggested that ambient noise levels of 22.4 -18.6 dBA and 20.5 – 15.1 

dBA for the day and night, respectively, be used as a reference for calculating the impact caused by the 

proposed Otjikoto mining operation. 



5 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 


SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-1 

The Otjikoto Project area can be reached from the capital city, Windhoek, some 300 km to the south 

along the B1 national road, which is a surfaced road in excellent condition. Windhoek is connected by 

direct commercial air travel from several European countries, South Africa and other African countries. 

The large regional town of Tsumeb, a mining centre in its own right, is located some 110 km north of the 

project area, also along the B1 road. A domestic airport is located at Tsumeb, currently with both 

scheduled and charter flights connecting with Windhoek. The smaller town of Otavi lies some 50 km 

north from the Otjikoto Project area near the cross roads of the main north-south National Road B1, the 

road to Grootfontein and the road to Outjo. Otavi is also on the north-south railway line that was 

constructed to transport goods from Tsumeb to Swakopmund and Walvisbay. Otjiwarongo lies some 70 

km southwest from the Otjikoto Project area and is situated on the B1. Internal access to the project area 

is via a well-maintained network of secondary roads and farm tracks. Given the arid climate of the area, 

these roads are generally passable all year-round. 

The project description has been separated into the following phases: construction, operation, 

decommissioning and closure. These phases are described below. A site plan of the proposed Otjikoto 

mine development is provided as Figure 5-1. 

5.2 CONSTRUCTION PHASE 

The purpose of the construction phase is primarily to establish the infrastructure and activities required for 

the operational phase. The construction phase will commence in Q1 2013 and last for approximately two 

years. 

A summary of the key construction facilities, activities and other construction related issues are discussed 

below. 

5.2.1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 

The fence around the construction site will be the final fencing required for the plant. It will be 2.4 m high, 

with barbed wire at the top. Site access will be controlled via a boomed entrance, which will also be 

locked outside of normal working hours. These areas will be fenced and will incorporate some or all of 

the facilities described below: 

� Workshop and maintenance areas; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-2 

� Stores for storing and handling fuel, lubricants, solvents, paints and construction materials; 

� Bunded areas for waste handling and storage; 

� Contractors lay-down areas; 

� Mobile site offices; 

� Temporary first aid station; 

� Explosive magazines; 

� Temporary accommodation camp; 

� Waste collection and storage areas; 


� Parking area for cars and equipment; 


� Clean water reservoir; 

� Canteen; 


� Temporary power and water supply infrastructure; 

� Storage yard for Capital and First Fill items; and, 

� Fire fighting station. 



FIGURE 5-1: PROPOSED MINE LAYOUT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-3 



5.2.2 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-4 

Construction activities will take place during the establishment and preparation of the site for mining and 

the mineral processing plant. Early mining activities, such as soil stripping, removal of bushes in the 

construction area and pit area and the stripping of the overburden / waste removal will coincide with the 

construction phase. A table of construction activities is provided in Table 5-1. The “x’s” in the table 

indicate which activities may be associated with the construction of the various infrastructure items. 

5.2.3 TOPSOIL MANAGEMENT 

Topsoil is to be stripped to a depth of 300 mm from all areas that are planned to be disturbed. This would 

include all the contractor laydown areas, plant and mining complex, construction camp area and mine 

workshops and offices. This topsoil will be placed in stockpiles and will be considered a future 

rehabilitation growth medium. Topsoil from the internal access roads and, the mining haul roads and 

power lines will be placed in low windrows. 

The greatest volumes of topsoil will be from the surface area of the open pit area, run of mine (RoM) 

stockpile and the mineralised waste facilities. The topsoil will be removed in advance of the mine and 

mineralised waste facilities’ development and stockpiled in berms. 

5.2.4 CONSTRUCTION TRANSPORT 

The mine is located on an existing district road, the D2808. Provision for the relocation of the road to the 

northern boundary of the mine property has been made. The road will include a new intersection on the 

B1 road with a rail crossing. The road will be tarred for the first 250 m past the rail crossing. The 

remainder of the road will run parallel to the farm boundary (250 meters off of the boundary) and turn 

southwest along the farm boundary and join the current road as it passes over the farm boundary in a 

south easterly direction. 

During the construction of the project there will be a limited increase in the number of people carrying 

vehicles travelling to and from site and there will be an increase in heavy vehicles (approximately 10 to 20 

a day) supplying input materials. While most people will be based on site during construction, there will be 

a regular bus service (approximately 4 trips a day) from Otavi and Otjiwarongo to site. 



TABLE 5-1: CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 

Activity 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-5 

A1 Earthworks: Drilling and blasting activities x 

A2 Earthworks: Cleaning and grubbing and bulldozing 

activities 

Site offices and admin 

facilities 

Process plant, mine 

complex, workshops 

Sewage treatment plant 

On site power 

infrastructure 

On site Water 


Otjikoto Gold Mine EIA Report July 2012 

Contractors camp and 

lay-down 

Pit development 

Run of mine storage 

Mineralised waste 

facilities & stockpiles 

x x x x x x x x x x x 

A3 Earthworks: Soil excavation x x x x x x x x x x x 

A4 Earthwork: Stockpiling of topsoil and other material x x x x x x x x x x x 

A5 Disposal or treatment of contaminated soil x x x x x x x x x x x 

A6 Backfill of material (specific grade) from borrow pits x 

A7 Opening and management of borrow pits x 

A8 Construction and use of new on site roads – clearing 

of areas 

x x x x x x x x x 

A9 Civil works: Foundation excavations x x x x x x x x x x 

A10 Building activities x x x x x x x x x x 

A11 Storage and handling of material: Sand, rock, 

cement, chemical additives in cements 

x x x x x x x x x x 

On site roads 

Explosives magazine


Activity 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



facilities 

Page 5-6 

A12 Water utilization x x x x x x x x 

A13 Mixing of concrete (batch plant) and concrete work 

(casting) 

A14 Operation and movement of construction vehicles 

and machinery 




On site power 


On site Water 




lay-down 







A15 Refuelling of equipment x x x 

A16 Use of cranes x x x x x x 

A17 Erection and dismantling of scaffolding x x x x x 

A18 Building of shutters x x x x 

A19 Installing re-enforcement Steel x x x 

A20 Handling, storage and disposal of hazardous waste 

� Blasting media packing material 

� Empty paint containers 

� Cements bags 

� Chemical additives (for cement) 

containers 

� Contaminated PPE 

x x x x x x x x 

On site roads 

Explosives magazine


Activity 

� Redundant concrete 

� Earth moving tyres 

� Oil contaminated waste 

� Used oils and grease 

A21 Handling, storage and disposal of non-hazardous 

waste 

� Steel off-cuts 

� Domestic waste 

� Wood off-cuts 

� Grinding wheels 

� Other construction waste 

� Building rubble and concrete 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



facilities 




On site power 


Page 5-7 

On site Water 




lay-down 






A22 Transportation of hazardous material x x x x x x 

A23 Transportation of non-hazardous material x x x x x x x x x x x 

A24 Handling and storage of hazardous material 

� Blasting media 

� Lubricants, fuel 

� Paints 

� Gas (welding) 

� Cement 


On site roads 

Explosives magazine


Activity 

� Chemical additives for cement 

A25 Installation of pipelines for water and process 

solutions (Above ground) 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



facilities 




On site power 


Page 5-8 

On site Water 




lay-down 

x x x x x x x 

A26 Installation of electricity lines x x x x x x x x x x 

A27 Use of electricity generators x x x x x x x x x x x 

A28 Installation of transformers x x x 

A29 Construction of parking bay for trucks x x x 

A30 Manage construction site x x x x x x x x x x x 

A31 Painting, grind and welding x x x x x x x x x x 

A32 Provision and operation of water for washing and 

toilet facilities 

A33 Slope stabilization and erosion control (where 

required) 


x x x x x x x 




x x x x x x x x 

A34 Appointment of contractors, labourers, etc. x x x x x x x x x x x 

On site roads 

Explosives magazine


5.2.5 EMPLOYMENT AND HOUSING 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-9 

The labour requirements for the construction phase (for the plant and TDF) will be to a maximum number 

at any time of around 800 skilled and unskilled workers, most of which will be housed in a dedicated 

Construction Camp which will be situated on the farm Wolfshag, about 800 meters from the plant 

construction site. 

Mining operations will also kick off during the construction phase and the number of personnel involved 

with mining operations during year one will be 188. This number will gradually increase to around 300 at 

the peak of production. Most of the permanent employees will be housed either in Otavi or Otjiwarongo. 

Process and management staff will also be recruited during the construction phase and the numbers will 

increase from around five initially to around 135 at full production. These employees will also be housed 

at either Otavi or Otjiwarongo. 

5.2.6 WATER SUPPLY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 

Water will be supplied from boreholes (pre-sunk and equipped prior to construction) and pumped to a 

temporary tank with a polyvinyl chloride (“PVC”) piping distribution network throughout the construction 

site. Borehole water will be supplied for showers and ablution facilities. Bottled water will be supplied for 

drinking during the period when the Potable supply facility is still not commissioned and in operation. 

5.2.7 POWER SUPPLY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 

Temporary construction power (400 V) will be supplied from the 33 kV line that feeds the existing 

homestead supply. It is anticipated that camp consumption during construction will be 400 MWh/month 

at a maximum demand of 850 kW and that construction power usage will be 30 MWh/month at a 

maximum demand of 150 kW. 

5.2.8 SANITATION FOR CONSTRUCTION 

Initially, portable toilets with associated septic tanks will be used until such time as the permanent 

infrastructure is established. Sewage from ablution and wash facilities as well as grey water from the 

kitchens will gravitate towards septic tanks positioned at the lowest point in the construction areas. A 

sewage truck will collect and transport sewage to Otavi or Otjiwarongo for treatment and disposal by the 

local municipalities. 

The same arrangements will apply for the handling of sewage and other effluents from the Construction 

Camp. 

5.2.9 MEDICAL SERVICE 

Medical surveillance and testing will be conducted at approved facilities in Otjiwarongo. Emergency 

facilities and hospitals are available at Otjiwarongo. A first aid station (manned with qualified personnel) 

will be located at the construction site. 



5.2.10 FIRE PROTECTION 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-10 

The fire truck for the plant will be procured at an early stage of the project to be delivered to site when 

construction commences. 

5.2.11 NON-MINERALIZED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION 

Waste will be separated at source, stored in a manner that there can be no discharge of contamination to 

the environment and either recycled or reused where possible. The remainder will be transported off site 

to appropriate recycling or disposal facilities (Otavi or Otjiwarongo for general waste and Walvis Bay for 

hazardous waste). A single waste management contractor will service the entire site. 

TABLE 5-2 presents the waste management specification that has been developed for the Otjikoto 

Project and outlines the waste management for all waste types. In summary, the types of non- 

mineralised waste expected to be generated during the construction phase include: 

� General waste (domestic waste and other non-hazardous waste) 

� Industrial waste 

� Hazardous waste 

TABLE 5-2: WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASE 

Waste type Waste specifics 

(example of 

waste types) 

Nonhazardous 

solid waste 

(nonmineralised) 

Hazardous 

contaminated 

solid waste 

(nonmineralised). 

Pallets and 

wooden crates, 

cable drums, scrap 

metal, general 

domestic waste 

such as food and 

packaging 

Building rubble and 

waste concrete 

Treated timber 

crates, printer 

cartridges, 

batteries, 

fluorescent bulbs, 

paint, solvents, tar, 

empty hazardous 

material containers 

etc. 

Hydrocarbons 

(oils, grease) 

Storage facility End use 

Skips in relevant work areas 

will be provided for different 

waste types. A waste 

management contractor will 

remove skips regularly to a 

dedicated waste handling and 

storage area. 

Designated rubble collection 

points will be determined to 

which contractors will take 

rubble and concrete. 

Hazardous waste will be 

separated at source and 

stored in designated 

containers in bunded work 

areas. The waste 


remove these drums regularly 

to a dedicated waste handling 

and storage area. 

Used oil and grease will be 

stored in drums in bunded 

Waste will be sorted further at a 


storage area. Recyclable waste 

will be sent to a reputable 

recycling company. Some items 

may be distributed directly to the 

community such as pallets and 

wooden crates. The remainder 

of the waste will be transported 

by the waste management 

contractor to a permitted general 

landfill facility in Otavi or 

Otjiwarongo for disposal. 

The waste management 

contractor will regularly remove 

the waste from the designated 

collection points to the footprint 

of the waste rock dump. 


disposed of at the permitted 

hazardous disposal site in Walvis 

Bay by the waste management 

contractor. 

Used oil will be sent to a 

reputable recycling company for 




(example of 

waste types) 

Medical 

waste 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



areas at key points in work 

areas. The bunds will be able 

to accommodate 110 % of the 

container contents and include 

a sump and oil trap. The 

waste management contractor 

will remove these drums 

regularly to a dedicated waste 

handling and storage area. 

The yard will have a dedicated 

used oil storage area which 

will include a concrete slab, 

proper bunding and an oil 

sump. The appointed bulk fuel 

supplier will collect used oil for 

recycling. 

Sewage Sewage will be collected and 

stored in a septic tank on site. 

Syringes, material 

with blood stains, 

bandages, etc. 

5.2.12 CONCURRENT MINING OPERATIONS 

Medical waste will be stored in 

sealed containers at the clinic. 

A waste management 

contractor will remove these 

drums regularly to a dedicated 

waste handling and storage 

area. 

recycling. 

Page 5-11 

Sewage will be collected on a 

regular basis and transported for 

treatment at the municipal 

sewage treatment facilities in 

Otavi or Otjiwarongo. 

Medical waste will be transported 


contractor to a permitted medical 

waste treatment facility in 

Otjiwarongo. 

The commencement of mining operations (pit development etc.) will start during the construction phase, 

and the required permanent offices, workshops, operator’s messing area and laydown areas will be 

established during the construction phase. This will allow for the transition into the operational phase. 

The explosive magazines will also be commissioned during the construction phase. The explosive 

magazine will allow storage of detonators, detonator cords and boosters. The prills and emulsion will be 

stored separately. 

5.3 OPERATIONAL PHASE 

5.3.1 SITE FACILITIES FOR OPERATIONS 

The operational phase will consist of the following on-site facilities (some of these facilities are indicated 

on Figure 5-1): 

� Single open pit; 

� RoM stockpiles; 

� RoM pad; 



� Processing plant; 

� Mine dewatering settling ponds 

� Access roads and haul roads; 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-12 

� Mineralised waste disposal facilities (Waste rock dump, Low grade dump, and a high sulphide 

tailings facility) and associated Offices and ablution facilities; 

� Explosives magazine; 

� Soil stockpiles; 

� Conveyors (in the plant, between plant and RoM complex); 

� Workshops; 


� Tyre bay for changing tyres on vehicles; 

� Refuelling areas; 

� Hazardous substances storages areas; 

� Salvage yard and temporary non mineralised waste handling facilities; 

� Stores (Plant and mine complexes); 

� On site water supply infrastructure; 

� Compressed air supply station; 

� Storm water management facilities; 

� Water treatment facility; 

� Clean and dirty water holding facilities; 

� On site power supply infrastructure; 



� Medical First Aid station facilities; 

� Sewage treatment plant; 

� Weighbridge; 

� Loading and off-loading areas; 

� Administration offices; 

� Parking areas; 

� Security infrastructure; 

� Laboratory; 

� Communication infrastructure; and, 

� Lighting infrastructure. 



5.3.2 OPERATION PHASE ACTIVITIES – MINING 

5.3.2.1 Ore Body 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-13 

The Otjikoto gold deposit presents as a shallow dipping, sheeted vein system within a package of 

metasediments comprising marbles, albitites and hornfelsbiotiteschists of the Karibib Formation. The 

deposit is situated within the northern zone of the DamaraOrogen, approximately 1 km northwest of the 

“Main Marble Marker”, which comprises an open synformal structure immediately east of the deposit. 

Gold mineralisation is associated with a fabric parallel sheeted vein system. Typically, the widths of the 

individual veins vary between 1 cm and 10 cm, with an apparent strong correlation between vein density 

and grade. The mineralogy of the veins is characterised by varying amounts of pyrrhotite, magnetite and 

pyrite. 

Associated with these minerals are almandine garnets, amphibole and free gold. At present, the 

mineralisation is interpreted as being of metamorphogenic origin. The mineralised package, referred to 

as the OTC Zone, is between 30 m and 40 m thick and has been traced over a strike distance of 

approximately 1.5 km. Within the OTC Zone, two separate mineralised packages have been identified 

based on vein density and grade distribution, namely the Upper Zone and the Lower Zone 1. 

5.3.2.2 Mine Plan 

The mine methodology of conventional open pit mining (that is, drill and blast followed by load and haul) 

will be employed at the Otjikoto Project. Mine production has been scheduled at 2.4 million tonnes per 

annum (mtpa). Actual mining will take place up to year 10 after which the low grade material will be 

reclaimed from the low grade dump and will be processed in years 11 and 12. The stripping ratio 

increases gradually from 7.19 to 9.37 over the LoM with the average stripping ratio over the LoM being 

7.32. Maximum tonnes moved over the LoM will be 28 mtpa. 

Drilling and blasting would be performed on 5 m high benches in the mineralised zones and a 110 tonne 

hydraulic excavator will be employed to load the 5 m high flitches. The waste benches will be mined in a 

bulk mining approach where drilling and blasting will be performed on 10 m high benches and a 190 

tonne hydraulic face shovel be utilised to load the full 10 m bench. In both cases 100 tonne capacity off- 

highway dump trucks will be used and standard open-cut drilling and auxiliary equipment be required. 

The ultimate pit will have two ramp systems in the north which will be used for ore and waste hauling. 

The dimensions of the pit are as follows: 

Length 2 060 m; 

Width 635 m; 

Depth 245 m; 

Area 931 057 m 2 (93.10 ha). 



5.3.2.3 Drilling and Blasting Operations 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-14 

Rock fragmentation will be undertaken by drilling and blasting and it is assumed that all of the material to 

be mined at the project will require blasting. The pit configuration bench height (5m for ore benches and 

10 m for waste benches) and material type suit a drill rig capable of drilling drill holes with a diameter of 

up to 171 mm. For this project a 403 kW diesel crawler down the hole (DTH) hammer drill rig has been 

selected for the production holes for the ore and waste benches and the wall control blasting holes. Drill 

burden, spacing and sub-drill design will be functions of inter alia the selected powder factor, required 

fragmentation and type of explosives to be used. 

5.3.2.4 Load and Haul Operations 

The overall scale of mining envisaged at the project is medium size with a total material movement of 

approximately 28 mtpa. As a result of the limited extent of mineralisation, with its narrow mineralisation 

envelopes, it is envisaged that selective mining will be necessary and, as such, the scale of the ore 

mining operation would be smaller compared to the waste mining operation. 

For the waste mining operation it is envisaged that large hydraulic excavators of up to 840 kW and a fleet 

of 100t capacity rigid dump trucks will be suitable, while the ore mining fleet will comprise of 570 kW 

excavators and 100t capacity rigid dump trucks. 

The mining operation will excavate and load the ore and waste in accordance with the marked ore and 

waste boundaries and ensure minimum contamination and maximum recovery of ore. The ore will be 

hauled to a single RoM pad located north-west of the pit exit. 

Waste, which includes barren material and mineralised material with a grade lower than 0.4 g/t, will be 

dumped on the waste rock dump. All low-grade material, with a grade range of between 0.4 g/t to 0.6 g/t, 

will be stockpiled separately for post-mining reclamation and processing. 

5.3.2.5 Other Mining Activities 

All haul roads, dumps and stockpiles that will be required for the LoM will be constructed during the first 

year of mining. In-pit water management will mainly consist of run-off control and temporary sumps at 

the lowest elevation in the pit. A mobile trailer-mounted pit-dewatering pump will pump excess water to 

the mine return water dam close to the plant to be used as processing water. 

5.3.3 OPERATION PHASE ACTIVITIES – MINERAL PROCESSING 

The process plant is designed for 2.4 mtpa run of mine (RoM) ore feed. RoM ore will be fed to the 

Primary Crusher situated about 200m from the pit. The crushed rock from the Primary crusher will be 

delivered to the process plant by means of an 800 m conveyor belt, discharging into a storage stockpile. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-15 

The metallurgical processing route, which is indicated in Figure 5-2, is made up of the following major unit 

processes: 

� Single Stage Crusher; 

� Two stage milling, classification and gravity circuit; 

� Intensive Cyanidation of the Gravity Concentrate; 

� Cyanide Leaching of the mill cyclone overflow; 

� Carbon adsorption; and 

� Elution, electrowinning, regeneration and smelting. 

5.3.3.1 Ore Receipt and Primary Crushing 

RoM ore will be fed to the Primary Crusher from the mine pit by dump trucks and from the RoM stockpiles 

with Front end Loaders, which deliver their load into the RoM bin. A static grizzly on top of the RoM bin 

will ensure that a size fraction of less than 600 mm is fed to the primary crusher. A rock breaker will 

reduce the oversize material. An apron feeder will withdraw ore from the RoM bin to feed the Primary 

Crusher. The crusher product with a P80 of 150 mm will be discharged onto the conveyor belt feeding the 

Crushed ore Stockpile. 

5.3.3.2 Milling, Classifying, and Gravity Circuit 

Ore will be drawn from the crushed ore stockpile by belt feeders which then feed the two stage milling 

circuit. The milling circuit consists of a variable speed SAG (Semi-Autogenous Grinding) mill (7.3m 

diameter with an effective grinding length of 3.8m and with a 3,5 MW motor) as well as a Secondary Ball 

mill (4.58m diameter and 8.7 m length with a 2,9 MW motor). Steel balls (90mm diameter) will be added 

to the milling circuit using overhead magnets and chute systems. The SAG mill will discharge onto a 

double deck screen, cutting at 19mm and 2mm. The +2mm material will be recycled back to the SAG Mill 

feed though a secondary crusher circuit, while the -2mm material will report to the SAG mill discharge 

sump. The sump discharge will be pumped to a cluster cyclone for classification. The classification 

density will be controlled by adding process water to the SAG mill discharge sump. The slurry will be 

pumped to the classification cyclone cluster, which comprises of 500 mm diameter cyclones. The 

cyclone overflow will be directed to the Leach plant, while the Cyclone underflow will be directed to the 

secondary ball mill. The secondary ball mill discharge will be fed to a sump from which the slurry will be 

fed to the gravity concentration feed box. The milling circuit will be housed in a bunded area sized to 

contain the full volume of the mills, during a maintenance relining activity, including the balls. 

The gravity concentration feed box will feed the gravity scalping screens, which will ensure the removal of 

+2 mm particles. The oversize from the gravity scalping screens will be returned to the Secondary Ball 

mill feed box for further grinding while the undersize will proceed to the gravity concentrators. 



FIGURE 5-2: BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM OF THE METALLURGICAL PROCESSING ROUTE 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-16 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-17 

The gravity circuit will be equipped with two concentrators that produce a concentrate which will be 

treated in an intensive cyanidation (IC) step. The IC reactor will have a dedicated electrowinning system 

which recovers gold from the pregnant solution, ensuring that the gravity recovery of gold is carried out 

up to the point of electroplating in a secured gold room. 

The gravity concentrator will gravitate to the SAG mill discharge sump. The intensive cyanidation tailings 

will be pumped to the leach plant. The gravity concentrator circuit will be housed in a bunded area sized 

to contain the full volume of a catastrophic failure of the single largest vessel in the area. 

5.3.3.3 Cyanide Leach and Carbon Recovery Plant 

The overflow of the mill classification circuit cyclones will feed into the Leach feed thickener. The leach 

thickener underflow will be pumped to the leach circuit. The leach circuit will be made up of seven 

separate leach vessels which provide 48 hours leach time. Gold will be dissolved using cyanide in 

solution. Cyanide, lime and air will be added in the leach circuit to allow the maximum dissolution of gold 

during the leach process. 

The slurry containing the dissolved gold in solution will then be pumped to the Carbon in Pulp (CIP) 

circuit, consisting of six CIP tanks, where the dissolved Gold will be adsorbed onto activated carbon. In 

the CIP circuit, slurry and carbon will be transferred counter currently. Slurry will gravitate downstream 

from CIP tank to CIP tank via interstage screens and will launder through the CIP tanks while activated 

carbon will be pumped from tank to tank in a counter current direction. The CIP circuit will have a 

residence time of one hour per tank. 

The Leach and CIP circuits will be housed in a single bunded area, which will be sized to allow 

containment of a catastrophic failure of the single largest vessel in the area. 

All CIP tanks will be equipped with mechanical agitators that keep the slurry in suspension. Interstage 

screens will be used to transfer the slurry between the CIP tanks while recessed-impellor vertical spindle 

pumps will be used to transfer the carbon in a counter current direction. 

The loaded carbon from the first CIP tank will be pumped to the loaded carbon screen, with the undersize 

returning back to the tank and the oversize, loaded carbon, transferring to the acid wash hopper in the 

elution section of the plant. 

The CIP tailings slurry will pass over a carbon safety screen to prevent carbon losses to tailings. The 

screen oversize will be collected for gold recovery. The slurry passing through the safety screen will be 

routed to the cyanide destruction tank where the residual cyanide in solution will be reduced prior to 

being pumped to the high density thickener for dewatering at the TDF. The high density slurry will then 

be pumped to the TDF for deposition. 

The overflow from the high density thickener will be returned to the process water circuit for use 

throughout the Leach and CIP plants as required. 



5.3.3.4 Elution, Electrowinning and Regeneration 

Acid Wash and Elution 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-18 

Elution of the loaded carbon will be carried out in a ZADRA circuit using a 10 m 3 batch size for the elution 

circuit. It is intended to operate the elution column seven days per week with two strips per day. 

The loaded carbon will be sampled before the acid wash in order to determine the gold loading. Once 

sampled, the carbon will undergo acid washing. Acid washing will be carried out by circulating a dilute 

solution of approximately 3% hydrochloric acid through the carbon ahead of the elution column. This 

process dissolves calcium and magnesium carbonates that build up on the carbon pores and surface 

over time and block the adsorption or desorption of gold. The acid wash and pumping sequence will be 

automated. The dilute hydrochloric acid solution will be pumped in an upward direction through the 

activated carbon. The carbon will then be gravity transferred to the elution column. 

During elution of the gold from the carbon, a dilute solution of caustic sodium cyanide will be pumped 

through the column and in so doing the gold and any silver will be desorbed from the activated carbon. 

The solution will be heated through an oil heating system. After the elution process, the carbon will be 

transferred to the carbon regeneration kiln. 

Electrowinning 

The solution (eluate) exiting the column will be passed through a reclaim heat exchanger, where it will be 

cooled down by exchanging some of its heat with the eluent entering the column. Once the exit 

temperature is at the desired level, the eluate will be cooled down to 90°C by the reclaim heat exchanger 

before being directed to the electrowinning cells. 

The eluate will then be directed to the electrowinning cell header tank, from where the flow will be 

directed to the electrowinning cell for the recovery of gold. Once the gold solution has completed its flow 

through the cells, the spent electrolyte will combine in a common header and will gravitate to the eluent 

tank to complete the closed circuit. 

A fume extraction system will be installed to collect any poisonous and/or explosive gases that may 

evolve during electrowinning. 

Carbon Regeneration 

After the elution process is completed, the barren carbon will be pneumatically transferred from the 

elution column to the eluted carbon hopper. The carbon sludge will be dewatered before being fed to the 

carbon regeneration kiln. 

In the kiln the carbon will be heated to between 650°C and 750°C for half an hour to regenerate the 

carbon before it is recycled through the CIP circuit. Approximately 5% to 15% by weight of the carbon 

bed will be burnt off during the regeneration. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-19 

Regenerated carbon will then be discharged into a quench tank before being transferred via a vibrating 

screen into the regenerated carbon hopper. Thereafter a dewatering screen will be used to collect 

activated carbon particles that have broken down to less than 1 mm in size. 

The regenerated carbon that is larger than 1 mm in size will be returned to the adsorption circuit, where it 

will again cycle through the CIP leach tanks in a counter-current manner relative to the slurry. 

Calcining and Smelting 

Once plated with gold, the cathodes will be lifted from the electrowinning cells and then the gold will be 

removed before the cathodes are reused. The resulting gold sludge will be placed in calcining trays, 

which are used for drying the sludge. This will be achieved in a calcining oven which operates at 800°C. 

The dried product from the calcining oven will then be mixed with fluxes in a specified ratio. The mixture 

will then be transferred to a smelting crucible, which will then be placed in the smelting furnace, where it 

will be subjected to temperatures of between 1 200 and 1 400°C and melted in preparation for the final 

step in gold purification on site. 

Once the smelt is completed the now molten furnace charge will be poured into cascading bullion moulds 

mounted on a trolley. Owing to the significant difference in the density of gold and silver compared to the 

other contents of the furnace, charge bullion collects in the first mould, with any excess being collected in 

the second mould. Slag produced from the fluxes introduced in the furnace charge will be collected in the 

slag-collection crucible. Slag produced from the fluxes added to the furnace charge will be used to form 

a molten phase in which impurities in the gold sludge gather. In this way the gold bullion purity is 

improved. 

The bullion moulds will be cooled and the bullion will be solidified before the small amount of slag that 

invariably collects on the top is manually chipped off with a hammer. A prill will then be removed from the 

cleaned bullion bars for sampling purposes before the bars are stamped and stored in the bullion safe for 

transport to the refinery. 

The slag collected in this process will still contain some gold, and for this reason it will be treated through 

a slag crusher, pulveriser and shaking table to produce a concentrate which will be recycled in the 

furnace. 

The gold room will be equipped with a self-contained ventilation system to ensure that the environment is 

safe to work in should any hazardous fumes evolve during the smelting and pouring process. 

5.3.3.5 Reagents required in the plant 

Cyanide 

Cyanide will be dissolved in solution and used in the process to leach gold from ore. It will be received as 

solid sodium cyanide briquettes, which will be delivered in 25 kg water resistant bags in wooden crates. 

The cyanide will be stored before use in a dedicated area that will contain any spillage of cyanide. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-20 

The bags will be lifted by a hoist to the bag breaker above the make-up tank, and dissolved to the 

required concentration before being transferred to the storage tank ready for dosage into the process as 

required. The bag breaker will be sealed and ventilated through a scrubber to ensure a safe working 

environment. 

The sodium cyanide storage area will be a roofed structure with a specially prepared concrete base 

complete with plastic lining to prevent groundwater contamination by any spillages. The structure will 

have short berm walls and open sides to allow for adequate air circulation. The area will be fenced and 

access controlled to minimise the risk to the environment and personnel. Safe operating procedures will 

be used when unloading, mixing, transferring and handling cyanide in all forms (solid and solution), such 

procedures will be put in place prior to operation. 

Caustic soda 

Caustic will be used for acid neutralisation and eluent make-up. In order to make up a batch of caustic to 

the required strength, the required number of 25 kg bags will be fed to the make-up tank, making use of 

the bag breaker on the top of the tank. Once the required amount of water has been added to the tank, 

the make-up tank agitator will ensure that the caustic pearls are completely dissolved before the solution 

is transferred to the dosage tank. 

Caustic soda will be stored in a cool, dry, well ventilated, bunded area with physical barriers to prevent 

mixing with other products. The floor of the building will be concrete with suitable sealant. 

Hydrochloric Acid 

Hydrochloric acid will be delivered in 1,000 litre intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and will be diluted to 

33% strength. The IBCs will be returned to the supplier. When required, the IBCs will be transported by 

forklift from the store area to the point of use. Acid will then be gravitated into the diluted tanks. 

The IBCs will be stored in a covered steel structure with a bunded, concrete floor. The floor of the 

building will be concrete and designed to prevent contamination from any spillages. This area willalso 

have a sump to allow for recovery of any spillage. 

Flocculant 

Flocculant will be delivered in powder form and made up in a dedicated make-up plant. The addition rate 

of flocculant to the thickeners in the plant will be based on the flow of solids to the thickeners and the 

density of the underflow from the thickeners. 

Flocculants will typically be stored in 25 kg bags, with 40 bags loaded onto each pallet within a dry 

storage area. The floor of the building will be concrete and designed to prevent contamination from any 

spillages. 



Lime 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-21 

Lime will be used throughout the plant to control pH and in particular in the CIP circuit, where a relatively 

high pH is targeted for leaching. 

Burned lime will be delivered to site in 1 ton bags, which will be blown into a lime silo for storage. Milk of 

lime will then be made up for distribution through the plant. 

Sodium Metabisulphite (SMBS) 

SMBS will be used in the cyanide destruction step to render the tailings cyanide concentrations harmless. 

SMBS will be delivered in 1200 kg bags and will be kept in dry storage. The floor of the dry storage area 

will be concrete and designed to prevent contamination from any spillages of SMBS. 

Copper Sulphate 

Copper sulphate is a catalyst in the cyanide destruction reactions and will be delivered in 1000 kg bulk 

bags and kept in dry storage before use. The floor of the dry storage area will be concrete and designed 

to prevent contamination from any spillages of copper sulphate. 

Activated Carbon 

Coconut shell-activated carbon will be used in the plant for the adsorption of gold in the CIP circuit. This 

source of carbon will have high gold adsorption activity as well as good abrasion resistance properties. 

The carbon will be delivered in air-tight, 500 kg bags before being added to the circuit as required during 

operation. It will be stored in a closed and well-ventilated area, away from heat, ignition sources and 

combustible materials. 

Borax, Sodium Nitrate and Silica 

Both borax and silica will be used as fluxes in smelting of the gold sludge. They will form the slag phase 

of the molten liquids once the solids melt. 

These smelting reagents will be delivered in 25 kg bags and stored in a dedicated dry area of the gold 

room, the floor of which will be concrete and designed to prevent contamination from any spillages. 

5.3.4 MINERALIZED WASTE FACILITIES 

The following mineralised waste facilities are planned for this project: 

� Waste rock dump; 



� Low grade dump (waste rock); and 

� Tailings disposal facility. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-22 

The footprint sizes and final heights for the TDF and waste rock dump are summarised in Table 5-3. 

TABLE 5-3: TDF and Waste Rock Dump - General Dimensions 

Facility 

Footprint 

(ha) 

Max. Height 

(m) 

Tailings Disposal Facility 161 18 

Waste Rock Dump 217 40 

5.3.4.1 Waste Rock Dumps 

Two waste rock dumps will be generated, one comprising waste rock and the other low grade material. 

The low grade dump will be reclaimed and processed in the latter years of the LoM. The current 

production schedule does not allow for backfilling and thus all waste generated will be dumped on the 

waste rock disposal sites. Taking into consideration a degree of compaction on the dumps, an effective 

bulking factor of 32% was utilised. 

The footprint of the waste dump will be constructed from compacted calcrete layer with a drain system. 

During the active waste tipping phase the waste dump will be constructed at the material’s natural angle 

of repose of approximately 35 degrees. This will then be contoured to 18 degrees to allow for slope 

stability and re-vegetation. 

The key principles for the construction of the waste rock dump as per the preliminary environmental 

impact assessment were taken into consideration. Storm water diversion trenches will be constructed on 

the upstream side of the rock dump to prevent ingress of storm water beneath the dump and to facilitate 

clean/dirty water separation. Waste rock dump benches will be covered with a soil layer paddocked and 

vegetated as soon as practical after dumping. The top surface of the dump will be soil clad and graded 

back at a grade of approximately 1:200 to prevent ponding on the top surfaces. 

The waste rock will be placed mechanically with haul trucks. Storm water runoff from the side slopes will 

contain some eroded solids. A terraced side slope profile (including progressive rehabilitation) and 

catchment paddocks along the perimeter of the complex will be implemented in order to ensure runoff 

control and to prevent silt from discharging into the surrounding environment. The side slopes will be 

constructed to an average overall side slope angle of 1v:3h. 

Pollution control measures will be implemented in order to reduce acid rock drainage to an acceptable 

level of risk. These measures include base preparation in the form of compacted calcrete layers and 

vertical perimeter seepage cut-off trenches. 

Waste rock will also be required for the construction of mine infrastructure such as RoM pad and tailings 

disposal dam walls. 



5.3.4.2 Tailings Disposal Facility 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-23 

This final design for this dam will be determined once test work currently underway is completed. During 

the definitive feasibility study test work on the tailings stacking option and cyanide destruction options will 

be conducted. The results of this work will be used to finalise the tailings facility design before 

construction. Regardless of the test work results the dam will conform to international best practise and 

the international cyanide code. 

The TDF will accommodate tailings generated in the leaching section of the processing plant, which is 

estimated at 200 000 tpm for a design life of 12 years. 

The following points outline the design objectives for the TDF irrespective of the test work results: 

� Create a safe and stable TDF and minimise risk to human lives, health and property; 

� Create a design that will remain fit for the intended purpose and resist all external environmental 

influences that are reasonably likely to occur (sustainability); 

� Create a design that conserves all resources as far as possible, i.e. land area, water, airspace, 

topsoil, mineralisation and energy; 

� Comply with Namibian legal requirements (benchmarking against South African standards and 

best practice international standards); 

� Minimise environmental impacts; 

� Ensure separation of clean and dirty water; 

� Minimum storage of supernatant on the TDF; 

� Ensure cost-effective construction, operation and closure; 

� Situate the TDF in such a way that it does not sterilise any ore and is not in conflict with any 

mining activity; and 

� Locate the TDF on the mine property. 

Design Philosophy 

In order to comply with the design objectives, it was decided to opt for a high-density slurry disposal 

system. To achieve this, a high-density thickener system has been included in the layout. The low- 

density slurry, pumped from the process plant, will pass through the high-density thickener located at the 

tailings disposal facility from where it will be extracted as thickened slurry underflow for release into the 

basin of the storage facility. The bulk of the process water will be returned directly from the high-density 

thickener to the process plant. As a result, the slurry water in the deposition stream (thickener underflow) 

reduces significantly from approximately 1,22 to 0,66 m 3 per dry ton. 

When deposited in the tailings disposal facility basin, the thickened slurry underflow is expected to 

display the following characteristics (provided that thin layer deposition is achieved): 

� High viscosity; 

� Non-segregating; 

� High consolidation rates; 



� High dry density; and 

� Low permeability. 

As a result, the benefits can be summarised as follows: 

� Steeper beach angles - and therefore improved beach freeboard and a smaller pool area; 

� More efficient volumetric storage – higher average dry density; 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-24 

� Reduced risk for groundwater contamination – lower seepage rate as a result of lower average 

permeability and initial moisture content of non-segregated tailings; 

� Improved water return – returning the thickener overflow to the process plant reduces the 

evaporation and seepage losses that normally occur on the tailings disposal facility; 

� Higher allowable rate of rise–more rapid drying and self-weight consolidation of the tailings. 

� Reduced risk for structural instability-liquefaction potential is reduced when thin layer deposition 

is implemented through multiple discharge points and an optimised deposition cycle. This 

achieves rapid drying to maximum density and shear strength; and 

� Accelerated rehabilitation - more rapid consolidation and drying, allowing earlier access to the top 

surface of the facility. 

Disadvantages of implementing a high-density tailings disposal system include: 

� The additional capital cost associated with the purchase of thickening and pumping equipment; 

and 

� High-density tailings disposal systems may be more prone to pipeline blockages and contingency 

measures may be required to ensure operational continuity. 

The high-density thickener system will be located at the TDF in order to eliminate the requirement for 

positive displacement pumps, which will result in high capital and operating costs. The installation of the 

thickener at the TDF will also allow the facility operator to control the thickener operation to suit 

deposition requirements (i.e. rheology control etc.). 

The design components associated with the thickener system can be summarised as follows: 

� A 20 m-diameter paste thickener; 

� The thickener plant will have its own SCADA facility; 

� A dedicated flocculent plant will service the thickener plant; 

� Duty and standby trains of centrifugal pumps will pump thickened underflow via a single duty 

pipeline from the thickener to several deposition points along the perimeter of the TDF. Under 

normal conditions the high-density slurry can be pumped up to a distance of approximately two 

kilometres and all discharge points can be utilised if the stream is split into a clockwise and anti- 

clockwise direction at the perimeter impoundment embankment; 

� Emergency paddocks will allow containment of potential spills from the slurry delivery system; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-25 

� Overflow from the thickener will gravitate to a water tank from where it will be returned to the 

process plant for re-use in the process; and 

� A dedicated electrical substation will be located at the thickener plant for power supply to the 

thickener and auxiliaries, slurry underflow pumping system and return water pumping system. 

The TDF will be developed as a single compartment, fully impounded, side hill type disposal facility with a 

footprint of approximately 161 ha. 

The construction will occur in two phases. In Phase 1 tailings deposition will initially take place behind a 

compacted earth starter embankment. The maximum height of the embankment will be approximately 10 

m. The embankment construction material will be sourced from the water storage dam and tailings dam 

basins. 

Then for Phase 2 an upstream construction methodology will be implemented above the starter 

embankment crest. The implementation of low perimeter embankments is recommended for the 

purposes of this study. The embankment construction material will be sourced from the head of the 

beach. Thickened slurry will be discharged from the perimeter embankments through open ends and/or 

spigots in order to form a beach that slopes downwards away from the embankments. This will create a 

top surface geometry that will result in a supernatant pool that is maintained in the immediate vicinity of 

the decant system. An average beach angle of approximately 1,0% is expected for the non-segregated 

tailings material. 

� The supernatant will be decanted from the top surface of the tailings disposal facility because 

retained water could: 

� Reduce the freeboard and the storm water storage capacity, and so increase the potential for 

overtopping; 

� Increase the potential for slurry flows in the event of a breach. 

� Increase the hydraulic gradient of seepage and pore water pressures, which could lead to lower 

factors of safety for side slope stability; 

� Inhibit consolidation and so reduce the strength and disposal capacity of the facility; and 

� Increase water losses through evaporation and seepage and so increase the environmental 

impacts on water consumption and groundwater. 

In view of the above, it is strongly recommended that decant return should be maximized at all times in 

order to ensure minimum storage of supernatant. Excess water will therefore only be temporarily stored 

during high rainfall periods. 

The consolidation of the tailings is important in enhancing stability and reducing the probability of a flow 

failure should structural instability occur. It also ensures the best utilisation of the volume capacity by 

increasing the stored tons of tailings per cubic metre. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-26 

The expected low permeability of the non-segregated tailings material implies that there will be virtually 

no drainage of entrained water by normal consolidation processes during the life of the facility. The 

effective operation of the facility therefore depends on the consolidation of the tailings by drying, which is 

a very efficient method. The drying consolidation of the tailings can be inhibited by several factors: 

� A large decant pool, preventing drying in the supernatant pool area; 

� Concentrated deposition in one area; 

� Low slurry densities; 

� High rainfall periods; and 

� High rates of rise. 

It is considered that these problems can be overcome by good operation management practice (i.e. thin 

layer deposition through the implementation of optimised tipping cycles etc.). 

The design components associated with the tailings disposal facility can be summarised as follows: 

� During stripping operations, topsoil will be separated from trees and brush and placed in a 

dedicated stockpile for future rehabilitation purposes. Topsoil is defined as unconsolidated soil 

with sufficient organic content and moisture retaining capacity to sustain vegetation growth; 

� A boundary fence will keep livestock out and will discourage people from gaining access to the 

site; 

� The access road (unpaved gravel road) will provide access to all major components of the TDF; 

� A storm water diversion trench will divert non-contaminated run-off from the upstream external 

catchment area. Clean water run-off arising from the external catchment will therefore be 

prevented from flowing onto the TDF and consequently becoming contaminated; 

� The thickener with the associated flocculent plant, slurry underflow pumping system and overflow 

tank will be located at the TDF; 

� Catchment paddocks along the perimeter of the TDF will collect silt and run-off from the side 

slopes of the facility; 

� The starter embankment will provide initial tailings containment capacity. A geotechnical 

engineer should sign off the box-cut depths and foundation preparation requirements for the 

embankment; 

� The under drainage system (toe and blanket drains) are designed to achieve phreatic surface 

draw down at the perimeter of the TDF and consequently improve stability. A solution trench will 

divert the drainage flows to the return water dam; 

� Tailings will be discharged as thickened slurry through a single duty pipeline to open ends and/or 

spigots located on the perimeter embankments to form a beach that slopes downwards away 

from the embankments; and 

� A penstock will decant supernatant from the TDF basin. Timber walkways and platforms will 

provide access to the penstock intake towers. Safety measures and procedures will be 

implemented to ensure safe operation of the decant system. 



Capacity analysis 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-27 

The penstock outlet pipe will report to a HDPE lined silt trap. The silt trap will overflow into a HDPE lined 

return water dam, which in turn will overflow into an unlined storm water dam. 

The TDF basin was three-dimensionally modelled for an accurate determination of the relationship 

between the height, area and capacity. The detail was processed to calculate the rates of rise for 

average deposition rates and eventually the design life. 

The capacity analysis results are summarised in table 5-4 below. 

TABLE 5-4: CAPACITY ANALYSIS RESULTS 

Item Description Unit Value 

1 Assumed average dry density t/m 3 1.60 

2 Airspace required m 3 18 million 

3 Average monthly deposition rate tpm 200 000 

4 Lowest basin elevation mamsl 1 494 

5 Starter embankment crest elevation mamsl 1 504 

6 Final elevation mamsl 1 512 

7 Maximum vertical height of starter embankment m 10 

8 Maximum final vertical height (including freeboard) m 18 

9 Rate of rise at starter embankment crest m/annum 1,0 

10 Final rate of rise m/annum 0.93 

11 Time behind starter embankment years 4,5 

12 Design life years 12 

13 Final basin area ha 161 

The above table indicates that there is sufficient disposal capacity for the life of mine tailings production 

profile. 

Water Balance 

The water balance is a deficit water balance, and significant quantities of make-up water will be required. 

The make-up requirements are seasonal. During the wet season, storm water will be harvested from the 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-28 

tailings disposal facility basin and return water dam. Returns consequently increase and make-up 

requirements decrease. The opposite is true during the dry season. 

The average annual return is 19% of the slurry water. This is low due to a combination of relatively low 

rainfall, high evaporation, and the specific deposition method. The majority of this return is storm water 

since the footprint is large in relation to the tonnage. 

The monthly water balance results were statistically analysed to produce monthly average return and 

make-up flows (see Figure 5-3). The make-up demands were further analysed to produce a non- 

exceedance probability distribution (see Figure 5-4). Make-up demands range between 354 m 3 /day and 

3 402 m 3 /day. Figure 5-4 shows that make-up will exceed 3 000 m3/day 64% of the time. Make-up will 

be less than 1 750 m 3 /day for 10% of the time. 

FIGURE 5-3: MONTHLY AVERAGE DEMAND AND MAKE-UP 



Make-up Demands (m 3 /day) 

4,000 

3,500 

3,000 

2,500 

2,000 

1,500 

1,000 

500 

0 

FIGURE 5-4: NON-EXCEEDANCE PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION OF MAKE-UP DEMAND 

Decant System 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-29 

The penstock is sized to remove the runoff generated by a 50-year, 24-hour design storm in less than 5 

days. This is to minimise the time that a large pool is stored on the tailings disposal facility basin. The 

storm water volume generated during a 50-year, 24-hour storm event is approximately 122 000 m 3 . The 

TDF requires a penstock capable of decanting 24 400 m 3 /day, or 1 017 m 3 /h, assuming a 24-hour 

decanting day. Two 510 mm diameter penstock intakes and a 600 mm ND concrete outlet pipe will have 

sufficient capacity to decant this volume. This will ensure that the pool volume rarely exceeds 50 000 m 3 

provided the penstock is operated to the design intent. 

Water Storage System 

0.001 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 95 99 99.999 

Non Exceedance probability (Percentile) 

The return water dam receives decant water from the tailings disposal facility and therefore the return 

water dam has no upstream catchment. Clean storm water diversion trenches are assumed to divert all 

clean storm water around the return water dam. 

The water balance is a deficit water balance. As a result, negligible storage occurs in the return water 

dam, as most inflows are consumed during the month. However, it should be noted that while negligible 

storage occurs on a monthly time step, significant storage could occur within the month. The dam sizing 

methodology was based on the principle that the dam needs to accommodate the greater of: 

� Runoff generated from a 50-year, 24 hour rainfall event or the excess water resulting from a long- 

term monthly water balance. 

In view of the above, it is concluded that the return water dam should be sized for the 1 in 50 year, 24 

hour storm event with an associated capacity of at least 122 000 m 3 . 



Water Return System 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-30 

The water return system will be sized to return 100% of the slurry water requirement. This is 108 000 m 3 

/ month, or 3 540 m 3 / day. Assuming a 22-hour pumping day, this equates to 161 m 3 / hour. 

Clean Diversion Channel Sizing 

The TDF is a side hill TDF with a 120 ha external catchment. Two storm water diversions will be 

constructed to divert clean storm water around the TDF. The northern channel drains generally 

northwards and the southern channel drains generally southwest. Two channels are required as there is 

a local watershed midway along the TDF south-eastern boundary. The channels have been sized to 

accommodate the 50-year design flood peak. 

5.3.5 WATER MANAGEMENT FACILITIES 

5.3.5.1 Raw Water Storage and Distribution 

Raw water will be pumped from the production and the pit dewatering boreholes to a receiving tank at the 

water treatment facility (WTF) and the process water tank. Raw water treatment includes coagulation, 

settling and filtration. 

Once treated, raw water will be distributed to the following areas: 

� Crushing and milling for dust suppression; 

� Potable water treatment plant; 

� Gland service water distribution tank. 

� Process water 

5.3.5.2 Potable Water Distribution 

A portion of treated raw water will undergo a chlorinating disinfection stage at the WTF to produce 

potable water. Potable water will be pumped to a potable water storage tank with a bottom section 

dedicated to fire water storage. Potable water will be fed to consumption points through a gravity- 

pressurised pipe network and circulated to the various safety showers throughout the plant to avoid any 

heat build-up in the line. 

The treatment plant will be of a modular design installed on an elevated concrete slab. The plant will be 

sized to accommodate reagent make-up water requirements as well as the consumption requirements of 

all personnel on site. It is estimated that 130 l of potable water per person per day must be provided for 

human consumption; both plant and mining facilities will be fed from this facility. 

The elevated storage tank is designed to accommodate the single biggest water usage event during 

reagent make-up or the change house requirement for a shift change. 



5.3.5.3 Process Water 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-31 

Raw plant water supply and potable water supply will be achieved through abstraction of groundwater. 

Water will be re-cycled in the process water system to the extent that this is possible without 

compromising the metallurgical process, but will have to be augmented by clean raw water from the raw 

water storage tank. 

Process water will be directed to a process water tank via a sieve bend that will remove any foreign solid 

material. Raw water pumps will be used to distribute water to the crushing and milling areas (for dust 

suppression), intensive cyanidation, potable water supply, carbon transfer, process water top-up, gland 

water tank top-up, final tails sump flushing water and high pressure wash pumps. 

Water in the tailings stream will be recovered at the high-density thickener and returned to the process 

water tank at the process plant. 

The water lost in the system will be made up from the process water dam. The process water piping 

network will distribute process water through the plant in its respective circuits. 

In-pit water management will mainly consist of run-off control and temporary sumps at the lowest 

elevation in the pit. A mobile trailer-mounted pit-dewatering pump will pump excess water to the mine 

return water dam close to the plant to be used as process water. 

5.3.5.4 Tailings water 

The tailings from the plant will be pumped to a paste thickener at the TDF through High Density 

Polyethylene (“HDPE”) pipe. The tailings line will be placed within a lined trench and will have collection 

sumps. These will be pumped dry using a 7m³ / hr. submersible pump. Water will be transported to the 

process water tank. 

5.3.5.5 Gland water distribution – process plant 

Gland water pumps, one on-line and another on standby, will transfer gland water from a 10 m³ tank to 

the glands of all slurry pumps that require gland water. 

Gland service water will be distributed to pumps throughout the plant from a duty/standby gland service 

water pump arrangement. Raw water will be used for gland service water. 

5.3.5.6 Storm Water Management 

Plant and workshops areas 

Berms will be used to enclose the plant and workshop and associated areas. All runoff from within the 

berms’ areas will be contained in the dams, with zero discharge. These berms will be designed to divert 

natural runoff away from the enclosed area, ensuring that only the runoff from within the berm area is 

directed into the dams. 



The area enclosed by the berm is as follows: 

� Plant area 125 000 m² 

� Mine workshop area 50 000 m² 

Dam Philosophy 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-32 

The dam sizing methodology was based on the principle that the dam needs to accommodate the runoff 

generated from a 1 in 50-year, 24 hour storm event (147 mm). 

The catchment dams are not storage dams, and will be kept empty. A zero discharge design capacity 

has been utilised to comply with IFC standards. 

Each enclosed area will flow into its own, lined, primary dam. Secondary lined dams will also be provided 

to contain any excess runoff. For each set of two dams, the minimum combined volume will be equal to 

the total runoff volume expected from the areas within the berms. 

Dam liners should be polyethylene sheeting, a minimum of 1.5 mm thick. The dams will be constructed 

within calcrete layer, providing a second level of containment such that material with acid rock draining 

potential that may form spillage will have minimal environmental impact. 

Each dam will have a submersible pump installed, with a capacity to pump 7 m³ per hour installed. The 

water will be pumped to the process water tank for plant usage. 

A flume will be installed on all overflow points to measure the overflow of the dams. This will be recorded 

by the plant SCADA system. 

The dam will have a sloped bottom to allow for cleaning and keeping the dam with a minimal wet volume 

after an event. 

Dam Volumes and Design 

The combined volume required is as follows: 

� Plant area 18 375 m³ 

� Mine workshop area 6 125 m³ 



Figure 5-5: DAMS IN PLANT AND WORKSHOP AREAS 

In the figure, the dams are located on the far left of the respective areas. 

Stockpile area 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-33 

A seepage catchment dam will be provided for. The catchment of any seepage water will be pumped to 

the plant process water tank. 

5.3.5.7 Pollution Control Dam 

Lined pollution control dams will be located downstream of the mine and process plant and will prevent 

uncontrolled release of water into natural watercourses. Water will be returned to the process plant as 

process water. 

5.3.5.8 Fire Water Distribution 

A pressurised fire water reticulation system will be installed throughout the plant, the mine and the office 

complex. A pump driven by an electrical motor will serve as the main pump, with a diesel-driven pump 

on standby. A jockey pump will maintain the system pressure. 

Fire water and potable water will be stored in the same tank. This will prevent algae growth within the fire 

water tank. Fire water will be drawn from the bottom of the tank while potable water will be withdrawn 

from a higher level in the tank. This will ensure that the minimum required amount of fire water will be 

available regardless of the potable water consumption. 

A fire tender will be used for areas not covered by hose reels or where booster facilities are required. 



5.3.6 POWER SUPPLY FOR OPERATIONAL ACTIVITIES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-34 

The total installed power requirement for the facility is 11.5 MW. Power is supplied in Namibia by 

NamPower, a public utility company. Auryx has recently made an application to NamPower in order to 

connect the planned mining operation into the regional high voltage power grid. 

The project is situated close to a 220 kV power line from where a T-off line is proposed. The 220 kV line 

runs from the Gerus substation to the Otjikoto substation and forms the main power line to the northern 

part of Namibia. The 220 kV electrical power upon transformation should cater for the requirements of a 

metallurgical plant as well as all general mine site requirements. 

A T-in connection will be established on the nearby 220 kV line to supply power to the plant. This 220 kV 

connection will be extended towards the plant site, where it will be stepped down to 11 kV next to the 

plant. The 220 kV overhead line design capacity will be 40 MVA (owing to the NamPower standard 

transformer sizing) whereas the plant estimated power requirement is 11.5 MVA. Allowance has been 

made for a single 40 MVA step down transformer. 

A plant sub-station will be established adjacent to the 220 kV/11 kV sub-station to reticulate power at 11 

kV to all the plant transformers and mill motors. The plant sub-station will house the single busbar indoor 

switchgear and the mill motor starting panel. 

5.3.7 AIR REQUIREMENTS – PROCESS PLANT 

Two air compressors, one working and one on standby, will deliver 300 Nm 3 /h of compressed air, at a 

pressure of 750 kPa, to the plant air receiver via one of the air filters. The receiver will distribute 

compressed air to the lime make-up area, workshop and various points in the plant for general usage. 

Instrument air will be supplied by a dedicated compressor. An Instrument air dryer and filters will be 

provided in order to ensure that instrument air will be moisture-free and of good quality prior to storage in 

an air receiver. Provision will be made to supply air from the discharge of the main compressors to the 

instrument air filters and dryer, if the instrument air compressor is off-line. All three compressors will be 

housed in a compressor shed. 

5.3.7.1 Blower Air 

Leach aeration blowers, one on-line and another on standby, will deliver air (at 250 kPa), which will be 

distributed to the leach circuit. 

Flotation aeration blowers, two on-line ad one standby will also be installed. 

5.3.8 FUEL SUPPLY 

The mine has limited requirements for bulk services. Bulk services are limited to hydrocarbon supply for 

the vehicles and the emergency power generation facility. Diesel and petrol will be the two main 

consumables and will be stored in bulk tanks located in a bunded area at the mining workshop area. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-35 

Bulk tanks are available in Namibia as a free-on-loan facility provided by the bulk fuel suppliers in 

Namibia, at no additional cost. It is expected that a storage capacity of minimum 1 000 000 liters of diesel 

and 20 000 liters of Petrol will be required. 

5.3.9 EMPLOYMENT AND HOUSING 

The mining operations are scheduled to work 365 days per year, less unscheduled delays such as high 

rainfall events which may cause mining operations to be temporarily suspended. It was decided to opt for 

a full calendar (three panel shift) operation bearing in mind equipment utilisation and fatigue 

management. 

The four shifts will rotate each week (7 days) from night shift to afternoon shift to day shift to a week off, 

completing a cycle every 28 days. All shift personnel will receive a monthly shift allowance. 

The maximum mine labour requirements for the Otjikoto Project will comprise 22 in the owner’s team and 

289 for the mining contractor. This excludes an absenteeism factor of 14% on the operator complement 

to cater for annual and sick leave, refresher training or medical checks. 

The processing plants will accomodate135 employees at full production. 

No onsite housing for the site labour is envisaged. 

5.3.10 SEWERAGE COLLECTION AND TREATMENT 

Sewerage will be collected and will use gravity reticulation via buried sewer pipes to be transported to the 

treatment facility. Sewage will be treated in a package sewerage treatment plant (STP). The plant will 

have the capacity to treat the sewerage generated on site per day. The water output from the STP will be 

suitable for use in dust suppression, vehicle washing, irrigation, fire water and process water. 

The STP will also produce a small quantity of sludge, which will be dried in a sludge-drying bed located at 

a point lower than the plant. Dried sludge will be used as fertiliser in the rehabilitation of vegetation on 

the TDF slopes. 

5.3.11 NON-MINERALISED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR THE OPERATION PHASE 

Waste will be separated at source, stored in a manner that there can be no discharge of contamination to 

the environment, and either recycled or reused where possible. On site facilities will be provided at a 

dedicated waste storage facility for sorting and temporary storage prior to removal and disposal to 

appropriate recycling or disposal facilities off-site (Otjiwarongo for general waste and Walvis Bay for 

hazardous waste). 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-36 

Industrial waste will be sorted on site and disposed of at appropriate facilities. Hazardous waste includes 

inter alia: fuels, chemicals, lubricating oils, hydraulic and brake fluid, paints, solvents, acids, detergents, 

resins, brine, solids from sewerage and sludge. 

A waste specification has been developed for the Otjikoto Project and details waste management on site 

with a summary of this provided in TABLE 5-5. 

TABLE 5-5: NON MINERALISED WASTE MANAGEMENT FOR OPERATIONS 


(example of waste 

types) 

Nonhazardous 

solid waste 

(nonmineralised) 

Hazardous 

contaminated 

solid waste 

(nonmineralised). 

Pallets and wooden 

crates, rubber, 

cardboard, paper, 

cable drums, metal 

cut-offs. scrap metal, 

general domestic 

waste such as food 

and packaging 

Building rubble and 

waste concrete 

Treated timber 

crates, printer 

cartridges, batteries, 

fluorescent bulbs, 

paint, solvents, tar, 

empty hazardous 

material containers 

etc. 

Hydrocarbons (oils, 

grease) 


Skips in relevant work areas 

will be provided for different 

waste types. A waste 


remove skips regularly to a 


storage facility. 

Designated rubble collection 

points will be determined to 

which rubble and concrete will 

be taken. 


separated at source and 

stored in designated 

containers in bunded work 

areas. The waste 


remove these drums regularly 

to a dedicated waste handling 

and storage facility. 

Used oil and grease will be 

stored in drums in bunded 

areas at key points in work 

areas. The bunds will be able 

to accommodate 110 % of the 

container contents and 

include a sump and oil trap. 

The waste management 


drums regularly to a 


storage facility. The yard will 

have a dedicated used oil 

storage area which will 

include a concrete slab, 

proper bunding and an oil 

sump. The appointed bulk 

fuel supplier will collect used 

oil for recycling. 

Waste will be sorted further at 

the a dedicated waste handling 

and storage facility. Recyclable 

waste will be sent to a reputable 

recycling company. Some items 

may be distributed directly to the 

community such as pallets and 

wooden crates. The remainder 

of the waste will be transported 


contractor to a permitted general 

landfill facility in Otjiwarongo for 

disposal. 

Building rubble will be disposed 

of to a designated area in the 

waste rock dump as part of the 

mineralised waste facility. 


disposed of at the permitted 

hazardous disposal site in 

Walvis Bay by the waste 

management contractor. 

The yard will have a dedicated 

used oil storage area that will 

include an impermeable 

concrete slab, bunding, an oil 

trap and sump. 

Used oil will be sent to a 

reputable recycling company for 

recycling. 




(example of waste 

types) 

Medical 

waste 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 



Sewage Sewage will be treated at a 

sewage treatment plant (STP) 

with a capacity of 0.5 Ml per 

day. 

Syringes, material 

with blood stains, 

bandages, etc. 

5.3.12 ADDITIONAL SITE FACILITIES 

5.3.12.1 Explosives use and storage 

Medical waste will be stored 

in sealed containers at the 

clinic. A waste management 


drums regularly to a 


storage facility. 

Page 5-37 

Sewage effluent will be reused 

in the process water circuit. 

Sewage sludge will be dried and 

either buried in the mineralised 

waste facility or used for bioremediation. 

Medical waste will be 

transported by the waste 

management contractor to a 

permitted medical waste 

treatment facility in Otjiwarongo. 

All explosive transportation, storage and handling will be governed by the Namibian regulations with 

periodic inspections undertaken by the Police and the Ministry of Mines. Handling of explosives on the 

mine will be under the direct supervision of an appointed person who will be the holder of a Namibian 

surface blasting certificate. 

An explosives magazine will be located in a remote area south east of the open pit. The magazine will be 

specially designed, constructed and approved facilities used for the storage of blasting consumables. 

These magazines will be surrounded by earth bunds, which will be in a fenced off area, free of all plant 

growth. Lightning conductors shall be erected as additional protection. The magazines will be kept under 

lock and key with access restricted to authorised, approved trained personnel only. The only time people 

will be in the magazines will be during receiving of stock or delivery of consumables required for blasting 

operations. 

5.3.12.2 Laboratory 

The role of the laboratory is to provide an analytical service to the gold plant and the mine by the 

assaying of samples received from these areas. The prescribed methodology will be fire assay for the 

determination of gold. Owing to the occurrence of coarse gold within the deposit, the screened fire assay 

procedure will be used for the assaying of geology and plant feed samples for gold. 

The laboratory will consist of the following discrete areas: 

� Sample receiving and preparation area 

� Fluxing room 

� Furnace room 

� Prill weighing and parting area 

� Digestion area 



� Atomic absorption spectrometry (AAS) and sulphur area 

� Ablution and wash room 

� Kitchen 

� Offices 

5.3.12.3 Product Transport 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-38 

Doré bullion will be packed in plastic boxes with a maximum weight of 25 kg per box. The transporting of 

the doré bullion bars from the gold vault to the refinery will be outsourced to the selected refinery. 

5.3.12.4 Medical facility/clinic 

There will be an on-site medical facility and First Aid Station which will be able to address day to day 

medical issues and emergency medical cases. Medical surveillance and testing will be conducted at 

approved facilities in Otjiwarongo. Emergency facilities and hospitals are available at Otjiwarongo. 

5.3.12.5 Security and access control 

The electronic security system will provide an integrated real time viewing security application utilising 

CCTV and intruder detection. All equipment will be non-proprietary, generally available products. The 

integrated alarm and access control system will provide live-event recording of all movements in 

controlled areas and immediate indication of programmed alarm events. The surveillance facility will be 

located in a secure location with access control. 

The security system will incorporate an access control system that will allow predetermined permission 

rights to card holders and interface to a database system for logging and reporting. On-site parking will 

be provided. A bus parking area has been allowed for at the process plant entrance area. 

Currently the farm Otjikoto is fenced for cattle farming. This fence will be upgraded to the same game 

fence type present on the other portion of the property. The fence will also be erected to isolate the 

mining area from the neighbouring areas. 

5.3.12.6 Information Technology and Communication 

Communication facilities are readily available, including modern fixed line and cellular 

telecommunications. Mobile phone networks will provide the basis of the general site communication 

systems. A two-way radio system will be utilised between operators on the mine area. 

5.3.12.7 Weighbridge 

A weighbridge will be positioned just off the main access road to the North and outside the plant complex. 

The weighbridge will monitor the incoming delivery of reagents and consumables. The weighbridge will 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-39 

be a load cell type, single truck length unit installed above ground. A waiting area will be sized to 

accommodate additional trucks. 

5.3.12.8 Lighting 

Where possible, general plant lighting will be fixed to the structures of the process plant. Access points 

will be illuminated using high mast lights with eight 400 W luminaires. Roads within the process plant 

which cannot be illuminated from structures will be illuminated from standard street pole lights. 

Lighting of the plant will have the dual purpose of improving security and providing adequate lighting for 

safe operation and maintenance. Where pole lights are used they will be focussed downwards. 

5.3.12.9 Offices, visitors centre and administrative buildings 

Buildings will be prefabricated steel framed buildings installed on a concrete foundation. The proposed 

surface buildings will be as follows: 

� Administration building; 

� Plant engineering office; 

� Plant change house building; 

� Mine change house building; 

� Laboratory building; 

� Plant workshop store and offices; 

� Mining workshop and maintenance bays; 

� Mining engineering office; 

� Security office and weighbridge station; and 

� Control room; 

� First aid Facility. 

The following building will be located in brick and mortar buildings on elevated concrete slabs. 

5.3.12.10 Cranage 

� Motor Control Centres; 

� Switch Rooms; 

In-plant maintenance will be serviced by a centrally located tower crane. In the reagent mixing areas, 

milling area and at the ball loading areas dedicated electric hoists will be installed. For other lifting 

requirements crawl beams will be fitted for suitable hoists. 



5.3.12.11 Fire Fighting Services 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-40 

Foam spray fire extinguishers will be placed in accessible locations at each conveyor drive. Dry powder 

extinguishers will be placed at the entry and emergency exits of electrical rooms or where there is the 

potential for electrical fires occurring. Foam spray fire extinguishers will also be located throughout the 

workshops, stores, offices, change houses and other infrastructure facilities. 

In addition, fire hydrant points complete with fire hoses will be located throughout the plant within a radius 

of 60 m from each other. Points will be located next to access routes for easy access. Fire hydrant 

points will also be installed along the conveyor line and throughout the office complex buildings. These 

points will be fed from the pressurised fire water distribution network. 

Water cannons will be installed at the highest points of the plant and will be fed from the pressurised fire 

water distribution network. 

5.3.12.12 Workshops and stores 

Mine workshops will be required for large truck and support equipment and light vehicles. The mine 

workshop will have four bays with 20 t overhead crane to service the haul trucks. An additional four bays 

designed to accommodate track-driven utility vehicles will be located adjacent to the haul truck 

workshops. 

Separate wash, tyre, lube and refuelling bays have been included to accommodate the haul trucks. Fuel 

storage will be located in a bunded area. The fuel will be stored in bulk storage tanks. This facility will be 

provided by the hydrocarbon supplier to the mine as a Build Owned Operated (BOO) facility. 

The Plant general workshop will be required for electrics, drills and general maintenance. Activities 

associated with the workshops include painting, grinding, welding, and repairs. 

Covered Stores will be located in the following areas: 

� The plant will have a reagents store which will be a structural steel building with a concrete floor 

and a bund around the perimeter. 

� The engineering workshops will have storage facilities. 

� The mine complex will have a covered component store for heavy mobile mining equipment, 

batteries and specialised tools. 

� The heavy vehicle workshop will have a storage facility. 

General storage facilities for large items will be located in a fenced off area adjacent to the Plant and 

mine main store. 



5.3.12.13 Salvage yard/waste handling and storage area 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-41 

The salvage yard will be a separately fenced off area, in the rehabilitated borrow pit area on the south 

side of the plant area. Run-off from the salvage yard will be contained and pumped to the plant complex 

water system. 

5.3.12.14 Internal roads 

All internal roads will be gravel roads. The main access road to the facility is based on diverting the 

current D2808 road along the border of the mine property in the northeast. The new intersection and the 

road up to 250 meter from the rail crossing will be a tar road, and the rest a gravel road. The new road 

will reconnect the D2808 to the B1. This diversion will comply with the district road specification in 

Namibia. 

The roads in the plant have been designed as gravel roads with paved corner areas. The road servicing 

the tailings line and borehole pumps has been designed as a one-way road, forming a loop with other 

roads. 

5.3.12.15 Dust control (roads) 

Suppression of dust within the mining operation is planned to be predominately controlled by spraying of 

water by large adapted haul trucks. Mining areas include the pits, active haul roads, stockpiles and 

dumps. The potential use of appropriate specialised commercial dust suppression products are planned 

to be fully investigated to reduce water consumption as well as the potential use of treated process water. 

This is planned to be undertaken in the first year of mining operation. 

5.3.12.16 Internal pipelines 

Various on-site pipelines have been described in the discussion above. The pipelines will be placed in 

the following manner: 

� Pipelines within the plant will all be located on the surface of the ground. 

� All water pipelines will be on the surface of the ground. 

� The sewage pipelines will all be below ground. 

5.3.12.17 Conveyors 

Conveyors will be constructed, to transport the RoM ore from the Primary Crusher to the Processing 

plant. A number of small conveyors will also be located within the processing plant. 

5.3.12.18 Ongoing exploration 

Exploration drilling will continue. It will be used to upgrade the mineral resource on a yearly basis as well 

as to assist with detailed mine planning going forward. 



5.3.12.19 Ongoing contractor work 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-42 

The contractor administration and lay-down area, excluding the temporary accommodation area will 

remain in use as and when required for the life of mine. This is particularly relevant to any alterations, 

maintenance or refurbishment that may be required from time to time and that may require the services of 

contractors. 

5.3.13 TIME TABLE 

Key assumptions with respect to project timing used in developing the financial model are: 

� Capital expenditure spread during the first 2 years; 

� First ore mined in year 3; 

� Process plant commissioned, first ore in the plant in year 3; 

� 14 year mine life (2012 to 2025), inclusive of the construction phase. 

5.4 DECOMMISSIONING AND CLOSURE PHASE 

At a conceptual level, decommissioning can be considered a reverse of the construction phase with the 

demolition and removal of the majority of infrastructure and activities very similar to those described with 

respect to the construction phase. The closure phase occurs as soon as possible on the waste stockpile 

and the TDF and then after the cessation of all decommissioning activities. Relevant closure activities 

are those related to the after care and maintenance of remaining structures. 

5.4.1 CLOSURE OBJECTIVES 

The planning stage for decommissioning and closure has commenced and in broad terms the main 

objective will be to remove as much infrastructure as possible and rehabilitate what remains to resemble 

the pre project land state as closely as possible. At this stage, the proposed post closure land use will be 

a combination of conservation and wilderness. The following objectives have been set: 

� Disturbed areas other than those comprising the open pit and mineralised waste facilities will be 

returned to as close to the natural habitat (Thorn Bush Savannah) as practicable. 

� Permanent visible features such as the mineralised waste facilities and related environmental 

bunds as well as safety bunds around the open pit will be left in a form that blends with the 

surrounds. 

� Contamination beyond the mine site by wind, surface runoff or groundwater movement will be 

prevented through appropriate erosion resistant covers, containment bunds and drainage to the 

open pit. 

� Linear infrastructure comprising roads, pipelines, power lines, conveyors and related components 

will be removed and the disturbed land rehabilitated to blend with the surrounding natural 

environment. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-43 

� Socio-economic impacts (including the loss of employment) will be minimised through careful 

planning and preparation for closure beginning three to five years before closure takes place. 

The above principles and concepts will be refined as part of ongoing detailed closure planning and 

costing during the life of mine. 

5.4.2 DECOMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES 

At a conceptual level this is a reverse of the construction phase with infrastructure and activities very 

similar to those described in Section 5.2. The conceptual decommissioning plan is as follows: 

� Surface infrastructure will be demolished and removed, with the exception of the mineralised 

waste facilities which will remain in perpetuity. The open pits will also remain in perpetuity. 

� Areas where infrastructure has been removed will be levelled and restored in terms of soils 

horizons, vegetation and drainage. 

5.4.2.1 Open pit decommissioning 

An exclusion bund will be constructed around the northern, western and southern rims of the open pit and 

connect to the mineralised waste facilities which will form the eastern exclusion bund.Seepage water and 

all other contaminated water that can drain naturally to the open pit will be directed to the pit where it will 

evaporate. 

Access ramps to the open pit will be bunded off to prevent access down the ramps and the top berm of 

the pit will be sloped to an angle of approximately 20 degrees. 

Pit slopes will be assessed and stabilised for long term stability performance. 

5.4.2.2 Mineralised Waste Facilities 

The minimum objectives for the closure and rehabilitation of the mineralised waste facilities must be to 

prevent air and water pollution in accordance with the requirements of the relevant regulations and in line 

with good international practice. The intended end use should take into consideration the prior land use 

and the location with respect to current and potential future socio-economic development. 

The purpose of a closure plan is to ensure that the design, construction and operation procedures are 

compatible with the achievement of final closure and rehabilitation to acceptable environmental standards 

and at a reasonable cost. The principles of the closure considerations can be summarised as follows: 

� The non-segregated tailings materials are expected to have a low permeability with the result 

that seepage from rainwater infiltration will be very limited. 

� The required final side slope and top surface geometries will be achieved during the 

operation phase. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-44 

� The side slopes will be covered with topsoil in order to establish vegetation. The top 

surfaces will be covered with a vegetated engineered layer (waste rock and topsoil). 

� Emergency spillways will be included in the final closure design. 

� The water storage dams will remain in place. 

� Generally all surface structures (i.e. pumps, pipelines, power lines etc.) will be removed. 

5.4.2.3 Process plant 

The processing plant, primary crusher and conveyors will all be dismantled, and salvageable elements 

will be de-contaminated and sold. The remainder of the processing plant including steelwork, concrete, 

liners, brickwork etc. will be dismantled or broken up and disposed of at a site approved by the relevant 

authorities. Any contaminated soil below the processing plant will also be uplifted and disposed of at a 

site approved by the relevant authorities. Conveyor belts and concrete footings as well as non- 

salvageable steel will be disposed of in a similar fashion. 

The residual excavations after removal of the processing plant and primary crusher will be backfilled and 

levelled with selected overburden material from the open pit mining operations and covered with a 

thickness necessary to provide a productive layer for reclamation. The plant area will be landscaped and 

levelled to ensure that it is contiguous with, and blends into, the surrounds. Runoff from the primary 

crusher site will be directed to the open pit, since this area falls within the open pit access exclusion 

bund. The soil and vegetation function of the land will be restored. 

5.4.2.4 Workshops, diesel and oil storage facilities and explosives areas 

All structures associated with these facilities will be broken and salvageable elements will be de- 

contaminated and sold. The remainder of the infrastructure will be dismantled or broken up and disposed 

of at a site approved by the relevant authorities. Contaminated soils underlying the structures will be 

excavated for disposal at a hazardous waste disposal facility or for bio remediation at a designated area 

on the ML after which the soils will be carted to the open pit. Residual excavations will be backfilled and 

levelled using selected overburden material from open pit mining operations. The soil and vegetation 

function of the land will be restored. Runoff from these areas will be directed to the open pit. 

All other hard surfaces will be ripped and waste will be carted to the open pit. Pipelines and infrastructure 

will be removed and residual excavation will be backfilled and levelled with selected overburden material 

and covered with between 300mm and 500mm of stockpiled topsoil. 

5.4.3 CLOSURE ACTIVITIES 

All mining activities and processing operations will have ceased by the closure phase of the mining 

project. The potential for impacts during this phase will depend on the extent of demolition and 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 5-45 

rehabilitation efforts during decommissioning and on the features which will remain, such as the open pit 

and mineralised waste facilities. 



6 ALTERNATIVES 

6.1 CURRENT AND FUTURE LAND USED ALTERNATIVES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 6-1 

In the area where the proposed project is located, current land–use comprises wilderness/conservation 

and prospecting in EPL2410. Should the proposed project go ahead, the land use will change from 

prospecting and wilderness/conservation to mining within the EPL. Should the proposed project not go 

ahead the land within the EPL will revert back to conservation and wilderness. 

6.2 THE “NO PROJECT OPTION LINKED TO NEED AND DESIRABILITY 

The assessment of this option requires a comparison between the alternative of proceeding with the 

proposed project with that of not proceeding with the proposed project. 

Proceeding with the proposed project will result in significant positive economic impacts such as 

increased employment, investment and procurement of goods and services but will have potential 

negative environmental and social impacts associated with the proposed project. 

The added potential economic benefits are expected to override the potential negative environmental and 

social impacts of significance. Therefore proceeding with the proposed project will allow the exploitation 

of the mineral resource at the mine and therefore allow for the associated positive economic impacts. 

6.3 TECHNICAL ALTERNATIVES FOR MILLING 

The Otjikoto preliminary economic assessment (PEA) was completed in September 2011 and considered 

a flotation and leach (flotation/leach) processing route. Subsequent testing indicated that whole ore leach 

should be evaluated. Therefore, a trade off study was commissioned in January of 2012. Economic 

analyses clearly favoured the whole ore leach process based on increased recoveries. Additionally, 

characteristics such as the perceived environmental and community sensitivity, as well as the 

susceptibility to recovery loss due to process upsets were considered for each option. Table 6-1 shows a 

comparison of the flowsheet characteristics. 

TABLE 6-1: COMPARISON OF THE FLOWSHEET CHARACTERISTICS 

Characteristic Whole Ore Leach Flotation/Leach 

Simplicity of design and ease of 

operation 

Ability to handle different ore 

types 

Environmental and community 

sensitivity 

Single process route – more 

simple 

Can process all major ore types 

tested with high gold recover 

Higher due to 100% lined tailings 

facility 

More process circuits – more 

complex 

Produces high gold recovery for 

sulphide ore, but lower recovery 

with oxide and transition ores 

Lower due to 10% lined tailings 

facility 



Characteristic Whole Ore Leach Flotation/Leach 

Susceptibility to recovery loss 

due to process upsets 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 6-2 

Less susceptible More susceptible due to flotation 

circuit 

Expandability Less complex More complex 

Water quality sensitivity Can handle much poorer water 

quality 

Water management Easier More complex 

Ability to handle clay Less suitable in leaching and 

CIP. Blending will minimise clay 

issue. 

Ability to handle variable grade Good with aggressive gravity 

recovery circuit. 

More sensitive, needs low CN 

water for flotation 

More suited for leach/CIP 

however flotation may be 

affected – Blending would also 

minimize the clay issue 

Good with aggressive gravity 

recovery circuit. 

Other saleable by-products None identified Possibly sell High sulphide float 

concentrate leach residue to local 

smelter 

6.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS 

The Otjikoto Gold project has an indicated power need of approximately 11.5 MW. The parastatal power 

company, NamPower, have provided an initial proposal to Auryx Gold to supply this power. This 

alternative has been included in the EIA and permit application. However, based on information provided 

by NamPower (Presentation to the Namibian Chamber of Mines dated 24 February 2012), Namibia and 

the SADC region will continue to experience supply deficits through 2015. This includes an 80 MW deficit 

in 2012 that grows to a 350 MW deficit by 2015. Additionally, NamPower is indicating that considerable 

costs increases will incur and that there is potentially short periods of time where load shedding may be 

necessary (affecting plant operations). Therefore, the project is investigating on-site power generation 

options. These options may include: 

� Installation of ancillary diesel or heavy fuel oil (HFO) power generators to maintain capacity 

during times of mandatory load shedding; or, 

� Installation of stand-alone diesel or heavy fuel oil (HFO) power generators to operate 

independently of the national power grid. 

These options have not been developed for this EIA due to the recent changes in NamPower’s 

philosophy and proposals but if they are adopted, the project will emit additional combustion gases (SOx, 

NOx, fine particulates, and CO). If the company deems that this alternative is preferable, the air quality 

impacts sections will be updated and a brief amendment to the EIA will be submitted detailing the 

additional impacts. 



7 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT 


SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-1 

Potential environmental impacts were identified in consultation with IAPs, regulatory authorities and 

specialist consultants. In case of people’s health and safety related impacts, the assessment focused on 

third parties only (third parties include members of the public and the contractors camp after working 

hours) and did not assess health and safety impacts on workers because the assumption was made that 

these aspects are separately regulated by health and safety legislation, policies and standards. 

The discussion and impact assessment for each sub-section covers the construction, operational, 

decommissioning and closure phases where relevant. This is indicated in the table at the beginning of 

each sub-section. Included in the table is a list of project activities/infrastructure that could cause the 

potential impact per mine phase. The activities/infrastructure that are summarised in this chapter, link to 

the description of the proposed project (see Section 5 of the EIA report). 

Mitigation measures to address the identified impacts are discussed in this section and included in more 

detail in the EMP report that is attached in Appendix M. These mitigation measures have been taken into 

account in the assessment of the significance of the mitigated impacts only. 

Both the criteria used to assess the impacts and the method of determining the significance of the 

impacts is outlined in Table 7-1. This method complies with the Environmental Impact Assessment 

Regulations: Environmental Management Act, 2007 (Government Gazette No. 4878) EIA regulations. 

Part A provides the approach for determining impact consequence (combining severity, spatial scale and 

duration) and impact significance (the overall rating of the impact). Impact consequence and significance 

are determined from Part B and C. The interpretation of the impact significance is given in Part D. Both 

mitigated and unmitigated scenarios are considered for each impact. 



8.2 TOPOGRAPHY 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


EXAMPLE SHOWING HOW THIS CHAPTER HAS BEEN STRUCTURED 

8.2.1 ISSUE: HAZARDOUS EXCAVATIONS 

Project phase and link to activities/infrastructure 

Construction Operational Decommissioning Closure 

N/A* 

Activity/infrastructure 1 


* N/A – not applicable. 

Assessment of impact 




Description of the issue and associated impact in terms of severity, duration, spatial scale, 

consequence, probability and significance – considering all phases of project including any 

cumulative impacts 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact 

Mitigation Severity Duration Spatial Consequence Probability of Significance 

Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated L M L M M M 

Mitigated L L L L L L 

Conceptual description of mitigation measures 

Identification of mitigation objectives and conceptual description of mitigation actions 

Emergency situation 

Environmental component heading 

Issue heading 

Bars showing phase of operation in which 

impacts could occur, and link to project 

activities 

Description of any emergency situations where relevant with reference to relevant procedures 

Page 7-2 


-


TABLE 7-1: CRITERIA FOR ASSESSING IMPACTS 

PART A: DEFINITION AND CRITERIA 

Definition of SIGNIFICANCE Significance = consequence x probability 

Definition of CONSEQUENCE Consequence is a function of severity, spatial extent and duration 

Criteria for ranking of 

the SEVERITY/NATURE 

of environmental 

impacts 

Criteria for ranking the 

DURATION of impacts 

Criteria for ranking the 

SPATIAL SCALE of 

impacts 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-3 

H Substantial deterioration (death, illness or injury). Recommended level will 

often be violated. Vigorous community action. Irreplaceable loss of 

resources. 

M Moderate/ measurable deterioration (discomfort). Recommended level will 

occasionally be violated. Widespread complaints. Noticeable loss of 

resources. 

L Minor deterioration (nuisance or minor deterioration). Change not 

measurable/ will remain in the current range. Recommended level will never 

be violated. Sporadic complaints. Limited loss of resources. 

L+ Minor improvement. Change not measurable/ will remain in the current 

range. Recommended level will never be violated. Sporadic complaints. 

M+ Moderate improvement. Will be within or better than the recommended 

level. No observed reaction. 

H+ Substantial improvement. Will be within or better than the recommended 

level. Favourable publicity. 

L Quickly reversible. Less than the project life. Short term 

M Reversible over time. Life of the project. Medium term 

H Permanent. Beyond closure. Long term. 

L Localised - Within the site boundary. 

M Fairly widespread – Beyond the site boundary. Local 

H Widespread – Far beyond site boundary. Regional/ national 

PART B: DETERMINING CONSEQUENCE 

SEVERITY = L 

DURATION Long term H Medium Medium Medium 

Medium term M Low Low Medium 

Short term L Low 

SEVERITY = M 

Low Medium 

DURATION Long term H Medium High High 

Medium term M Medium Medium High 

Short term L Low 

SEVERITY = H 

Medium Medium 

DURATION Long term H High High High 

Medium term M Medium Medium High 

Short term L Medium Medium High 

L M H 

PROBABILITY 

(of exposure 

to impacts) 

Localised 

Within site 

boundary 

Site 

Fairly widespread 

Beyond site 

boundary 

Local 

SPATIAL SCALE 

Widespread 

Far beyond site 

boundary 

Regional/ national 

PART C: DETERMINING SIGNIFICANCE 

Definite/ Continuous H Medium Medium High 

Possible/ frequent M Medium Medium High 

Unlikely/ seldom L Low Low Medium 

L M 

CONSEQUENCE 

H 

PART D: INTERPRETATION OF SIGNIFICANCE 

Significance Decision guideline 

High It would influence the decision regardless of any possible mitigation. 

Medium It should have an influence on the decision unless it is mitigated. 

Low It will not have an influence on the decision. 



7.2 TOPOGRAPHY 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-4 

The topography (as described in Section 4.3) will be changed by the proposed project. The following 

related issues have been identified and are discussed further in the sections highlighted in brackets: 

� surface excavations and infrastructure and the dangers they present to humans and animals 

(Section7.2.1); 

� changes to surface water flow and related impacts (Section 7.3.1); and 

� visual impacts (Section 7.8.1). 

7.2.1 ISSUE: SURFACE EXCAVATIONS AND INFRASTRUCTURE 

7.2.1.1 Introduction 

With reference to table 7-2, surface excavations and infrastructure include all structures into or off which 

third parties can fall and be harmed. Included in this category are facilities that can fail (such as 

mineralised waste facilities). Surface excavations and infrastructure occur in all project phases from 

construction through operation to decommissioning and closure. In the construction and 

decommissioning phases these surface excavations and infrastructure are usually temporary in nature, 

usually existing for a few weeks to a few months. The operational phase will present more long term 

surface excavations and infrastructure and the closure phase will present final land forms that are 

considered hazardous. 

TABLE 7-2: SURFACE EXCAVATIONS & INFRASTRUCTURE - LINK TO PROJECT PHASES & 

ACTIVITIES 


Foundations 

Trenches 

Stockpiles 

Scaffolding 

Cranes 

Borrow pits 

Ongoing mining activities 

7.2.1.2 Assessment of impact 

Severity 

Open pit 

Stockpiles 

Mineralised waste facilities 

Water dams/reservoirs 

Evaporation ponds 

Voids 

Trenches 

Buildings and equipment 

Surface subsidence 

Processing plant 

Open pit 

Stockpiles 


Water dams/reservoirs 

Voids 

Trenches 

Surface subsidence 

Scaffolding 

Cranes 

Piles of rubble 

Piles of scrap 

Permanent mineralised waste 

facilities 

Open pit 

In the unmitigated scenario, most of the identified surface excavations and infrastructure present a 

potential risk of injury and/or death to third parties which includes contractors and drillers staying at the 

mine overnight. This is a potential high severity in both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios. 



Duration 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-5 

In the context of this assessment, death or permanent injury is considered a long term impact in both the 

unmitigated and mitigated scenario. 

Spatial scale 

For the most part, the direct impacts will be located within the infrastructure footprint, but the indirect 

impacts will extend to the communities to which the people belong. 

Consequence 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is high. 

Probability 

The project area is approximately 2-3km east of the B1 National Road and it is not impossible that third 

parties may access the site by mistake or out of curiosity. In the unmitigated scenario, it is possible that 

the surface excavations and infrastructure present a risk to unaccompanied third parties during all 

phases. 

The proposed mitigation measures will focus on infrastructure safety and on limiting access to third 

parties and animals which reduces the probability of the impact occurring. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated scenario, the significance of this potential impact is high. In the mitigated scenario, the 

significance of this potential impact is medium because there will be a reduction in probability that the 

impact occurs. SLR’s confidence level is high for this significance rating. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – surface excavations and infrastructure 

Mitigation Severity Duration Spatial 

Consequence Probability of Significance 

Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H H M H M H 

Mitigated H H M H L M 

7.2.1.3 Conceptual description of mitigation measures 

Conceptual discussion of the mitigation measures is provided below and detailed in the Otjikoto EMP 

(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to prevent physical harm to third parties (including animals) 

from surface excavations and infrastructure. 

Actions 

Auryx Gold will ensure that: 



� The working area of the ML will be fenced; 

� Warning signs will be erected and maintained on the site boundary; 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-6 

� Security control points will be in place, to prevent uncontrolled vehicle access to existing and 

future mining, stockpile and waste facility areas during the construction, operation and 

decommissioning phases; 

� The permanent aboveground waste facilities will be designed, constructed and operated in a 

manner that flood protection is provided and that the risk of failure is limited to acceptable levels; 

� Permanent aboveground waste facilities and stockpiles will be rehabilitated in a manner that they 

present land forms that will be stable, protected from flood damage, and slopes will be re- 

vegetated; and 

� Any mining voids that remain open will be made safe to ensure that there is no risk to the safety 

of people and animals. 

Emergency situations 

If people do fall off or into surface excavations or infrastructure causing injury, or if any mineralised waste 

facilities fail causing injury to people, the Auryx Gold emergency response procedure will be followed. 

7.3 SURFACE WATER 

7.3.1 ISSUE: ALTERING DRAINAGE PATTERNS 

The identified impacts associated with altering surface water drainage are addressed in Section 7.7.3. In 

this regard, the key issue is the loss of surface water flow volume as an important ecological driver. 

7.3.2 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON SURFACE WATER QUALITY 


With reference to Table 7-3, there are a number of pollution sources in all project phases that have the 

potential to pollute surface water, particularly in the unmitigated scenario. In the construction and 

decommissioning phases these potential pollution sources are temporary in nature, usually existing for a 

few weeks to a few months. Although these sources may be temporary, the potential pollution may be 

long term. The operational phase will present more long term potential sources and the closure phase will 

present final land forms that may have the potential to contaminate surface water through long term 

seepage and/or run-off. 

TABLE 7-3: SURFACE WATER POLLUTION SOURCES–LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


General building activities 

Management of dirty water 

Storage and handling of new 

Servicing equipment 



General decommissioning 

activities 


Seepage, runoff and dust 

fallout from remaining 

mineralised waste facilities 




and used materials and 

chemicals (including 

hydrocarbons) 

Waste management (nonmineralised 

and mineralised) 

Equipment servicing 

Use of vehicles and equipment 

that may leak lubricants and 

fuel 

Dust fallout 


Severity 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 




hydrocarbons) 

Waste management 

(mineralised and nonmineralised) 

Stockpile development 

Dust fallout 

Ore processing 

Evaporation ponds 




hydrocarbons) 



stockpiles 


Use of vehicles and 

equipment that may leak 

lubricants and fuel 

Dust fallout 

Page 7-7 

As discussed in Section 4.3.2, surface water flow occurs infrequently and for short durations after rainfall 

events. Most of this water seeps into the topsoil and shallow alluvial aquifer. The related pollution issues 

on shallow groundwater have been assessed in section 7.4.2 of this EIA. 

In the unmitigated scenario, surface water may collect contaminants (hydrocarbons, salts, chemicals, 

metals, etc.) from numerous sources. At elevated pollution concentrations these contaminants can be 

harmful to humans if ingested directly or indirectly through contaminated vegetation, vertebrates and 

invertebrates (impacts on biodiversity are assessed in Section 7.7 and will not be reassessed in this 

section). Therefore the precautionary approach has been applied with the result that contaminated 

surface water from the mine will be contained, re-used and/or treated. 

Despite this precaution one can assume that due to the site specific climatic and hydrological conditions, 

if a surface run-off occurs, a large fraction of the surface water seeps into the ground water alluvium. 

However mitigation measures are based on the principle of containing dirty water and diverting clean 

water as far as possible, so the drainage scheme will ensure that clean surface water flow is directed 

around structures such as the waste rock dumps and tailings disposal facility. 

In the mitigated scenario, most surface water run-off should be relatively clean and the severity reduces 

to low because: 

� by implementing a system where the dirty areas will be isolated from clean run-off and dirty water is 

contained and reused wherever possible rather than discharged into the environment, and 

� by implementing dust control measures the fallout of dust that can be collected and pollute surface 

water should also have been managed to acceptable levels. 

Duration 

The frequency and duration of surface water flows are limited but the potential health impacts, particularly 

for humans in the unmitigated scenario, are long term. In the mitigated scenario, the duration of any 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-8 

impacts is considered to be medium to short term because third parties will not be exposed to polluted 

water and there should not be significant related health risks. 

Spatial scale 

The spatial scale of the potential unmitigated impacts will be restricted to potential surface water use for 

as far as the contaminated surface water travels either on surface or in the shallow underlying zones. In 

the mitigated scenario contaminated water will be contained within the proposed mining project area, 

which is a localised spatial scale. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is high due to the potential for 

longer term health impacts, assuming pollution and ingestion occur. In the mitigated scenario, this 

reduces to low because the severity, duration and spatial scale of the impact are all reduced. 

Probability 

Given that any surface water will only be on the surface a short time, the probability of impacts is 

considered to be low. The additional mitigation measures recommended based on preventing pollution, 

containing any impacts on site and diverting clean water around the mining activities will ensure that the 

proposed project does not increase the probability of impacts on surface water. 

This translates into a low impact probability in the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated scenario, the significance of this potential impact is medium. In the mitigated scenario, 

the significance is reduced to low because of the reduction in severity, duration and probability. SLR’s 

confidence level in this rating is high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – surface water pollution 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated M-L H M H L M 

Mitigated L M-L L L L L 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to prevent pollution of surface water run-off and related health 

impacts on third parties. 



Actions 

In the construction, operation and decommissioning phases the mine will ensure that: 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-9 

� Pollution prevention through infrastructure design and operational procedures and through education 

and training of workers (permanent and temporary); 

� All hazardous chemicals (new and used), dirty water, mineralised wastes and non-mineralised 

wastes are handled in a manner that they do not contaminate surface water run-off or where this is 

not possible Auryx Gold will demonstrate through monitoring that the potential contamination is within 

acceptable limits from a human health and related risk perspective. 

� Where possible, surface water management facilities will be designed, constructed and operated so 

that dirty water is kept separate from clean water run-off through a system of berms, channels, 

trenches, flood protection measures, erosion protection or dams. The need for long term controls 

around the open pit, waste rock dump and TDF will be determined as part of closure planning. 

As part of closure planning, the designs of any permanent and potentially polluting structures will 

consider the requirements for long term surface water pollution prevention and confirmatory monitoring. 


Major spillage incidents that contaminate surface waters will be handled in accordance with the Auryx 

Gold emergency response procedure. 


The information in this section was sourced from the specialist groundwater studies in Appendix E (AGES 

2012). 

7.4.1 ISSUE: DEWATERING OF MINE PIT AND WATER SUPPLY 


With reference to Table 7-4, there are two activities that have the potential to reduce the local 

groundwater level: dewatering of the pit and borehole abstraction. Both activities will cease in the 

decommissioning phase. The impacts on biodiversity have been assessed in Section 7.7 therefore this 

section will focus on third party groundwater users. 

TABLE 7-4: LOWERING OF GROUNDWATER LEVELS – LINK PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Borehole abstraction 

Pit dewatering 








Severity 

A range of potential impacts have been identified as followed: 

� Damage to water supply pipeline from vandalism or flood/storm water. 

� Potential for pipeline to impact on water quality through corrosion/algae growth. 

� Potential for communities to cause pollution in the vicinity of abstraction boreholes. 

� Water losses through leaks, transmission and evaporation. 

� Depletion in water levels in boreholes due to over pumping. 

� Lower of water levels due to seepage into the open pit. 

� Depletion of neighbouring farms and/or community supply boreholes. 

� Permanent radius of influence due to mine dewatering. 

� Recovery of water levels in Karibib Marbles. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-10 

The overall severity of these impacts without mitigation is considered to be high but the majority can be 

reduced to low with mitigation. However, the potential impact on the neighbouring farms’ supply 

boreholes means that the severity with mitigation is medium to low. 

Duration 

The impacts are either short term or in the case of abstraction and de-watering activities for the life of 

mine. This is a medium to low duration. 

Spatial scale 

In the mitigated and unmitigated scenario the drawdown and related potential for impacts will be 

localised, but may extend beyond the proposed project boundary to as far as some of the neighbouring 

farms. Other impacts on water supply will be limited to the project area. This is a medium to low spatial 

scale. 

Consequence 

The consequence is medium in the unmitigated scenario and reduces to medium/low with mitigation. 

Probability 

The probability of impacts occurring is considered high to moderate in all cases without mitigation and 

while this reduces to low for most impacts with mitigation the impact on borehole supplies on 

neighbouring farms is moderate. 

Significance 

The significance of this potential impact is medium without mitigation and reduces to medium/low with 

mitigation. Auryx Gold will, as far as practicable possible, use pit water and will ensure maximum 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-11 

dewatering of tailings prior to placement in the pond, resulting in minimising the make-up water (water 

from boreholes). 

7.4.1.3 Tabulated summary of the assessed impact - dewatering and water supply 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H M-L M-L M H-M M 

Mitigated M-L M-L M-L M-L H-L M-L 


Discussion of the management measures is provided below and in the EMP (Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the management measures is to manage the proposed water supply and to monitor and 

mitigate if required the loss of groundwater in community supply boreholes. 

Actions 

Auryx Gold will ensure the following: 

� Pipeline construction in flood lines should be adequate to withstand flood conditions. 

� The pipeline should be visible and/ or marked to prevent damage to pipeline. 

� The pipeline and related infrastructure should be designed to minimise evaporation and transmission 

losses. 

� Pressure gauges should be installed at the pipeline for the early detection of pressure loss that may 

indicate leakages. 

� Monthly visual checks for damp areas around borehole equipment and pipeline. 

� Communities should be consulted before construction of the pipeline. 

� Boreholes and related equipment should be in a fenced in area in a locked pump house for protection 

against theft and vandalism. 

� Communities should be consulted in advance about the potential lowering of water levels in their 

boreholes. 

� Auryx Gold will make sure that only permitted abstraction rates are applied and production boreholes 

are not over pumped. 

� Water saving measures in mining, operational and tailings deposition processes should be 

implemented to further reduce the use of groundwater resources for make-up water. 

� If community supply boreholes are dewatered, they will be provided with an alternative water source. 

� Groundwater levels should be monitored in all pumping wells throughout the life of the mine as per 

the monitoring programme included in the EMP. 

� Groundwater levels should be monitored at all monitoring boreholes as well as the nearest 

community supply boreholes, as per the monitoring programme included in the EMP. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-12 

� Auryx Gold will ensure that it applies for the necessary permits, in terms of the Water Act of 1956, for 

abstraction and pit dewatering and that these permits are renewed as required. 


None identified. 

7.4.2 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON GROUNDWATER QUALITY 


With reference to Table 7-5 there are a number of sources in all phases that have the potential to pollute 

groundwater particularly in the unmitigated scenario. In the construction and decommissioning phases 

these potential pollution sources are temporary and diffuse in nature, usually existing for a few weeks to a 

few months. Even though the sources are temporary in nature, related potential pollution can be long 

term. The operational phase will present more long term potential sources and the closure phase will 

present final land forms that may have the potential to pollute water resources through long term seepage 

and/or run-off. 

TABLE 7-5: IMPACTS ON GROUNDWATER QUALITY –PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 





hydrocarbons) 

Waste management (nonmineralised) 

Sanitation 



Severity 

Mining development 



Dirty water management and 

related facilities 




hydrocarbons) 




Sanitation 

Pipelines 





hydrocarbons) 


(mineralised and non 

mineralised) 

Sanitation 

Slope stabilization 

Stockpiles and waste facilities 

Dirty water management and 

related facilities 

The main issues in the unmitigated scenario are considered to be the potential for: 

� Seepage from mineralised waste facilities (TDF and WRD); 

� Formation of acid drainage from the TDF; 

� Sulphate, metal, arsenic and nitrate leaching from the TDF 

� Seepage of dirty water into the aquifer; 

� Seepage into/flooding of mine pit; 

� Pollution from spillages of chemicals/fuel and sanitation facilities. 

Remaining infrastructure – 

surface water management 

system, TDFs, other 

mineralised stockpiles and 

other wastes 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-13 

The severity from these potential impacts is considered to be medium to high without mitigation. With 

mitigation some can be reduced but overall the potential remains high for seepage from the mineralised 

waste facilities and medium for other potential impacts. 

This gives an overall severity rating of medium to high in the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios 

Duration 

In the unmitigated scenario the duration is long term for all impacts. In the mitigated scenario the 

duration remains high. 

Spatial scale 

In the unmitigated scenario pollution would travel off site which is medium but this reduces to medium to 

low with mitigation. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is high. In the mitigated scenario, 

this reduces to high/medium because the severity and spatial scale of the impact is reduced. 

Probability 

In the unmitigated scenario the probability of impact is definite but reduces to medium/low with mitigation. 

Significance 


significance reduces to medium/low. SLR’s confidence level in this rating is moderate to high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – contamination of groundwater 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H-M H M H H H 

Mitigated H-M H M-L H-M M-L M-L 


Discussion of the management measures is provided below and in the Otjikoto EMP (Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the management measures is to contain pollution at source and/or prevent the off-site 

migration of pollution and prevent unacceptable groundwater pollution related to seepage and 

groundwater flow disruption impacts. 

Actions 

The following measures will be implemented by Auryx Gold: 



Design Phase 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-14 

� Follow-up geochemical studies in more detail will be conducted to further constrain sulphide content 

in the TDF and to better quantify potential leachate and acid formation possibilities. 

� Potential arsenic (As) and sulphate leaching from the sulphide dump shows that the TDF will most 

probably have to be hydrologically isolated. This requirement will be confirmed and assessed in the 

detailed design phase. 

� It is recommended that that the detailed design consider that a safety factor be built into the TDF 

base beneath the hydrologically isolating layer. 

� Measures identified during the detailed design phase of the mineralised waste facilities and low grade 

stockpiles aimed at minimising impacts on the environment and monitoring potential impacts on 

groundwater pollution will be implemented by the mine. 

Construction Phase 

� Adequate fuel containment facilities to be used during construction phase. 

� The use of all materials, fuels and chemicals which could potentially leach into groundwater must be 

controlled. 

� All materials, fuels and chemicals must be stored in a specific and secured area to prevent pollution 

from spillages and leakages. 

� Construction vehicles and machines must be maintained properly to ensure that oil spillages are kept 

at a minimum. 

� Spill trays must be provided if refuelling of construction vehicles are done on site. 

� Chemical sanitary facilities must be provided for construction workers. Construction workers should 

only be allowed to use temporary chemical / permanent toilets on the site. Chemical toilets shall not 

be within close proximity of any drainage system. Frequent maintenance should include removal 

without spillages. 

� No uncontrolled discharges from the construction camp shall be permitted. 

� Chemical storage areas should be sufficiently contained, and the use of chemicals should be 

controlled. 

Operation Phase 

� Adequate fuel containment facilities to be used. 

� The use of all materials, fuels and chemicals which could potentially leach into groundwater must be 

controlled. 

� All materials, fuels and chemicals must be stored in a bunded and secured area to prevent pollution 

from spillages and leakages. 

� Mine vehicles and machines must be maintained properly to ensure that oil spillages are kept at a 

minimum. 

� Spill trays must be provided for refuelling of mine vehicles. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-15 

� Proper sanitary facilities must be provided for mine workers. Chemical toilets shall not be within close 

proximity of any drainage system. Frequent maintenance should include the removal without 

spillages. 

� No uncontrolled discharges resulting in pollution of the receiving environment and aquifer shall be 

permitted. 

� Chemical storage areas should be sufficiently contained, and the use of chemicals should be 

controlled. 

� Water seeping into the open pit during mining should be directed into a sump and pumped to surface. 

� Water pumped from the open pit during mining should be pumped into a dirty water system and 

should not be allowed to enter any clean water system, natural drainage line, or the aquifer. 

� Seepage capturing boreholes, both shallow and deep, should be drilled west of the TDF and WRD. 

� A monitoring program must be implemented and honoured. Groundwater monitoring is recommended 

upstream and downstream from the TDF specifically sulphate, manganese, nickel, cobalt and 

arsenic. Cyanide (CN) is to be included in the monitoring protocol, should CN be used in the gold 

processing process. Nitrate should be included in the monitoring protocol on mine waste streams. 

� All water retention structures, including tailings disposal facilities, return water dams, storm water 

dams, retention ponds etc. should be constructed to have adequate freeboard to be able to contain 

water from 1:50 year rain events. 

� The groundwater flow model should be updated within one year after approval of the project (if 

approved) and every two years subsequently. 


Major spillage incidents will be handled in accordance with the Auryx Gold emergency response 

procedure. 

7.5 AIR 

The information in this section was sourced from the air specialist study in Appendix F (Airshed, 2012). 

7.5.1 ISSUE: AIR POLLUTION 


With reference to table 7-6, there are a number of activities in all phases that have the potential to pollute 

the air. In the construction and decommissioning phases these activities are temporary in nature. The 

operational phase will present more long term activities and the closure phase will present final land 

forms that may have the potential to pollute the air through long term wind erosion. 

Air pollution related impacts on biodiversity are discussed in Section 7.7 and therefore this section 

focuses on the potential for human health impacts. The air quality assessment focused on airborne 

particulates (PM10 emissions and total suspended particles). Gaseous pollutants (such as sulphur 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-16 

dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, carbon monoxide etc.) deriving from mine vehicles and equipment and from 

the gold smelting operations could not be assessed but were regarded by the specialist as potentially 

negligible in comparison to particulate emissions. 

TABLE 7-6: AIR POLLUTION – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Soil stripping 

Overburden removal 

Cleaning and grubbing 

Preparation of the 

foundations 

Compacting bases 

Opening borrow pits and 

trenches 



Building internal linear 


Vehicle movement and 

exhaust fumes 

Diesel generators 

limited drilling and blasting for 

mining 


Severity 


Overburden removal 

Drilling and blasting 

Crushing and screening 


exhaust fumes 

Soil management activities 


management 


Conveyors 


Diesel Generators 

General materials handling 

Removal of infrastructure 


exhaust fumes 

General material handling 

Soil management activities 



management 


Diesel Generators 

Mineralised waste facilities, 

Predicted off site PM10 ground level concentrations are high and exceed the annual and daily WHO-IT3 

limits at the six sensitive receptors that have been identified. With mitigation these exceedances can be 

reduced by between 63 to 70% and the impact area becomes much smaller with the WHO-IT3 daily limit 

exceeded at Farms 1 to 5. The annual limit is not exceeded at any of the Farms. The long term 

predictions from the model being used by the air quality specialist are more accurate than the short term 

predictions. 

Dust fall out rates are low for both the unmitigated and mitigated operations and are predicted to be well 

below SA residential limits of 600mg/m 2 /day and German limits of 350mg/m 2 /day. 

The overall severity of potential air quality impacts is considered to be high in the unmitigated scenario 

and reduces to medium because the annual WHO-IT3 limits for PM10ground level concentration are not 

exceeded at any potential receptor areas. 

Duration 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios, if human health impacts occur, these are potentially 

medium to long term in nature. This is a medium to high duration. 

Spatial scale 

Air quality impacts will be experienced off site in both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios so the 

spatial scale is medium. 



Consequence 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-17 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is high, which reduced to medium to 

high in the mitigated scenario. 

Probability 

The main contributing sources to both the unmitigated and mitigated PM10 predicted impacts are firstly 

the unpaved roads specifically between the open-pit and the waste rock dump, and secondly the 

materials handling operations and over the short term windblown dust from the TDF. In the unmitigated 

scenarios the PM10ground level concentrations exceed the WHO-IT3 limit at all sensitive receptors. With 

mitigation this reduces but there are still predicted to be exceedances at sensitive receptors. However, a 

number of uncertainties are associated with the calculation and simulation of fugitive dust from unpaved 

roads and windblown dust resulting in expected conservative ground level concentrations (GLCs). This is 

in addition to the inherent model uncertainty of -50% to 200%. With effective mitigation the impacts 

reduce significantly and can be limited to on-site only as indicated by the annual average GLCs. 

The probability of impacts in the unmitigated scenario is therefore high and in the mitigated scenario low 

to medium. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated scenario the significance is high and with mitigation medium to high. SLR’s confidence 

in this rating is moderate. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact –air pollution 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H M-H M H H H 

Mitigated M M-H M M-H L-M M-H 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective is to limit the mine’s contribution to air pollution impacts. 

Actions 

Auryx Gold will ensure the following: 

Construction phase 

� Drilling as part of the construction to be with water to ensure minimal dust generation. 

� Blasting as part of the construction should only occur during day-time hours. 



� Moist topsoil if excessive dust is generated by land clearing activities. 

� Ensure travel distance between clearing area and topsoil piles to be at a minimum. 

� Water sprays on all roads before grading. 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-18 

� Dust fallout bucket to be placed next to the main haul road from the proposed pit to the WRD with 

monthly dust fallout rates not exceeding 1 200 mg/m²/day. 

� Ensure all construction equipment is subject to an Inspection & Maintenance programme to 

ensure proper combustion. 

Operation Phase 

� Drilling to be with water to ensure minimal dust generation. 

� Blasting to only occur during day-time hours. 

� Ensure tip distance is minimal i.e. drop height into truck. 

� Should material transfer points generate visible dust, these must be controlled through effective 

mitigation measures. 

� Dust fallout bucket to be placed near the RoM pad (OT4) and at the Gold Plant (OT8) with 

monthly dust fallout rates not exceeding 1 200 mg/m²/day. 

� Ensure vegetation of TDF side slopes up to 1m from the top. Vegetation cover should be dense1 

to ensure >60% control efficiency. 

� Should wind erosion from exposed storage piles result in visible dust generation these must be 

controlled through effective mitigation measures. 

� Dust fallout bucket to be placed directly downwind of the TDF (OT5) with monthly dust fallout 

rates not exceeding 1 200 mg/m²/day. 

� Monthly visual inspections to ensure sufficient vegetation cover on TDF side-slopes. Should 

areas be exposed, vegetation cover should be extended. 

� Continuous water sprays on in-pit roads and onto WRD and at the RoM pad where the front-end- 

loader move to ensure >75% control efficiency. 

� If available and practical, chemical or biological based suppressants on permanent haul roads to 

WRD and to RoM storage pile to ensure >90% control efficiency. This requirement can be 

supported by sampling and analysing the silt content of the on-site unpaved roads in order to 

determine the actual silt content of the road material on-site. 

� Speed limits on all haul roads. 

� Ensure an Inspection & Maintenance programme for the entire mine fleet to ensure proper 

combustion of fuel. 

� Dust fallout buckets to be placed next to the main haul road to the WRD (OT3) and next the 

access road (OT6) with monthly dust fallout rates not exceeding. 1 200 mg/m²/day. 

� Water sprays at primary crusher to ensure 50% control efficiency. 

� Dust fallout buckets to be placed at the RoM pad (OT4) with monthly dust fallout rates not 

exceeding. 1 200 mg/m²/day. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-19 

� PM10 sampler to be placed at Farm 1 and at Farm 5 with annual average concentrations not to 

exceed 30 μg/m³ and daily concentrations not to exceed 75 μg/m³ for more than 1% of the time. 

� Dust fallout buckets to be placed at Farm 1 (OT2) and at Farm 5 (OT1) with monthly dust fallout 

rates not exceeding 600 mg/m²/day. 

� Dust fallout buckets to be placed for background at Farm 4 (OT7) with monthly dust fallout rates 

Closure Phase 

not exceeding 600 mg/m²/day. 

� Topsoil recovered from stockpiles for rehabilitation and revegetation of surroundings. 

� Topsoil cover onto TDF and vegetate with native grass species. 

� Contour berm at pit and vegetate with native grass species. 

� Should the infrastructure removal at the processing plant site including primary crusher and 

conveyors produce significant dust, mitigation measures should be applied. 

� Demolition of infrastructure that necessitates blasting should only be done during daytime hours. 

� Replant any previously removed native plant species in disturbed areas. 

� Indigenous plant species should be used in the final landscaping of the rehabilitated mine site. 

� Ensure a dense vegetation cover on WRD and TDF as defined by the final closure and 

decommissioning plan. 

General recommendations 

� Install a new weather station. The wind direction was confirmed through MM5 data but the wind 

speed in general is very low with exceptionally high percentage of calm condition. 

� Determine and model the emissions from the Gold Plant to ensure the impacts are below the 

ambient air quality limits. 



7.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION 

7.6.1 ISSUE: NOISE POLLUTION 

Introduction 

With reference to Table 7-7, there are a range of construction, operation and decommissioning activities 

that have the potential to generate noise and cause related pollution. Potential noise impacts on 

biodiversity are addressed in Section 7.7.4 and so this section will focus on the potential human related 

noise impacts. 



TABLE 7-7: NOISE POLLUTION – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-20 


Generators 

Vehicle movement 

Earth moving equipment 


Drilling 

Blasting 


Crushing and conveyors 


Severity 

Drilling 

Blasting 


material tipping 


Crushing 


conveyors 

Generators 



Material tipping 

Stripping of buildings and 

equipment 

Generators 

Noise pollution will have different impacts on different receptors because some are very sensitive to noise 

and others are not. For example, workers in general do not expect an environment free of work related 

noise and so they will be less sensitive to environmental noise pollution at work. In contrast, residents in 

the area are likely to be more sensitive to unnatural noises and so any change to ambient noise levels 

because of mine related noise will have a negative impact on them and their experience. Excluding one 

noise sensitive development (NSD01), the severity of the noise impact is considered to be low for all 

potentially noise-sensitive developments. Considering a worse-case scenario the severity of the potential 

noise impact could be a medium on NSD01. It should be noted that the unmitigated medium severity is 

based on the fact that there is the potential that the operation of the mine will increase the ambient sound 

levels at night by more than 7 dBA at this one property. As such, it is possible that the receptor (NSD01) 

will detect the change in ambient sound level, yet is it is unlikely that the receptor may complain, as the 

total cumulative night-time noise level is still predicted to be less than 35 dBA (a level determined to be 

the level where rural communities may start to complain about the increased noise levels). NSD01 (farm 

house), however, belongs to the developer, hence the implementation of mitigation measures can include 

no permanent occupation of the farm house during operations. 

In the unmitigated scenario, it is estimated that noise will have a medium to low severity because of the 

potential impact on one receptor but that this can be reduced to low with mitigation. 

Duration 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios the noise pollution impacts will occur until the closure 

phase of the mine. This is a medium duration. 

Spatial scale 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios the noise impacts will extend beyond the proposed 

project site. This is a medium spatial scale. 


N/A


Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario the consequence is medium and this reduces to low with mitigation. 

Probability 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-21 

The probability of the noise impact occurring is definite in both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios. 

The related probability is therefore high. 

Significance 

The significance of this impact is medium to low in the unmitigated and low in the mitigated scenarios. 

SLR’s confidence level is high for this significance rating. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – noise impacts 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated M -L M M M-L H M-L 

Mitigated L M M L H L 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the measures is to limit noise pollution impacts. 

Actions 


� Communication channels are established to ensure prior notice to the sensitive receptor if work is 

to take place close to them. Information that should be provided to the potential sensitive 

receptor(s) include: 

o Proposed working times; 

o how long the activity is anticipated to take place; 

o what is being done; 

o contact details of a responsible person where any complaints can be lodged should there 

be an issue of concern. 

� Plant and equipment is well-maintained and fitted with the correct and appropriate noise 

abatement measures. 

� The development of a noise barrier between NSD01 and the open pit development, should 

people permanently live at the farm house. This would take the form of a topsoil berm of a height 

of at least 5 meters. Alternatively, no people will permanently stay at the farm house during the 

operational phase of the mine. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-22 

� A noise monitoring programme is developed and implemented before the start of the operation. 

Quarterly monitoring is recommended at the location of NSD01 (if people live at the farm house), 

as well as any other NSDs that have complained to the developer regarding noise originating 

from the facility. Annual feedback regarding noise monitoring should be presented to all 

stakeholders and other Interested and Affected Parties in the area. It is recommended that the 

noise monitoring results be used in a sound propagation model to illustrate the extent of the 

noise impact from the operation. 



7.6.2 ISSUE: BLASTING HAZARDS 


The proposed mining project will introduce blasting in to the area. Blasting activities have the potential to 

impact on people, animals and structures located in the vicinity of the operation. Blast hazards include 

ground vibration, airblast, fly rock, blast fumes and dust. Ground vibrations travel directly through the 

ground and have the potential to cause damage to surrounding structures. Airblasts result from the 

pressure released during the blast resulting in an air pressure pulse (wave), which travels away from the 

source and has the potential to damage surrounding structures. Fly rock is the release of pieces of rock 

over a distance and can be harmful to people and animals and damage structures and property. Blast 

fumes and dust, caused by the explosion, can be considered significant nuisance factors. Ground 

vibrations and airblasts have the potential to cause nuisance to people and animals even if blasts occur 

within legal limits. 

Table 7-8 identifies that blast related impacts are an issue during the construction and operational 

phases. Issues relating to blasting noise and blasting dust have been assessed as part of Section 7.6 

and Section 7.5. This section focuses on the impacts of ground vibration, airblast and flyrock, collectively, 

as they relate to people, biodiversity and associated land uses. 

TABLE 7-8: BLASTING HAZARDS– LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Blasting Blasting 


Severity 

N/A N/A 

In the unmitigated scenario, ground vibrations and airblasts can cause damage to third party structures 

and can be a nuisance for animals and people, within the zone of influence. When considering fly rock, 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-23 

in the unmitigated scenario, fly rock (of varying sizes) has the potential to travel some distances from the 

blast site and might cause injury and death to people and animals and damage to plants and structures. 

If any damage or injury occurs it is considered to be a high severity in the unmitigated scenario which 

may be reduced to medium in the mitigated scenario because the potential for blast related incidents is 

expected to decrease with properly designed blasts. 

Duration 

Injury or death is considered to be long term in nature. Therefore the unmitigated and mitigated duration 

is high. 

Spatial scale 

In the unmitigated scenario, potential impacts will be felt outside of the mine boundary but for the most 

part will still be localised. Injury and/or or death to people will, however, be felt by families and 

communities beyond the site boundary. Although no third party structures are expected to be at risk, 

there may be the odd curious third party that approaches the open pit area. 

Consequence 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios the consequence is high. 

Probability 

In the unmitigated scenario, the probability of blasting hazards resulting in either damage and/or creating 

a nuisance is low due to the remote setting of the project site and limited third party infrastructure in the 

vicinity of the open pit. In addition, as the pit deepens, the blast will be contained within the pit. With 

mitigation the low probability is reduced even more because access to the fly rock zone will be controlled 

and proper blast design will be adhered to thereby minimising vibrations. 

Significance 

The significance of this potential impact is medium in the unmitigated and medium to low in the mitigated 

scenarios. SLR’s confidence level in this rating is high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – blasting hazards 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H H M H L M 

Mitigated M H L-M H L M-L 



(Appendix M). 



Objective 

The objective of the measures is to prevent blast related damage to third parties and infrastructure. 

Actions 

The blast design, implementation and monitoring will, as a general rule, ensure that: 

� Fly rock is contained within a maximum of 500m of the blast site; 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-24 

� Prior to each blast the blast area will be cleared of third parties to a safe distance determined by 

appropriate legislation and safe working procedures. Prior to each blast an audible warning will be 

sounded; 

� ground vibration at the closest third party structures is less than 12mm/s peak particle velocity; and 

� air blast at the closest third party structures is less than 130dB; and 

� All registered complaints will be documented, investigated and efforts made to address the area of 

concern where possible. 


If a person or animal is injured by fly rock or damage is caused to third party infrastructure this must be 

handled in accordance with the Auryx Gold emergency response procedure. 


The information in this section was sourced from the biodiversity specialist studies in Appendix H. 


The section is intended to be a high level assessment of biodiversity impacts. Therefore, readers must be 

aware of the content of the baseline description (Section 4.6), the content of the specialist reports 

(Appendix H) and the content of the EMP (Appendix M) when reading this section. 

The assessment covers the following broad topics: physical destruction of biodiversity and related 

functions, impacts on water resources as an ecological driver, general disturbances to biodiversity. Each 

of these topics is individually assessed below in relation to the proposed mining project. 

7.7.2 ISSUE: PHYSICAL IMPACTS ON BIODIVERSITY 


With reference to Table 7-9, there are a number of activities/infrastructure in all phases of the project that 

have the potential to impact on biodiversity in the broadest sense, although the principle impacts would 

occur in the construction and operation phases. In this regard, the discussion relates to the physical 

destruction of specific biodiversity areas, of linkages between biodiversity areas and of related species 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-25 

which are considered to be significant because of their status, and/or the role that they play in the 

ecosystem. 

TABLE 7-9: PHYSICAL IMPACTS ON BIODIVERSITY - LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Infrastructure establishment 




foundations 



trenches 



Open pit development 



Severity 




waste management 

(mineralised) 

stockpile development 

Exploration 

Material movement 




Erosion of final land forms 

The project is located in an area of low biodiversity sensitivity and there are extensive areas of similar 

habitat in the surrounding area. However, the removal or killing of individual organisms during 

construction, operational and decommissioning activities has the potential to impact on: 

� Plants, particularly trees, some of them protected 

� Satellite fauna and flora of above-mentioned trees 

� Animals, especially reptiles and invertebrates, as a result of being struck by vehicles and 

machinery moving earth or using roads 

� Dormant organisms, such as frogs, outside their season of activity 

� Seeds and eggs, and their loss prevents establishment of the next generation 

� Nests of bird species of sensitive conservation status are destroyed, as are dens or crèches of 

mammals 

Given the above discussion, the unmitigated severity is medium which may reduce to between medium 

and low with the successful implementation of the mitigation measures. 

Duration 

Direct destruction will be limited to the life of the mine and given the low sensitivity of the habitat impacted 

there should be no longer term impacts. The duration is therefore medium in both the unmitigated and 

mitigated scenarios. 

Spatial scale 

Given that there are extensive areas of similar habitat surrounding the project area the impacts will be 

confined to the project area, the spatial scale of impacts is therefore low in both the unmitigated and 

mitigated scenarios. 



Consequence 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-26 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of the potential impact is medium and this reduces to 

medium/low with mitigation. 

Probability 

Without any mitigation the probability associated with the impacts is definite. With mitigation, the 

probability of impacts will be reduced because emphasis will be placed on conserving and restoring areas 

and related biodiversity. 

Significance 

The significance of this potential impact is medium in the unmitigated scenario and remains medium for 

the mitigated scenario as the physical destruction of some biodiversity is unavoidable. SLR’s confidence 

level in this rating is moderate to high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – physical destruction of biodiversity 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated M M L M H M 

Mitigated M-L M L M-L M M 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to prevent, as far as is possible, the unacceptable loss of 

biodiversity and related functionality through physical disturbance. 

Actions 

In the construction, operation and decommissioning phases Auryx Gold will: 

� Design footprints of all facilities as small as possible and generally limit mine infrastructure, activities 

and related disturbance to those specifically identified and described in this EIA report; 

� Mark out all construction footprints and clearly convey the rule of staying inside these boundaries to 

all relevant contractors; 

� Prior to construction, and in consultation with a specialist, scan proposed construction sites for any 

more sensitive flora and fauna and implement the recommendations of the specialist –these could 

include but not be limited to: a search and rescue of dens, crèches and burrows, 

relocating/demarcating nests, demarcating flora (protected trees) to either be conserved within the 

construction site or relocated; 

� Clearly demarcate boundaries of the waste rock dump and TDF; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-27 

� At least a 100 m wide boundary zone around pans should be kept free of developments and mine- 

related activities, specifically, the large ephemeral pan located east of the mine site should be 

avoided - the delineation of the pan as provided by the specialist should be used as the pan 

boundary; 

� Where possible avoid cutting or relocating protected trees and develop plans to care for them during 

the life of mine until their surroundings have been restored; 

� Where disturbance of protected trees is unavoidable, apply for the necessary permits in a timely 

manner; 

� As much as possible and as is feasible, evacuate any animals of conservation significance from the 

mining area before disturbance; 

� Remove and stockpile topsoil, along with its soil fauna and seed banks, and devise plans for its 

management during stockpiling and redeployment for restoration; 

� Where feasible, remove other organic material, including litter and dead wood, and stockpile 

separately for future use in restoration. Appropriate stockpiling methods should be investigated, and 

should promote the viability of the communities they contain; 

� Construction crews and mining staff should be held to the rule of staying inside the demarcated 

boundaries of the construction and mining site areas; 

� Earthen-bund the perimeter of the mining pit to reduce the chances of animals being killed or injured 

by blasting, or incurring damage by mining equipment; 

� Construct roads as narrow as operationally feasible and maintain all roads in good condition so that 

diversions off roads will not be necessary; 

� Aggregate borrow pits for road construction should be sited on the proposed mining site to reduce 

overburden stockpiling and unnecessary environmental disturbance; 

� Develop road use policy, including speed limits, and enforce this; 

� Upon completing construction, initiate restoration of all roads and other sites that were only impacted 

during construction and will not be required for mining operation; 

� Increase environmental awareness through training of key staff, including their ability to handle 

animals during evacuation; and 

� Rigorously police the construction crews’ and mining staff’s adherence to the rules and do not 

hesitate to invoke penalty clause/s. 



7.7.3 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON WATER RESOURCES AS AN ECOLOGICAL DRIVER 


Water is a key ecological driver (an element that is important for the functioning of that habitat and related 

ecosystem). In the context of the proposed mining project the potential issues of concern are the de- 

watering of the mine pit, the introduction of the proposed TDF as a potentially large water body and the 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-28 

potential for the blocking or deviation of water flow caused by the placement of project infrastructure in 

particular the waste rock dump and the TDF. Table 7-10 sets out the activities/infrastructure in all phases 

that have the potential to reduce (or increase in the case of the TDF) the availability of surface water, and 

change drainage patterns within and adjacent to the proposed project site. 

TABLE 7-10: IMPACT ON WATER RESOURCES AS AN ECOLOGICAL DRIVER – LINK TO PROJECT 

PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Placement of all 

infrastructure, particularly the 


Construction of surface water 

containment and/or diversion 

infrastructure – berms, 

channels, dams. 


Severity 





Water containment and/or 

diversion infrastructure – 

berms, channels, dams. 




Water containment and/or 

diversion infrastructure – 

berms, channels, dams. 

Open pit 

Placement of final land forms 

with associated water 

containment and/or diversion 

infrastructure – berms, 

channels, dams. 

Open pit 

Periodic surface water run-off and the existence of near-surface water resources are understood to be 

key ecological drivers for vegetation, vertebrates and invertebrates within and downstream of the 

proposed project site because it recharges the moisture content of the aquifer. This in turn supports a 

range of vegetation, in particular larger trees which in turn support a range of invertebrates and 

vertebrates. In addition, water points on farms, on which wild mammals and birds also depend, may 

become more difficult to replenish. 

The proposed TDF raises potential impacts by introducing a large source of water which could disrupt the 

normal population dynamics with local increases as a result of the increase in this resource and then 

increased mortality once the resource is removed. There is also the potential impact that ingesting this 

water may have on the mortality/morbidity of species. 

Having regard to the available water resources and sensitivity of the habitats involved, the unmitigated 

severity is considered to be medium which would reduce to low with the successful implementation of the 

mitigation measures. 

Duration 

De-watering will be limited to the life of the mine and with mitigation, the reduction in water resource 

availability should be avoided or temporary. Impacts associated with surface water flow and the TDF 

should also be restricted to life of mine and therefore the duration is medium. 



Spatial scale 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-29 

Without mitigation, the spatial scale of the de-watering impacts may extend beyond the site boundary in 

the unmitigated scenario which is a medium spatial scale. With mitigation impacts should be confined to 

the project area. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is medium. In the mitigated 

scenario this reduces to low. 

Probability 

The probability of impacts is considered to be medium without mitigation reducing to low with mitigation. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated scenario, the significance of the impact is medium. In the mitigated scenario, the 

significance reduces to low. SLR’s confidence in this rating is moderate to high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – water resource as an ecological driver 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated M M M M M M 

Mitigated L M L L L L 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to prevent significant reductions in water flows and related 

loss of biodiversity and ecosystem functionality. 

Actions 

In the construction, operation and decommissioning phases Auryx Gold will ensure that: 

� Design footprints of all facilities as small as possible and generally limit mine infrastructure, activities 

and related disturbance to those specifically identified and described in this EIA report; 

� Clean surface water diversion measures are provided around infrastructure and activities; 

� Ensure long term designs for waste rock dump and TDF allow for the diversion of water to maintain 

natural surface water flow paths as far as practically possible; 

� Minimise water abstraction other than dewatering of the pit by reducing the mine’s water 

requirements as much as possible; 

� Access to the TDF should be prevented as far as practically possible; 

� If tree condition declines, investigate measures to improve it without abstracting more water and 

investigate possibilities for offsetting significant tree mortalities; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-30 

� During mining operations it may become necessary to extract excess water from the open-cast pit. 

Water extracted in the process should be recycled and reused by the mine thereby reducing its need 

for external water supply. 

� Monitor groundwater levels in boreholes on an on-going basis; and 

� Annually record health condition of a sample of large trees throughout the life of mine in a reasonable 

radius (i.e. a radius that reflects the outcome of hydrogeological modelling studies) around the mine 

pit and should there be a significant decline in health or increase in mortalities that can be linked to 

groundwater changes, a detailed action plan should be drafted that will define and refine further 

mitigation options. Should there be no mitigation options, biodiversity offsets should be considered. 

As part of closure planning, the designs of any permanent structures will take into consideration the 

requirements related to surface water flow. 



7.7.4 ISSUE: GENERAL DISTURBANCE OF BIODIVERSITY 


With reference to table 7-11 there are a number of activities/infrastructure that have the potential to 

disturb vegetation, vertebrates and invertebrates in all mine phases, particularly in the unmitigated 

scenario. In the construction and decommissioning phases these activities are temporary in nature, 

usually existing for a few weeks to a few months. The operational phase will present more long term 

occurrences and the closure phase will present final land forms that may have pollution potential through 

long term seepage and/or run-off. 

TABLE 7-11: GENERAL DISTURBANCE OF BIODIVERSITY – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND 

ACTIVITIES 


General construction activities 





hydrocarbons) 

Waste management (nonmineralised) 


Use of vehicles and equipment 

that may leak lubricants and 

fuel 

Security lights 

Contractors camp 

Vehicle movement on access 

roads, internal roads and off 

road 






hydrocarbons) 



Vehicle movement on 

access roads, internal roads 

and off road 





Mine development 

Material handling 







hydrocarbons) 







Material handling 


Vehicle movement on access 

roads, internal roads and off 

road 

Remaining mineralised waste 

facilities 

Any remaining mine voids 




Severity 

In the unmitigated scenario, biodiversity will be disturbed in the following ways: 

� Firewood collection can lead to loss of woody plants and their key role as a nutrient source; 

� Illegal poaching of game, game birds, reptiles and other animals; 

� Illegal collection and loss of seeds and plants; 

� Deposition of dust on plant communities and impact on plant vitality; 

� Introduction of invasive plant species; 

� Interference with movement of large game; 

� Habitat fragmentation isolates organisms from wider populations; 

� The presence of vehicles in the area can cause road kills especially if drivers speed; 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-31 

� White light attracts large numbers of invertebrates which become easy prey for predators - this can 

upset the invertebrate population balances; 

� Noise and vibration pollution may scare off vertebrates and invertebrates and influence migration 

paths; 

� The presence of open pits and water dams may lead to the death/injury of animals; and 

� Pollution emissions, residues from the mining activities and general litter may impact on the survival 

of individual plants, vertebrates and invertebrates. 

Cumulatively, these disturbances will have a medium to high severity in the unmitigated scenario. In the 

mitigated scenario, many of these disturbances can be prevented or mitigated to acceptable levels, which 

reduces the severity to medium/low. 

Duration 

In both the mitigated and unmitigated scenarios, the impacts are linked to the life of the mine, so the 

duration is medium. 

Spatial scale 

The movement of species and linkages between biodiversity areas extend beyond the mine site leading 

to a medium impact in the unmitigated scenario. This is could be reduced to low with mitigation. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario, the consequence of this potential impact is medium. In the mitigated 

scenario, this reduces to between medium and low because the severity and spatial scale of the impact is 

reduced. 

Probability 

Without any mitigation the probability of negatively impacting biodiversity through multiple disturbance 

events is high. With mitigation, the probability will be reduced to medium because most of the 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-32 

disturbances can be controlled through implementation and enforcement of practices, policies and 

procedures. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios, the significance of this potential impact is medium. SLR’s 

confidence level in this rating is high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact- general biodiversity disturbance 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H-M M M M H M 

Mitigated M-L M L M-L M M 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to prevent unacceptable disturbance of biodiversity. 

Actions 

In the construction, operation and decommissioning phases Auryx Gold will: 

� The working area of the ML will be fenced; 

� Develop a policy that limits independent movements by staff into the veld outside the fenced-in 

mining site. Strictly prevent poaching and harvesting, including of firewood, or possession of any 

such natural materials. Enforce rules with “zero tolerance”; 

� Provide or ensure that there is adequate food for workers on site and at the accommodation camp; 

� Allow only mining personnel, service providers and construction staff, as well as registered mine 

visitors on site; 

� Train all mine staff to appreciate the natural non-consumptive values of biodiversity, as well as 

legislation relating to protected species; 

� Raise awareness concerning recognising venomous snakes/invertebrates from non-dangerous ones, 

and ensure that sufficient personnel are trained to handle snakes/invertebrates so as to move them 

away from the mine without killing; 

� In general, where feasible, ‘mosquito’ screens should be installed on door and window openings to 

exclude flying insects from indoor working areas. This is particularly important if an on-site kitchen 

and canteen area is planned; 

� Compensate farmers for livestock and game losses, based on valid claims. 

� Train all drivers of vehicles in the necessary procedures for the safe operation of all vehicles and to 

maintain regulated speed; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-33 

� Carry out regular training to instil appropriate vehicle control and a high degree of professional road 

conduct; 

� Enforce speed limits, including using speed-reducing methods and speed-monitoring devices; 

� As much as operationally feasible, driving to and from the mining site should be avoided at night and 

limited, if possible, only to within the mining area; 

� Use yellow outdoor lights (sodium vapour floodlights with orange covers, or yellow bulbs/tubes for 

incandescent and fluorescent lights) wherever possible as this is less glaring to invertebrates while 

serving human requirements; 

� Reduce the attraction to invertebrates to indoor lights by installing self-closing doors and non-opening 

windows in night-time operations buildings; 

� If automated, UV-attractant pest management devices have to be deployed, such systems should be 

either kept indoors (e.g. in maintenance sheds, inside administrative blocks, or inside production 

plants) or should be covered with wire mesh to ensure that only target organisms of the right size are 

electrocuted; 

� Ensure that animals have no access to contaminated water sources; 

� Fence in TDF and other areas that are regularly artificially wetted and use other proven means to 

deter birds from reaching them; wetted areas should be kept to a minimum; 

� All chemicals, emissions, and leaching products as well as tailings must be strictly contained and 

regularly timely cleaned or neutralised, adhering to best practises; 

� Develop a site waste management policy and actively enforce it; 

� Develop policy for the management of hazardous materials and actively enforce it; 

� Provide temporary waste deposition facilities on site (rubbish bins, skips), which are secure from 

scavengers, storms, or other disturbance; 

� Provide adequate toilet facilities for all workers at work sites and enforce a strict policy of not 

defecating in the field; 

� Apply appropriate hydrocarbon-handling principles (storage tanks should have bunding and be 

regularly inspected, lubricants should be stored in properly designated and appointed facilities, 

spillages should be cleaned up immediately, adequate control over use of fuels); 

� Contain all contaminated water and purify it to potable quality before reuse, or release into the 

environment (if applicable); 

� Where possible, avoid destroying trees or disturbing their proximity, so that animals can continue to 

use them; 

� Locate linear infrastructure in a way that minimises new fragmentation, e.g. using infrastructure 

corridors; 

� Rehabilitate areas around linear infrastructure after installing it such that they minimise habitat 

fragmentation, allowing populations to be connected across them; 

� Implementing strict controls over the movement of materials onto and off the site to minimise the 

spread of invasive species; if this becomes a problem monitor the occurrence and spread of invasive 

species so as to instigate steps for their control, following expert advice; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-34 

� An expert study on the effects of the mine and its related activities on the cheetah population should 

be conducted, specifically focusing on those cheetahs whose home ranges are within an area of 

about 25 km of the mine; the study should determine how mining activities affect the movements and 

local population of cheetahs. 

As part of closure planning, the designs of any permanent and potentially polluting structures will take 

consideration of the requirements for long term pollution prevention and confirmatory monitoring. 


Major spillage incidents will be handled in accordance with the Auryx Gold emergency response 

procedure. 

Certain instances of injury to animals may be considered emergency situations. These will be managed 

in accordance with the Auryx Gold emergency response procedure. 

7.8 VISUAL 

The information in this section was sourced from the visual specialist study in Appendix J. 

7.8.1 ISSUE: VISUAL IMPACT 


With reference to table 7-12, visual impacts may be caused by activities and infrastructure in all project 

phases. The more significant activities and infrastructure are associated with the operational phase when 

the waste rock dump and TDF are being developed. 

TABLE 7-12: VISUAL IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Existing mine development 

Foundations 

Trenches 

Stockpiles 

Scaffolding 

Cranes 

Borrow pits 

Roads 

Power lines 

Pipelines 

Lights 


Severity 

Open pits 

Stockpiles 



Trenches 

Buildings and equipment 

Pipelines 

Power lines 

Conveyors 

Lights 

Stockpiles 



Trenches 

Scaffolding 

Cranes 

Piles of rubble 

Piles of scrap 

Pipelines 

Power lines 

Conveyors 

Lights 

Permanent mineralised waste 

facilities 

The severity of visual impacts is determined by assessing the change to the visual landscape as a result 

of mine related infrastructure and activities. The most visible aspect of the proposed mining project will be 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-35 

the proposed waste rock dump which, at 40m high, is considered to have a high visual impact without 

mitigation. Other elements of the mine including the processing plant, open pit and TDF are all lower in 

height and benefit from the screening provided by surrounding vegetation. 

Overall, because of the impacts of the waste rock dump, the severity is considered to be high in the 

unmitigated scenario but reduces to medium with mitigation. 

Duration 

The duration is high in the unmitigated scenario because the visual impacts would be experienced after 

the life of the mine. Depending on the effectiveness of the proposed mitigation measures for the waste 

rock dump in particular this may be reduced to medium as the processing plant would be removed and 

the open pit and TDF would be screened from view. 

Spatial scale 

This is a medium spatial scale in both the mitigated and unmitigated scenarios. 

Consequence 

In the mitigated scenario the consequence is high and with mitigation it is medium. 

Probability 

The probability of the visual impact occurring is high in the unmitigated scenario and could be reduced to 

medium with the successful implementation of mitigation. 

Significance 

The significance is high in the unmitigated scenario and reduces to medium with mitigation. SLR’s 

confidence in this rating is moderate to high because it is dependent on the successful implementation of 

mitigation measures to reduce the impact of the waste rock dump. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact - visual 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H H M H H H 

Mitigated M M M M M M 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the measures is to limit visual impacts. 



Actions 

During construction, operation and decommissioning the following general principles apply: 

� Signage on the B1 for the mine should be limited, 

� All vegetation within the mine site that is not removed needs to be managed and protected, 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-36 

� In all areas which are to be excavated, topsoil needs to be removed and stockpiled in a suitable 

location and utilised in rehabilitation of the TDF and WRD, plant and infrastructure areas. 

� The use of face brick should be avoided and glass surfaces should be shielded to avoid glare and 

reflections. 

� All lighting is to be kept to a minimum within the requirements of safety and efficiency. Overly tall light 

poles are to be avoided and if exposed to the public line of site, low wattage and directional lighting 

should be used as appropriate. Security and perimeter lighting, where required, must also be 

shielded so that no light falls outside the area needing to be lit. 

� Dust suppression mitigation as recommended in Section 7.5should be applied; 

� Unless utilized in the operation phase, construction structures need to be removed and the area 

rehabilitated back to scrub thicket; 

� The areas of the old road which will not be utilised for the mine need to be ripped and rehabilitation to 

scrub thicket; 

� Special attention needs to be given to the entrance to the B1, as well as to the eastern section where 

the new road diverges from the old. At these locations, a 2.5 meter natural looking berm needs to be 

raised to act as a screening wall. The berms need to be planted with local endemic plants to ensure 

that the views down the old road are screened; 

� All painted surfaces should blend into the natural surroundings. 

� Rehabilitation of all the faces of the WRD to grass / scrub bushes and some trees; 

� Reduce the angle of the WRD slope if not suitable for rehabilitation; 

� There will be continuous rehabilitation of the TDF dam walls as they are raised; 

� An agreement needs to be reached with the local municipality to ensure that the trees between the 

railway line and the road are not removed; and 

� For the closure phase: 

o Auryx will establish a mechanism to ensure that the rehabilitation of the mine is properly funded 

to ensure that sufficient funds are available to implement the rehabilitation and mitigations 

required for closure. 

o All components of the infrastructure used during operation, apart from the WRD and TDF, must 

be removed. The site must be visually ‘cleaned up’ so as to portray an uncluttered landscape. 

o The ground where processing plants were located must be decontaminated and then covered by 

the earth used for the berm and landscaped into a natural form in alignment with the natural 

hydrological patterns. 





7.9 ARCHAEOLOGY 

The information in this section was sourced from the archaeology specialist studies in Appendix I. 

7.9.1 ISSUE: IMPACTS ON ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES AND LANDSCAPES 


SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-37 

With reference to table 7-13, there are a number of activities/infrastructure in all phases of the proposed 

project that have the potential to damage archaeological resources. 

TABLE 7-13: ARCHAEOLOGY IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Infrastructure establishment 




foundations 



trenches 


Building internal linear 




Severity 



waste management 

(mineralised) 

stockpile development 

Removal of infrastructure 


Material movement 


The nature of the likely impacts on the archaeological sites include the direct impacts of earthmoving 

activities and the indirect impacts of accelerated soil erosion caused by the clearance of vegetation, and 

potential damage from blasting activities. Given the sensitive nature of the archaeological sites and when 

taking into account existing impacts from on-site exploration activities, the severity of these impacts 

without mitigation is high, but this could be reduced to low/medium with mitigation. 

Duration 

In the unmitigated scenario, the loss of archaeological sites and the related losses to the broader 

archaeological landscape is long term and will continue after the life of the mine. With mitigation, which 

includes the documenting and relocation of burial sites, where applicable, and preservation of sites in- 

situ, the duration is reduced to low. 

Spatial scale 

The spatial scale is considered to extend beyond the site boundary in the unmitigated scenario and is a 

medium impact. With mitigation, the spatial scale will be localised to within the site boundary 


N/A


Consequence 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-38 

The consequence of this potential impact is high in the unmitigated scenario. It reduces to low in the 

mitigated scenario because the severity, duration and spatial scale are reduced. 

Probability 

Without mitigation the probability of impact is considered high but this can be reduced to low with 

mitigation. 

Significance 

The significance of this potential impact is high in the unmitigated scenario and low in the mitigated 

scenario. SLR’s confidence in this rating is high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact - archaeology 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H H M H H H 

Mitigated M-L L L L L L 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the measures is to prevent the unacceptable loss of archaeological sites and related 

historical information. 

Actions 

In the construction, operation and decommissioning phases Auryx Gold will ensure that: 

� It limits mine infrastructure, activities and related disturbance to those specifically identified and 

described in this EIA report. 

� The sites reported in Appendix I will be marked and protected, and the area within cleared of all 

encroaching bush. In the case of QRS 83/ 1 & 2, if the cutline running past the site will be used in the 

future, it should be re-routed to provide a 20m buffer around the site. 

� The site localities should be indicated on the project GIS and all relevant field mapping and should be 

made known to all contractors whose activities might encroach on the sites. Test excavation may be 

required to confirm the identification of the cairns as burial sites. 

� A formal “No-Go Area” policy, as set out in the Otjikoto EMP, will be developed and implemented. 

� All workers (temporary and permanent) will be educated about the archaeological sites that may be 

encountered and appropriate training will be provided. 

� In the event that mining activities will unavoidably encroach on the sites, the company is legally 

obliged to take all necessary steps either to protect the sites, or to re-locate the burials according to 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-39 

official directives. In the case of QRS 83/1 & 2, it may be appropriate to approach the National 

Heritage Council for a permit to be issued under Part V (Sections 48 and 52) of the National Heritage 

Act. In the case of QRS 83/3, the site would also fall under the protection of the Burial Places 

Ordinance (27 of 1966). 


If there are any chance finds of archaeological sites that have not been identified and described in the 

specialist report, Auryx Gold will follow its chance find procedure. The key component of which is to 

ensure that the site remains undisturbed until a specialist has assessed the site, assessed the potential 

damage, advised on the necessary management steps and advised on the requirements for stakeholder 

consultation and permitting. 

7.10 TRAFFIC 

7.10.1 ISSUE: TRAFFIC IMPACT 


In the broadest sense (see Table 7-14), the activities associated with the proposed project will generate 

traffic in all phases, however the mine will have access off the main B1 road which is designed to carry 

traffic of this nature. Mine related traffic will travel from both the Otavi and Otjwarongo directions on a 

daily basis with all traffic using the B1 from which the re-routed D2808 will provide the site access. Traffic 

on the B1would be a combination of Auryx Gold, other mining and businesses together with private and 

tourism related traffic. The highest levels of traffic would be likely to be experienced during the 

construction phase which is relatively short term. Levels over the operational life of the mine would be 

lower and traffic in the decommissioning phase will reduce to the extent that production related traffic 

ceases. In the closure phase traffic will be limited to just occasional trips for monitoring and aftercare 

activities. 

The proposed re-routing of the D2808 does not form part of the scope of this EIA and will be addressed 

in a separate EIA process. It is anticipated that this separate EIA will consider issues associated with 

road capacity and road design as they relate to an increase in traffic from the mine’s operation. In this 

regard, the assessment below therefore focuses on the safety of road users in general based on 

experience with similar type mining projects and assuming that the current level of service is retained 

and/or upgraded (if required), 

TABLE 7-14: TRAFFIC IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Construction activities 

Proposed operational 

activities 

Decommissioning activities Aftercare and maintenance 

activities 




Severity 

Traffic impacts associated with additional vehicle numbers using the B1 include: 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-40 

� The high speed of the traffic using the road and the potential for road traffic or pedestrian 

accidents; 

� Loose gravel can lead to cracked windscreens; and 

� The presence of animals and the risk of collision. 

In the unmitigated and mitigated scenario, the potential for injury and death to road users gives this a 

high severity. 

Duration 

Any serious injury or death is considered a long term impact. 

Spatial scale 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios, the impact will be experienced beyond the boundary of 

the mine. The spatial scale is medium. 

Consequence 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios the consequence is medium. 

Probability 

Additional traffic will be generated so the probability of impacts occurring without any mitigation is 

considered definite but with ongoing mitigation/maintenance measures it is considered the probability 

could reduce to low. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated scenario, the significance of this potential impact is medium and reduces to low with 

mitigation. SLR’s confidence level in this rating is moderate to high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – traffic 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated L H M M H M 

Mitigated L H M M L L 



(Appendix M). 



Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to reduce the potential for traffic impacts on the B1. 

Actions 

From the outset Auryx Gold will ensure that: 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-41 

� It will implement a driver trainer programme for all Auryx Gold employees to include: complying with 

speed limits, holding valid licences, ensuring vehicles are roadworthy, zero tolerance for drinking and 

driving and using lights appropriately for night driving; and 

� Contractors will be required to comply with Namibian Roads Authority regulations. 

Although not part of the current scope, Auryx Gold will ensure that the relocation/re-routing of road D2808 

is done in consultation with the relevant roads authority and that the recommendations of the traffic 

specialist report completed to support the application process are implemented to ensure the safety of all 

road users including pedestrians. 


Any mine related road accident will be handled in accordance with the Auryx Gold emergency response 

procedure. 

7.11 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC 

The information in this section was sourced from the social and economic specialist studies in Appendix 

K and Appendix L respectively. 


In the broadest sense (see table 7-15), the activities associated with the proposed project will have socio- 

economic impacts in all phases. Some of these are considered to be positive impacts and others are 

considered to be negative impacts. The separate groups of impacts are discussed below and must be 

read in the context of the baseline information included in Sections 4.7 and 4.8. 

TABLE 7-15: SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC IMPACTS – LINK TO PROJECT PHASES AND ACTIVITIES 


Construction activities 

Recruitment of contractors 

and workers 

Construction camp 

Operational activities 

Recruitment of contractors and 

employees 

Human Resource Management 

Decommissioning activities 

Retrenchment of contractors 

and workers 

Aftercare and maintenance 

activities 



7.11.2 ISSUE: ECONOMIC IMPACT 


Severity 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-42 

The LoM is characterised by an 18 month intensive construction phase involving the capital investment of 

some US$187 million, followed by operations lasting some ten years, merging into a decommissioning 

phase, followed by mine closure after 14 years. Clearly investment costs, operational costs and income 

will vary over the 14 year LoM, but the average direct contribution to Gross Namibian Income (GNI) of the 

mine during LoM will be between US$ 58 million and US$ 60 million which is very significant in local 

terms and would amount to around 0.6% of the total national GNI of Namibia. Further, due to the value 

added or income multiplier effect, this direct impact will induce some US$ 103 million in additional GNI 

within the broader economy. 

The whole mining and processing operation will create an average of 454 jobs which will peak to 491 jobs 

in 2020. Studies have calculated that for every job created by a mine in Namibia, a further additional 1.5 

job opportunities are created by suppliers and contractors, which would result in a further 680 jobs 

created by suppliers, contractors and service providers. 

Through employment and skills development, the proposed mine will contribute to the three national 

development goals of NDP4 – reducing income inequality, increasing job creation and economic growth. 

It will also contribute to the Otjozondjupa Regional Council’s strategic objective “to improve regional 

economic development and employment”. 

The economic spin-offs from the mine’s construction and operations will create empowerment opportunities 

in a range of skills and activities. Employment provides income to the employees, their immediate 

household members and to others living elsewhere in Namibia who depend on cash remittances. Thus the 

assessment of this impact can be summarised as having a high beneficial effect. The work experience 

and skills gained through the opportunities that the mine brings will have lasting benefits for all those 

employees. 

The negative land and natural resource use costs which are estimated to happen over the LoM have 

been measured at being just over 3% of the positive contribution of the mine. So the economic benefits 

clearly outweigh the negative economic impacts that may occur and the impact has a positive high 

severity both with and without mitigation. 

The other potential negative economic impact is concerned with mine closure. This is something which is 

common to all mines and must be planned for and mitigation provided because the major economic 

benefits that the increase in mining will bring to the country cannot be realised without the eventual 

impact of closure. 



Duration 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-43 

The direct positive economic impacts associated with the mine will occur for the life of mine. 

Quantitatively assessing the post closure impacts is not possible because there are a number of 

important unknown factors such as the general state of the future economy (local, national and world 

wide) and the future state of the mining sector in particular. 

Spatial scale 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios, the impact will be felt both in the Otjozondjupa region 

and nationally. The spatial scale is high. 

Consequence 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios the consequence is high and positive. 

Probability 

In the normal course of economic activity the net positive impacts will definitely occur. With mitigation, the 

negative impacts at mine closure are reduced. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated and mitigated scenario, the significance of this potential impact is high positive. SLR’s 

confidence in this rating is high. 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact – economic 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H+ M H H+ H+ H+ 

Mitigated H+ M H H+ H+ H+ 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to enhance the positive economic impacts and limit the 

negative economic impacts. 

Actions 


� Tender selection is weighted in favour of suppliers of goods and services which use local 

suppliers down the supply chain (assuming that the vendor is qualified and that they can deliver 

the requested product of the required standard in the requested time; 

� Mine procurement policies promote the use of small and medium enterprises; 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-44 

� A human resources policy which prioritises the selection of women for training and recruitment 

and which supports women to perform well in the workplace; 

� Skills development strategies and programmes are in place prior to construction to maximise use 

of the local labour force; 

� Support employees and community members to continue learning and developing skills so they 

too benefit from being able to offer labour flexibility and productivity, throughout the LoM and on 

mine closure; 

� Promote continuous learning programmes to diversify and upgrade skills; 

� Ensure skills upgrading during employment at mine is documented and accredited where 

possible so skills are recognised with future employers; 

� Maximise the permanent workforce; 

� Provide training on personal financial management; 

� Enable and promote home ownership throughout the workforce; and 

� Assist Otavi and Otjiwarongo town councils to diversify their economic activities. 



7.11.3 ISSUE: CHANGE OF LAND USE AND NEIGHBOURING COMMUNITY 


Severity 

The land use prior to Auryx Gold purchasing the four farms totalling more than 14,700 ha was ranching 

and some game farming. The average farm in this area of Namibia is about 5000 ha on which an average 

of 8 people are usually employed, including the owner. Specific data is not available for the four farms 

prior to their acquisition by Auryx. Currently Auryx has two employees working fulltime on the farms who 

supervise a number of labourers with the aim of upgrading and maintaining the farms. Some 

neighbouring farmers currently lease grazing land from Auryx. 

During construction, there will be up to 800 workers on site and the probability of poaching will be high. 

The mining footprint will be a small proportion of the four farms and once mining operations commence, 

much of the land use could be used for game farming and bush clearance, if not cattle farming. From 

post closure, the pit, TDF and waste rock dumps will cause irreversible land use change of moderate 

severity within the site boundary but the remaining land could be returned to ranching beef cattle and 

game farming. 

The closest direct neighbouring farms encircling the mine farms are: Erhadtshof, Bergershof, Okaruiput, 

Erpfsfarm, Houmoad, Okaputa, Okaputa West, Stark, Fisher, Lardner, Hester, Embla and Tirol. Since 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-45 

2007, these farms have had the stress of possible impacts that might occur due to mining on Farm 

Otjikoto. The main perceived impacts include: 

� Their land may devalue due to mine development 

� Lowering of the groundwater and consequent long-term threat to sustainable farming 

� Loss of sense of place and subsequent loss of livelihoods from tourism during construction and 

operations. 

� Squatter camps, poaching and reduction of safety, especially if a construction camp is 

maintained on site. 

� The increase in traffic on the B1. 

Changes in land use will occur but the actual mine footprint is only a small part of the overall farming area 

and the remainder could continue to be used productively. In respect of neighbouring communities whilst 

these are well separated from the mine the perceived fears identified above are potential negative 

impacts. In the unmitigated scenario the severity is considered medium but this could be reduced to low 

to medium with mitigation. 

Duration 

Some of the changes in land use will be permanent with or without mitigation however the impacts on 

adjoining farms should cease on the closure of the mine. The duration is therefore considered high to 

medium in both the mitigated and unmitigated scenarios. 

Spatial scale 

Land use change will be local to the mine but impact on neighbouring properties will extend beyond the 

mine boundary. The spatial scale is medium to low. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario the consequence associated with land use and the neighbouring community 

is medium. This may reduce to medium to low in the mitigated scenario as the severity is reduced 

through management interventions. 

Probability 

The probability of impact occurring is likely in both the mitigated and unmitigated scenarios. 

Significance 

In the unmitigated and unmitigated scenarios, the significance of this potential impact is medium. SLR’s 

confidence level in this rating is moderate. 



Tabulated summary of the assessed impact–changes to land use and neighbouring community 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-46 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated M H-M M-L M M M 

Mitigated M-L H-M M-L M-L M M 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to limit the impacts associated with changes of land use and 

neighbouring community. 

Actions 

Auryx Gold will: 

� Manage the non-mining areas as productively as possible, including restoring bush encroached 

areas for productive farming. 

� During construction, the construction camp and mining area should be fenced as early as 

possible to minimise security problems on the Auryx and neighbouring farms. 

� Establish a platform for on-going dialogue with neighbouring farmers, as a special interest group 

and provide a named point of contact. 

� Give neighbouring farms opportunities to provide goods and services, as a form of 

compensation, e.g. to run a shop, provide farm produce and visitor accommodation. 

� Ensure the construction workers camp includes some senior management to ensure controls are 

enforced. 

� Grow bush fences/ thick shrubs around the construction camp and farm’s perimeters as shields 

from noise and dust and to prevent walkers. 

� Enforce strict rules of no walking except along roads. 



7.11.4 ISSUE: IN MIGRATION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH/SAFETY AND SECURITY 


Severity 

The project has relatively high labour requirements, for both the construction and operations phase, 

which is likely to exceed local capacity, especially for semi and skilled work. In addition, with national 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-47 

unemployment at 51.2%, the lure of employment opportunities will encourage people to move to the 

mine’s recruitment points. 

The construction phase will last about 18 months and will require a workforce of about 500 people which 

will peak to 800 people at times. Operations will require about 454 people over the 11 year life of mine. 

Given the number of jobs to be created by the project, it is estimated that the potential number of people 

who could descend on Otjiwarongo and Otavi could to range from 3,700 to over 12,000 migrants. 

However, Otjiwarongo’s capacity to meet the needs of the project, in terms of available goods and 

services, is good. Therefore it would be sensible for the two towns to anticipate and plan for substantial 

in-migration of around 7 000 people, shared between the two towns. Most town councils perceive rapid 

in-migration as a threat and an inevitable but unwanted problem. Some try to implement restrictive 

policies which nearly always fail and often do great damage to the economy and to the lives of the 

migrants and their families. Migrants are generally seeking improved living conditions and economic 

opportunities from where they have come from. They may be returning family or extended family 

members originally from the area, project employees from outside the area with or without their families, 

opportunistic entrepreneurs in the formal and informal sectors, unskilled or skilled job seekers. 

In the local context, Otavi has suffered out-migration and now has half the population it recorded ten 

years ago. By contrast, Otjiwarongo has grown by 10,000 people. 

In-ward migration can have positive and negative impacts such as: 

� Stimulating the local economy and community organization. Mineworkers will require housing 

and this will stimulate the construction of housing in both Otavi and Otjiwarongo. Wages and 

salaries will be injected into the local economy where they live. 

� Developing informal settlements which increase demand/ need for basic infrastructure –housing, 

clean water supplies, sanitation, electricity and waste management systems. 

� Increasing pressure on government services such as health and education facilities, their staffing 

and running cost requirements. 

� Increasing incidence of social ills including alcoholism, drug abuse, prostitution, gambling & 

criminality. Alcohol abuse is part of the accepted social norm in Namibia and is often stimulated 

by cash earnings which increase the likelihood of domestic violence (usually against women and 

children), unprotected sex and the spread of HIV. The influx of job seekers may increase over- 

crowding, which increase the spread of TB. 

The positive impacts have already been considered in Section 7.11.2 and this section will consider the 

negative impacts set out above. In addition neighbouring farms are concerned about their security and 

safety, particularly during construction when up to 800 people will be housed on site for over a year. They 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-48 

are concerned about the increased traffic on the B1 and road safety at the mine turn-off (assessed in 

Section 7.10). 

During public consultations, neighbours recommended that the construction camp should be in Otavi. 

Although this would bring economic benefits to Otavi, it could cause a huge increase in social ills and 

health risks such as sexually transmitted diseases and unwanted pregnancies. Experienced mine 

managers believe that it will be easier to restrict construction workers in a camp on the site and enforce 

tighter security than if it were in town. 

Unmanaged and unmitigated, these social ills can have severe consequences which last beyond the life 

of mine but a number of policies and actions can be taken which can mitigate the impact and reduce its 

severity. However these efforts must be carefully co-ordinated with those of local government and the 

community, through planned engagement and public-private partnerships. 

In the unmitigated scenario, the inward migration and community health/safety and security issue is 

therefore predicted to have a high severity and in the mitigated scenario this could be reduced but the 

challenge is significant because it will involve a focussed and combined effort from the local communities 

and commercial, NGO and Government sectors. 

Duration 

Social impacts associated with the project have the potential to extend well beyond the life of the mine. 

The duration is therefore considered high in the unmitigated scenario, with potential to reduce to medium 

with mitigation. 

Spatial scale 

In both the unmitigated and mitigated scenarios, the impacts of in migration and community health/safety 

and security will be felt mainly in the Otjozondjupa Region. The spatial scale is medium. 

Consequence 

In the unmitigated scenario the consequence associated with in migration and community health/safety 

and security is high. This may reduce to medium to high in the mitigated scenario if the severity is 

reduced through management interventions. 

Probability 

In the unmitigated scenario the impact is definite. In the mitigated scenario this probability may be 

reduced but the challenge is significant and it involves multiple parties across different sectors in the 

public and private domain. 



Significance 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-49 


significance may be reduced to medium to high. SLR’s confidence level in this rating is moderate 

because of the question around the chances of succeeding with the mitigation measures 

Tabulated summary of the assessed impact –in migration and community health/safety and security 



Scale 

Occurrence 

Unmitigated H H M H M-H H 

Mitigated M-L H-M M M-H M-H M-H 



(Appendix M). 

Objective 

The objective of the mitigation measures is to limit the impacts associated with in migration and 

community health/safety and security. 

Actions 

Auryx Gold will: 

� Form a representative stakeholder committee, genuinely representative of those most affected by 

the project – such as landowners, farm-workers, town councils and residents committees – to 

assist with the monitoring of social impacts and the effectiveness of the mitigation measures put 

in place. 

� Fence in the working area of the ML and employ strict security. Auryx must ensure that the 

security of personnel and property is carried out in accordance with relevant human rights 

principles and in a manner that avoids or minimizes risks to the neighbouring community. 

� Repeatedly inform the public that no workers will be recruited at the site gate to protect direct 

neighbours. 

� Take measures to prevent Platveld from becoming a squatter settlement. 

� Have zero tolerance to alcohol in the workplace and on site. 

� Establish a comprehensive HIV / AIDS / TB workplace policy and wellness programme. Tender 

requirements for all contractors should stipulate clear HIV policies and programmes and should 

be part of their reporting requirements. Auryx Gold shall also develop community wellness 

programmes as and where required – in consultation with the neighbouring towns and farming. 

(This wellness programme to include HIV/AIDS/TB related issues). 

� Support partnerships that encourage a sense of community and that combat social ills, e.g. multi- 

purpose community & skills development centres; networking points for new migrants; sports 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 7-50 

tournaments, social clubs, youth clubs, activities that promote women’s empowerment that can 

lead to gender equality and community policing. 

� Avoid constructing mine housing in compounds in the nearby towns but should promote 

integration in existing residential areas, wherever possible. Home ownership should be promoted 

but many employees will prefer to invest in their areas of origin, which may not be from the 

Otjozondjupa Region. Such employees would then rent accommodation in Otavi or Otjiwarongo. 

� Use Auryx’s Corporate Social Investment (CSI) strategy to give support to local economic 

development in Otavi from its operations phase. This will encourage, stimulate and support SME 

development. 

� Build up local skills before operations begin by working with local training establishments, 

providing bursaries for key skills. Actively recruit women for training and employment into the 

mining sector. 

� Give preferential recruitment to Otjozondjupa residents. 

� Include recruitment of Grade 10 school-leavers who pass an IQ, English and Maths test. 

� Through its CSI strategy, partner the National Housing Action group (NHAG) and the Shack 

Dwellers Federation (SHDF) to enable residents in Otavi’s informal settlement to negotiate with 

their town council and to help themselves.. 

� Support the town councils to have enlightened town plans which enable affordable land tenure 

and business development. 

� Negotiate with the Ministry of Health and Social Services to provide primary health care services 

to neighbouring farm-workers around farm Otjikoto, from its mine clinic. 

� Continue to support Otavi schools through its CSI programme and listen to the schools priority 

requests and assess how it can best provide support. 


Auryx must maintain appropriate fire control measures throughout the four farms. Emergency procedures 

and contact numbers of neighbouring landowners and local Farmers Associations should be available for 

the site manager at all times. 



8 KEY ASSUMPTIONS, UNCERTAINTIES AND LIMITATIONS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 8-1 

Assumptions, uncertainties and limitations have been identified in the various specialist studies. The 

more significant of these are included below. 

8.1 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT LIMIT 

The environmental assessment focused on third parties only and did not assess health and safety 

impacts on workers because the assumption was made that these aspects are separately regulated by 

health and safety legislation, policies and standards, and that Auryx Gold will adhere to these. 

8.2 PREDICTIVE MODELS IN GENERAL 

All predictive models are only as accurate as the input data provided to the modellers. If any of the input 

data is found to be inaccurate or is not applicable because of project design changes that occur over 

time, then the model predictions will be less accurate. 

8.3 TOPOGRAPHY AND SURFACE WATER 

No baseline surface water quality data was available 


The following assumptions were made for the groundwater flow model: 

� The geological structures (faults) were modelled as permeable linear zones. The faults were 

modelled as discontinuous across the schist –marble contact and the contact itself was modelled 

as impermeable. 

� Prior to development, the system is in equilibrium and therefore in steady state. 

� The open cast mine are modelled as drains which take water out of the system. 

� The accuracy and scale of the assessment will result in deviations at point e.g. individual 

boreholes. 

When assumptions were made or reference values used, a conservative approach was followed. 

8.5 AIR QUALITY 

Human health risk assessment is an intricate process based on high level data. Dispersion modelling 

results are directly related to the input data with any error introduced in the input data carried through to 

the results. Thus, it is important to list and evaluate all data limitations and assumptions to ensure these 

are considered during interpretation of the results. 

� Emissions were based on the process description and mine layout plan as provided. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 8-2 

� Since it is a proposed mine, no site specific particle size fraction-, moisture- or silt content data 

were available for the various sources and use was made of information obtained from existing 

gold mines in the region. Once the mine is operational, particle size distribution should be 

determined for the various wind dependent sources and the dispersion model simulations 

updated. 

� Routine emissions for the proposed operations were simulated. Blasting is regarded as non- 

routine (upset) event, occurring only intermittently for short durations. Blasting was accounted for 

in the modelling, simulated as if occurring for an hour every day. 

� Dispersion models don’t contain all the features of a real system but contain the feature of 

interest for the management issue or scientific problem to be solved (MFE, 2001). Gaussian 

plume models are regarded to have an uncertainty range of between -50% to 200%. It has 

generally been found that the accuracy of off-the-shelf dispersion models improve with increased 

averaging periods. The accurate prediction of instantaneous peaks are the most difficult and are 

normally performed with more complicated dispersion models specifically fine-tuned and 

validated for the location. The duration of these short-term, peak concentrations are often only for 

a few minutes and on-site meteorological data are then essential. 

� The dispersion model (AERMOD) cannot compute real time mining processes, therefore average 

mining process throughputs were utilised. Even though the nature of open pit mining operations 

(pit utilisation and roads) change over the life of mine, the proposed open pit mining area was 

modelled to reflect the worst-case condition (i.e. resulting in the highest impacts). For example, 

retention of dust generated within the open pit will result in up to 50% reduction in TSP emissions 

and 5% of PM10 emissions according to the NPI. 

� Emissions from unpaved roads were calculated using the US.EPA AP42 emission factor 

equation. This equation does not account for vehicle speed that will influence road emissions. 

The silt and moisture contents are assumed to remain constant over the entire road are, which 

may not be the case. Gaussian plume models require hourly average meteorological data and 

cannot account for the intermittent releases from vehicles moving over road surfaces. It is 

therefore likely that the predicted impacts from road emissions may be conservative. 

� The contribution from windblown was accounted for in the dispersion simulations as best possible 

(i.e. particle size distribution, moisture content and clay content of the TDF was assumed to be 

similar to other gold mines in southern Africa). Wind erosion emissions are very sensitive to 

source characteristics and atmospheric conditions. Any binding of the particles such as natural 

crusting, vegetation cover and moisture will reduce emissions significantly. A threshold wind 

speed of 5.4 m/s as per US.EPA description was used. 

� The reducing effect of rain on fugitive dust emissions have not been accounted for in this 

dispersion model and would result in lower average impacts. 

� The impact assessment was limited to airborne particulates (including TSP and PM10). 

Mechanical operations such as associated with mining give rise to particles mainly in the TSP 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 8-3 

and PM10 fraction whereas combustion sources result in the finer PM2.5 fraction. For this 

reason, the main focus of this study was on TSP and PM10. 

� Gaseous emissions would result from mine vehicles and equipment, and from the Gold Smelter. 

Emission rates are dependent on the amount of fuel use and on the vehicle and equipment type 

and size. The Gold Plant emissions depends on the process, raw materials used and source 

parameters. Information on these processes was limited and these emissions could not be 

quantified as part of this assessment. These emissions are likely to be intermittent and the 

impacts should not be significant. 

� The construction, decommissioning and closure phases were assessed qualitatively. 

� It was assumed that all processing operations will have ceased by the decommissioning and 

closure phase. The potential for impacts during this phase will depend on the extent of demolition 

and rehabilitation efforts during closure and on features which will remain. Information regarding 

the extent of demolition and/or rehabilitation procedures were limited and therefore not included 

in the emissions inventory or the dispersion modelling. 

8.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION 

Not applicable 



8.8 VISUAL 


8.9 ARCHAEOLOGY 


8.10 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC 

The 2011 census has released some provisional population data however other source material available 

is still based on the 2001 census. 

8.11 TRAFFIC 

No surveys of the B1 were carried out. 



9 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT AND CONCLUSIONS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 9-1 

The potential negative impacts associated with the proposed project are expected to be of mainly low to 

medium significance apart from air quality, groundwater and some social impacts and therefore provided 

that the relevant mitigation measures are successfully implemented there is no environmental reason 

why the proposed project should not be approved (a tabulated summary of the potential impacts is 

presented in table 9-1 below). 

In addition the project will have significant positive economic impacts of benefit to the local, regional and 

national economy of Namibia. 

TABLE 9-1: SUMMARY OF POTENTIAL IMPACTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PROPOSED MINING 

PROJECT 

Section Potential impact Significance of the impact 

(the ratings are negative unless 

otherwise specified) 

Topography Injury to people from hazardous excavations and 

infrastructure. 

Biodiversity Physical destruction of biodiversity from clearing land 

and placing infrastructure. 

Loss of biodiversity from the reduction of water 

resources as an ecological driver. 

General disturbance of biodiversity through a range of 

aspects including dust, noise, vibration, pollution, 

lighting, firewood collection, poaching, and vehicle 

movement. 

Unmitigated Mitigated 

High Medium 

Medium Medium 

Medium Low 

Medium Medium 

Surface water Pollution of surface water Medium Low 

Groundwater Dewatering and mine supply. Medium Medium to Low 

Groundwater contamination. High High to Medium 

Air quality Air pollution High Medium to High 

Noise Noise pollution in the context of noise sensitive 

developments. 

Medium to 

Low 

Vibration Blast injury to third parties or damage to structures. Medium Medium to Low 

Archaeology Damage to archaeological sites. High Low 

Visual impacts Visual impact from key viewpoints. High Medium 

Socioeconomic 

impacts 

Economic impact including the positive impacts on 

regional and national economies 

Low 

High+ High+ 

Impacts on land use and neighbouring communities, Medium Medium 

In migration and community health and safety High Medium to High 

Traffic impacts Traffic impacts on users of the B1. Medium Low 

Werner Petrick 

(Project Manager) 

Alex Pheiffer 

(Project Reviewer) 

Alex Speiser & Chris Herbert 

(Project Assistant) 



10 REFERENCES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 10-1 

ASEC & Bittner Water Consult 2004. Preliminary environmental overview and impact identification for a 

proposed mining operation at the gold deposit at Otjikoto.-Report No. 049/03 to AVMIN Namibia, 

Windhoek. 





Avdale Namibia (Pty) Ltd 2003. Otjikoto Gold Project: Pre - Feasibility Mining Geotechnics Report. 

Barnes, J. & Jones, B. 2009.Game ranching in Namibia. In: Suich, H., Child, B. with Spenceley, A. (Eds.). 

Evolution and innovation in wildlife conservation: From parks and game ranches to transfrontier 

conservation areas. Earthscan, London, UK.113-126. 

Barnes, J. & Alberts, M. 2012.Assessment of peoples' engagement in sustainable use activities on the 

coastal zone of Namibia.Namibian Coast Conservation and Management (NACOMA) Project, Ministry of 


BIWAC, 2007.Environmental Impact Assessment of the Otjikoto Gold Mine Project, Otjozondjupa Region, 

Namibia.Preliminary hydrocensus. 

Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of Interior. 2004. Visual Resource Management Manual 

8400 

Chamber of Mines. Dec 2011. Statement at the Mining Industry briefing meetings with MME. 

Clegg, A. 2011.The Namibian education Time Bomb. The Namibian 01.02.2011 

El Obeid S., Mendelsohn J., Lajars M., Forster N., Brule G. 2001. Health in Namibia – Progress and 

Challenges, RAISON 

Griffin, E. & Dippenaar-Schoeman, A.S. 1991. A checklist of, and references to, the Namibian sppider 

fauna (Arachnida, Araneae).Cimbebasia13: 115-183. 

Griffin, R.E. 1998. Species richness and biogeography of non-acarine arachnids in Namibia.Biodiversity 

and Conservation7: 467-481. 

Griffin, M. 2007. Specialist report on the potential influence of the proposed Otjikoto mine on indigenous 

Namibian amphibians, reptiles and mammals. Report prepared for A. Speiser Environmental Consultants 

cc. 

Giess, W. 1971. A preliminary vegetation map of Namibia Dinteria 4: 5-114. 

GRN. 2011. The New Equitable Economic Empowerment Framework (NEEEF). 

Hull, RB; Bishop, ID.Journal of Environmental Management. Vol 27, no. 1, pg 99-108. 

Humavindu, M., Barnes, J., Nott, C., de Klerk, N. & Kruger, B. 2011.Economic valuation of good 

rangeland management and incentives for efficient implementation of the National Rangeland 

Strategy.Country Pilot Partnership Programme, Ministry of Environment and Tourism, Windhoek, 

Namibia. 53pp. 



SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 10-2 

IEMA, ‘Guidelines for Landscape and Visual Impact Assessment’, U.K Institute of Environmental 

Management and Assessment Second Edition, Spon Press, 2002., Pg 9. 

IEMA, ‘Guidelines for Landscape and Visual Impact Assessment’ U.K Institute of Environmental 

Management and Assessment Second Edition, Spon Press, 2002.Pg 120/121. Latin genius locī :genius, 

spirit + locī, genitive sing. oflocus, place 

IFC Policy on Social and Environmental Sustainability (paragraph 20). 

Lange, G-M. 2003. National wealth, natural capital and sustainable development in Namibia. Research 

Discussion Paper No 54, Directorate of Environmental Affairs, Ministry of Environment and Tourism, 


Magurran, A.E. 2004.Measuring biological diversity. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford. 

May, R.M. 1978.The dynamics and diversity of insect faunas. 188 - 204. In Mound, L.A. & Waloff, N. 

Diversity of insect faunas. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford. 

Mendelsohn J, Jarvis A, Roberts C, Robertson T 2002. Atlas of Namibia: a portrait of the land and its 

people. David Philip, Cape Town. 

Mendelsohn et al 2009 

Mey, W. 2001. Observations of the caddisfly fauna (Insecta: Trichoptera) of three perennial rivers in 

northern Namibia. Cimbebasia 17: 229-236. 

MHSS. 2008. Namibia Demographic and Health Survey 2006/07 

MHSS. 2010. Report on the 2010 National HIV Sentinel Survey 

MoE. 2011, Ibid 

MoE, 2011.Education Statistics 2009.Education and Management Information System (EMIS) 

MoLS. 2010. Namibia Labour Force Survey 2008, Ministry of Labour and Social Welfare 

Murphy A., Southern Africa, Retrieved on 27 February 2012 at Google books, p.346 

Namib Hydrosearch (Pty) Ltd 2004. Groundwater Resource Assessment for the Otjikoto Project. 

NACSO 2010, Namibia’s Communal Conservancies: a review of progress and challenges in 2009. 

NPC. 2005. 2001 Population and Housing Census: Otjozondjupa Region. 

NPC. 2006. Namibia Household Income and Expenditure Survey 2003/2004 

NPC. 2008. A Review of Poverty and Inequality in Namibia 

NPC. 2012. Namibia 2011 Population and Housing Census Preliminary Results 

Oatley TB, Oschadleus HD, Navarro RA, Underhill LG 1998 Review of ring recoveries of birds of prey in 

southern Africa: 1948-1998. Avian Demography Unit University of Cape Town. 

Oberholzer, B. 2005. Guideline for involving visual and aesthetic specialists in EIA processes: Edition 1. 

CSIR Report No ENV-S-C 2005 053 F. Republic of South Africa, Provincial Government of the Western 

Cape, Department of Environmental Affairs and Development Planning, Cape Town 

Otavi Village Council Strategic Plan 2009-2013 



Otjozondjupa Regional Council. 2011. Otjozondjupa Regional LED Strategy 

ORC Strategic Plan 2009-2014, p11 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page 10-3 

Prendini, L. 2005 New Records and Observations on the Natural History of Lisposoma elegans and L. 

josehermana (Scorpiones: Bothriuridae). American Museum Novitates 3487: 1-11. 

RAISON. 2011. An Atlas of Poverty in Namibia. Central Bureau of Statistics 

SAIEA 2003.Environmental Impact assessment in southern Africa. Southern African Institute for 

Environmental Assessment publication, Windhoek. 

Samways, M.J. 1993. A spatial and process sub-regional framework for insect and biodiversity 

conservation research and management. In Gaston, K.J., New, T.R. & Samways, M.J. Perspectives on 

insect conservation. Intercept, Andover. 

Saunders, D. 2010. Arrival City. Heinemann 

Scholes, R.J. 1997. Savanna, pp. 258-277. In: Cowling, R.M., Richardson, D.M. & Pierce, S.M. 

Vegetation of southern Africa. CambridgeUniversity Press, Cambridge. 

Seimons, W. S. 1989. Omarassa-Otjiwarongo RWSS: Report on the geohydrological investigation and 

evaluation of the Marble Aquifer to supplement water supply to Otjiwarongo town.- DWA Report no. 

12/7/G8. 

Sherbourne, R. 2010. Guide to the Namibian economy 2010. Institute for Public Policy Research, 


Suhling, F & Martens, A. 2007.Dragonflies and damselflies of Namibia. Gamsberg Macmillan, Windhoek. 

Sutherland, W.J. 2000. The Conservation Handbook: Research, Management and Policy. Blackwell 


Turpie, J. et al. Climate change vulnerability and adaptation assessment for Namibia's biodiversity and 

protected area system. Strengthening the Protected Area Network (SPAN) Project, Ministry of 


UNSD/United Nations Statistical Division. 2012. National accounts main aggregates database 

downloads. United Nations Statistical Division, New York, USA. 

[Accessed at: < http://unstats.un.org/unsd/snaama/dnlList.asp >] 

Van Wyk, J.D., van Rensburg, B. & van Rensburg, A. 2011.Namibian economic research: Namibia 

macro-economic outlook 2011-2012. Investment House Namibia, Windhoek, Namibia. 54pp. 

World Bank. 2009. World Development Report 2009: Reshaping Economic Geography. Washington: 

IBRD. 

World Health Organization, 2000 

http://www.equator-principles.com/principles.shtml 

http://209.88.21.36/opencms/opencms/grnnet/OPM/ProgramsProjects/Tesef.html ( 

www.npc.gov.na/vision/vision_2030bgd.htm 

http://home.arcor.de/clayhouse/ 

http://www.moe.gov.na/news_article.php?id=49&title=Results of The 2011, Junior Secondary Certificate 

http://www.cosdef.org.na/ 



APPENDIX A: PROJECT TEAM CVS 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page A 



APPENDIX B: INFORMATION SHARING RECORD 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page B 



APPENDIX C: IAP DATABASE 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page C 



APPENDIX D: ISSUES TABLE 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page D 



APPENDIX E: GROUNDWATER STUDIES 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page E 



APPENDIX F: AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page F 



APPENDIX G: NOISE ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page G 



APPENDIX H: BIODIVERSITY ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page H 



APPENDIX I: CULTURAL HERITAGE ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page I 



APPENDIX J: VISUAL ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page J 



APPENDIX K: SOCIAL ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page K 



APPENDIX L: ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page L 



APPENDIX M: OTJIKOTO EMP 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


Page M 



SLR Reference: 733.01023.00002 

Title: Otjikoto Gold Mine EMP 

Report Number: Doc. no. 1 

Proponent: Auryx Gold 

SLR Ref. 733.01023.0002 


RECORD OF REPORT DISTRIBUTION 

Name Entity Copy No. Date issued Issuer 

Mr. Theo Nghitila, 

Environmental 

Commissioner 

Ministry of Environment & Tourism 1 16 July 2012 

Page N 

W. Petrick 

Erasmus Shivolo Ministry of Mines and Energy (MME) 2 16 July 2012 W. Petrick 

COPYRIGHT 

Copyright for these technical reports vests with SLR Consulting unless otherwise agreed to in 

writing. The reports may not be copied or transmitted in any form whatsoever to any person 

without the written permission of the Copyright Holder. This does not preclude the authorities’ 

use of the report for consultation purposes or the applicant’s use of the report for project- 

related purposes.

2 Otjikoto Final EIA Report 5MB - Asecnam.com

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?